section of this manual. PREGNANT WOMEN. NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position ...
This manual was prepared to help you un-derstand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle ... The “Maintenance and schedules” section of this manual explains details about...
OWNER’S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle. CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING WARNING Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
2019 KICKS
OWNER'S MANUAL and MAINTENANCE INFORMATION
For your safety, read carefully and keep in this vehicle.
CALIFORNIA PROPOSITION 65 WARNING
WARNING Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or off-highway motor vehicle can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide, phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust, do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more information go to www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.
FOREWORD
READ FIRST--THEN DRIVE SAFELY
This manual was prepared to help you understand the operation and maintenance of your vehicle so that you may enjoy many miles (kilometers) of driving pleasure. Please read through this manual before operating your vehicle.
A separate Warranty Information Booklet explains details about the warranties covering your vehicle. The "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual explains details about maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Additionally, a separate Customer Care/Lemon Law Booklet (U.S. only) will explain how to resolve any concerns you may have with your vehicle, and clarify your rights under your state's lemon law.
When you require any service or have any questions, a NISSAN dealer will be glad to assist you with the extensive resources available to them.
In addition to factory-installed options, your vehicle may also be equipped with additional accessories installed prior to delivery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped. It is important that you familiarize yourself with all disclosures,
warnings, cautions and instructions concerning proper use of such accessories prior to operating the vehicle and/or accessory. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details concerning the particular accessories with which your vehicle is equipped.
Before driving your vehicle, please read this Owner's Manual carefully. This will ensure familiarity with controls and maintenance requirements assisting you in the safe operation of your vehicle.
WARNING
IMPORTANT SAFETY INFORMATION REMINDERS!
Follow these important driving rules to help ensure a safe and comfortable trip for you and your passengers!
NEVER drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs.
ALWAYS observe posted speed limits and never drive too fast for conditions.
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving and avoid using vehicle features or taking other actions that could distract you.
ALWAYS use your seat belts and appropriate child restraint systems. Preteen children should be seated in the rear seat.
WHEN READING THE MANUAL
ALWAYS provide information about the proper use of vehicle safety features to all occupants of the vehicle.
ALWAYS review this Owner's Manual for important safety information.
MODIFICATION OF YOUR VEHICLE
This vehicle should not be modified. Modification could affect its performance, safety, emissions or durability and may even violate governmental regulations. In addition, damage or performance problems resulting from modifications may not be covered under NISSAN warranties.
WARNING
Installing an aftermarket On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) plug-in device that uses the port during normal driving, for example remote insurance company monitoring, remote vehicle diagnostics, telematics or engine reprogramming, may cause interference or damage to vehicle systems. We do not recommend or endorse the use of any aftermarket OBD plug-in devices, unless specifically approved by NISSAN. The vehicle warranty may not cover damage caused by any aftermarket plug-in device.
This manual includes information for all features and equipment available on this model. Features and equipment in your vehicle may vary depending on model, trim level, options selected, order, date of production, region or availability. Therefore, you may find information about features or equipment that are not included or installed on your vehicle.
All information, specifications and illustrations in this manual are those in effect at the time of printing. NISSAN reserves the right to change specifications, performance, design or component suppliers without notice and without obligation. From time to time, NISSAN may update or revise this manual to provide Owners with the most accurate information currently available. Please carefully read and retain with this manual all revision updates sent to you by NISSAN to ensure you have access to accurate and upto-date information regarding your vehicle. Current versions of vehicle Owner's Manuals and any updates can also be found in the Owner section of the NISSAN website at https://owners.nissanusa.com/nowners/ navigation/manualsGuide. If you have questions concerning any information in your Owner's Manual, contact NISSAN Consumer Affairs. For contact information, re-
fer to the NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM page in this Owner's Manual.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
You will see various symbols in this manual. They are used in the following ways:
WARNING
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause death or serious personal injury. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed precisely.
CAUTION
This is used to indicate the presence of a hazard that could cause minor or moderate personal injury or damage to your vehicle. To avoid or reduce the risk, the procedures must be followed carefully.
APD1005
If you see this symbol, it means "Do not do this" or "Do not let this happen."
If you see a symbol similar to these in an illustration, it means the arrow points to the front of the vehicle.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these indicate movement or action.
Arrows in an illustration that are similar to these call attention to an item in the illustration.
CALIFORNIA PERCHLORATE ADVISORY
Some vehicle parts, such as lithium batteries, may contain perchlorate material. The following advisory is provided: "Perchlorate Material special handling may apply. For additional information, refer to www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/ perchlorate/".
© Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
All rights reserved. No part of this Owner's Manual may be reproduced or stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted in any form, or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording or otherwise, without the prior written permission of Nissan Mexicana, S. A. de C. V.
NISSAN CUSTOMER CARE PROGRAM
NISSAN CARES . . .
Both NISSAN and your NISSAN dealer are dedicated to serving all your automotive needs. Your satisfaction with your vehicle and your NISSAN dealer are our primary concerns. Your NISSAN dealer is always available to assist you with all your automobile sales and service needs.
However, if there is something that your NISSAN dealer cannot assist you with or you would like to provide NISSAN directly with comments or questions, please contact the NISSAN Consumer Affairs Department using our toll-free number:
For U.S. customers 1-800-NISSAN-1 (1-800-647-7261)
For Canadian customers 1-800-387-0122
The Consumer Affairs Department will ask for the following information:
Your name, address, and telephone number
Vehicle identification number (attached to the top of the instrument panel on the driver's side)
Date of purchase
Current odometer reading
Your NISSAN dealer's name
Your comments or questions
OR
You can write to NISSAN with the information at:
For U.S. customers Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003 or via e-mail at: nnaconsumeraffairs@nissan-usa.com
For Canadian customers Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario L4W 4Z5 or via e-mail at: information.centre@nissancanada.com
If you prefer, visit us at: www.nissanusa.com (for U.S. customers) or www.nissan.ca (for Canadian customers)
We appreciate your interest in NISSAN and thank you for buying a quality NISSAN vehicle.
Table of Illustrated table of contents
0
Contents Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
1
Instruments and controls
2
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
3
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4
Starting and driving
5
In case of emergency
6
Appearance and care
7
Do-it-yourself
8
Maintenance and schedules
9
Technical and consumer information
10
Index
11
0 Illustrated table of contents
Air bags, seat belts and child restraints . . . . . . . . . . 0-2 Exterior front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-3 Exterior rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-4 Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-5
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-6 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 0-8 Warning and indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0-9
AIR BAGS, SEAT BELTS AND CHILD RESTRAINTS
0-2 Illustrated table of contents
1. Supplemental air bags (P. 1-42) 2. Occupant classification sensor
(weight sensor) (P. 1-42) 3. Head restraints/headrests (P. 1-5) 4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact
and rollover supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 5. Front seat belt with pretensioner(s) and shoulder height adjuster (P. 1-10, 1-42) 6. Top tether anchor (located on seatback) (P. 1-21) 7. LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) (P. 1-21) 8. Rear seats (P. 1-2) 9. Front seat side-mounted sideimpact supplemental air bags (P. 1-42) 10. Front seats (P. 1-2) 11. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-42) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LIC3960
EXTERIOR FRONT
1. Engine hood (P. 3-21) 2. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39) 3. Windshield (P. 8-16) 4. Power windows (P. 2-60) 5. Door locks (P. 3-4)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® (P. 3-2) Keys (P. 3-2) 6. Mirrors (P. 3-28) Side camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-15) 7. Tire pressure (P. 8-27)
Flat tire (P. 6-3) Tire chains (P. 8-27) 8. Headlight and turn signal switch
(P. 2-42) Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23) 9. Fog light switch (if so equipped)
(P. 2-42) Daytime Running Lights (DRL)
system (if so equipped) (P. 2-42) 10. Front view camera (if so equipped)
(P. 4-15)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LIC3972
Illustrated table of contents 0-3
EXTERIOR REAR 0-4 Illustrated table of contents
1. Antenna (P. 4-63) 2. Rear window defroster switch
(P. 2-41) 3. High mount stop light (P. 8-23) 4. Rear wiper and washer switch
(P. 2-39) 5. Liftgate release (P. 3-21)
Rearview camera (P. 4-8, 4-15) 6. Replacing bulbs (P. 8-23) 7. Fuel-filler door (P. 3-24)
Fuel-filler cap (P. 3-24) Fuel recommendation (P. 10-2) 8. Child safety rear door lock (P. 3-4) Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LIC3961
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
1. Glove box (P. 2-51) 2. Rearview mirror (P. 3-28) 3. Map lights (P. 2-63) 4. Sun visors (P. 3-27) 5. Luggage hooks (P. 2-51) 6. Center console storage (P. 2-51)
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
LII2455
Illustrated table of contents 0-5
INSTRUMENT PANEL 0-6 Illustrated table of contents
1. Vents (P. 4-30) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-42) 3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) Horn (P. 2-47) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-11) Trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9) Vehicle information display (if so equipped) (P. 2-22) 5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39) 6. Front passenger airbag status light (P. 1-42) 7. Center display controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42) Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42) 8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42) 10. Passenger's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 11. Glove box (P. 2-51)
LII2579
12. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-39) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-47)
13. Shift lever (P. 5-15) 14. Push-button ignition switch
(P. 5-9) 15. Power outlet (P. 2-49)
USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-42) AUX jack (P. 4-2, 4-42) 16. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P. 4-2, 4-67) Cruise control switches (P. 5-39) 17. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-42) 18. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock lever (P. 3-26) 19. Hood release (P. 3-21) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-24) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) switch (if so equipped) (P 2-48) 20. Steering wheel switches for audio control (P. 4-2, 4-62) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-22)
21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-48) Enter/select switch for trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)
* Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
Illustrated table of contents 0-7
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
0-8 Illustrated table of contents
HR16DE engine 1. Engine coolant reservoir (P. 8-4) 2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir
(P. 8-10) 3. Engine oil filler cap (P. 8-5) 4. Engine dipstick (P. 8-5) 5. Brake fluid reservoir (P. 8-9) 6. Fuse box (P. 8-18) 7. Battery (P. 8-11) 8. Air cleaner (P. 8-15) 9. Engine drive belt location (P. 8-13)
LDI3247
WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
Warning light
or
Name
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light
Page 2-12
Automatic Emer- 2-12 gency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped)
Brake warning
2-12
light
or
Charge warning
2-13
light
Door open warn- 2-13 ing light (if so equipped)
Warning light
Name
Engine oil pressure warning light
Page 2-13
High temperature 2-14 warning light (red) (if so equipped)
Low fuel warning 2-14 light (if so equipped)
Low tire pressure 2-14 warning light
Low windshield-
2-16
washer fluid
warning light (if so
equipped)
Master warning
2-16
light (if so
equipped)
NISSAN Intelligent 2-16 Key® warning light (if so equipped)
Warning light
Name
Power steering warning light
Page 2-17
Seat belt warning 2-17 light
Shift P (Park)
2-17
warning light (if so
equipped)
Supplemental air 2-17 bag warning light
Indicator light
Name
CRUISE indicator light (if so equipped)
DRIVE SPORT mode indicator light (if so equipped)
Page 2-18 2-18
Illustrated table of contents 0-9
Indicator light
Name
Engine start operation indicator light (if so equipped)
Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light
High beam indicator light (blue)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so equipped)
Page 2-18
2-19
2-19 2-19 2-19 2-20
Indicator light
Name
Security indicator light (if so equipped)
SET indicator light (if so equipped)
Page 2-20 2-20
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
Slip indicator light
2-20 2-20
Turn signal/ hazard indicator lights
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light
2-20 2-21
0-10 Illustrated table of contents
1 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-3 Armrest (driver's side only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4 Folding rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-4
Head restraints/headrests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5 Adjustable head restraint/headrest components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Non-adjustable head restraint/ headrest components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6 Remove . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Removable (without Bose head restraint/headrest speaker system only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-7 Install. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8 Adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10 Seat belt warning light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Injured persons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Three-point type seat belt with retractor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Seat belt extenders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17
Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-17 Child safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18
Infants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Small children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21 LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-23 Rear-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-26 Rear-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-28 Forward-facing child restraint installation using LATCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-30 Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-34 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-39 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS). . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Precautions on SRS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-42 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . 1-63 Supplemental air bag warning light. . . . . . . . . . 1-63
SEATS
WARNING
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
ARS1152
For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat properly. For additional information, refer to "Precautions on seat belt usage" in this section.
After adjustment, gently rock in the seat to make sure it is securely locked.
1-2 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or make the vehicle move. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
Do not adjust the driver's seat while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. The seat may move suddenly and could cause loss of control of the vehicle.
The seatback should not be reclined any more than needed for comfort. Seat belts are most effective when the passenger sits well back and straight up in the seat. If the seatback is reclined, the risk of sliding under the lap belt and being injured is increased.
CAUTION
When adjusting the seat positions, be sure not to contact any moving parts to avoid possible injuries and/or damage.
FRONT MANUAL SEAT ADJUSTMENT
Your vehicle seats can be adjusted manually. For additional information about adjusting the seats, refer to the steps outlined in this section.
Forward and backward
LRS2795
Reclining
LRS2814
Pull the center of the bar up and hold it while you slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Release the bar to lock the seat in position.
To recline the seatback, pull the lever up and lean back. To bring the seatback forward, pull the lever up and lean your body forward. Release the lever to lock the seatback in position.
The reclining feature allows adjustment of the seatback for occupants of different sizes for added comfort and to help obtain proper seat belt fit. For additional information, refer to "Precautions on seat belt usage" in this section. Also, the seatback can be reclined to allow occupants to rest when the vehicle is stopped and the shift lever is in P (Park).
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-3
Seat lifter (driver's seat)
LRS2797
Pull up or push down the adjusting lever to adjust the seat height until the desired position is achieved.
LRS2339
ARMREST (driver's side only)
To use the armrest, pull it down to the resting position.
A Stowed position B Resting position
LRS3072
FOLDING REAR SEAT
Pull the knob A to fold each seatback
down.
WARNING
Never allow anyone to ride in the cargo area or on the rear seat when it is in the fold-down position. Use of these areas by passengers without proper restraints could result in serious injury or death in an accident or sudden stop.
1-4 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
HEAD RESTRAINTS/HEADRESTS
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
When returning the seatbacks to the upright position, be certain they are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
WARNING
Head restraints/headrests supplement
the other vehicle safety systems. They
may provide additional protection
against injury in certain rear end colli-
sions.
Adjustable
head
restraints/headrests must be adjusted
properly, as specified in this section.
Check the adjustment after someone
else uses the seat. Do not attach any-
thing to the head restraint/headrest
stalks or remove the head
restraint/headrest. Do not use the seat
if the head restraint/headrest has been
removed. If the head restraint/headrest
was removed, reinstall and properly ad-
just the head restraint/headrest before
an occupant uses the seating position.
Failure to follow these instructions can
reduce the effectiveness of the head
restraints/headrests. This may in-
crease the risk of serious injury or death
in a collision.
LRS2695
The illustration shows the seating posi-
tions
equipped
with
head
restraints/headrests.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a head restraint.
Indicates the seating position is equipped with a headrest.
+ Indicates the seating position is not equipped with a head restraint or headrest (if applicable).
Your vehicle is equipped with a head restraint/headrest that may be integrated, adjustable or non-adjustable.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-5
Adjustable head restraints/headrests have multiple notches along the stalk(s) to lock them in a desired adjustment position.
The non-adjustable head restraints/ headrests have a single locking notch to secure them to the seat frame.
Proper Adjustment:
For the adjustable type, align the head restraint/headrest so the center of your ear is approximately level with the center of the head restraint/headrest.
If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.
If the head restraint/headrest has been removed, ensure that it is reinstalled and locked in place before riding in that designated seating position.
LRS2300
ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/ HEADREST COMPONENTS
1. Removable head restraint/headrest 2. Multiple notches 3. Lock knob 4. Stalks
NON-ADJUSTABLE HEAD RESTRAINT/HEADREST COMPONENTS
LRS2299
1. Removable head restraint/headrest
2. Single notch
3. Lock knob
4. Stalks
1-6 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
5. Reinstall and properly adjust the head restraint/headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.
REMOVE
LRS2302
Use the following procedure to remove the head restraint/headrest:
1. Pull the head restraint/headrest up to the highest position.
2. Push and hold the lock knob.
3. Remove the head restraint/headrest from the seat.
4. Store the head restraint/headrest properly in a secure place so it is not loose in the vehicle.
LRS2302
REMOVABLE (without Bose head restraint/headrest speaker system only)
CAUTION Do not remove head restraint/headrest from vehicles equipped with Bose head restraint/headrest speaker system. Removal may damage the system wiring.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-7
INSTALL
LRS2303
1. Align the head restraint/headrest stalks with the holes in the seat. Make sure that the head restraint/headrest is facing the correct direction. The stalk
with the notch (notches) 1 must be
installed in the hole with the lock knob
2 .
2. Push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
3. Properly adjust the head restraint/ headrest before an occupant uses the seating position.
ADJUST
WRS0134
For adjustable head restraint/headrest
Adjust the head restraint/headrest so the center is level with the center of your ears. If your ear position is still higher than the recommended alignment, place the head restraint/headrest at the highest position.
For non-adjustable headrest
head
LRS2351
restraint/
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.
1-8 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Raise
LRS2305
To raise the head restraint/headrest, pull it up.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.
Lower
LRS2306
To lower, push and hold the lock knob and push the head restraint/headrest down.
Make sure the head restraint/headrest is positioned so the lock knob is engaged in the notch before riding in that designated seating position.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-9
SEAT BELTS
PRECAUTIONS ON SEAT BELT USAGE
If you are wearing your seat belt properly adjusted and you are sitting upright and well back in your seat with both feet on the floor, your chances of being injured or killed in a collision and/or the severity of injury may be greatly reduced. NISSAN strongly encourages you and all of your passengers to buckle up every time you drive, even if your seating position includes a supplemental air bag.
SSS0136
Most U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories specify that seat belts be worn at all times when a vehicle is being driven.
1-10 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times. Children should be in the rear seats and in an appropriate restraint.
SSS0134
SSS0016
WARNING
The seat belt should be properly adjusted to a snug fit. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident. Serious injury or death can occur if the seat belt is not worn properly.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-11
SSS0014
WARNING
Always route the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never put the belt behind your back, under your arm or across your neck. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder.
Position the lap belt as low and snug as possible AROUND THE HIPS, NOT THE WAIST. A lap belt worn too high could increase the risk of internal injuries in an accident.
Be sure the seat belt tongue is securely fastened to the proper buckle.
Do not wear the seat belt inside out or twisted. Doing so may reduce its effectiveness.
Do not allow more than one person to use the same seat belt.
Never carry more people in the vehicle than there are seat belts.
If the seat belt warning light glows continuously while the ignition is turned ON with all doors closed and all seat belts fastened, it may indicate a malfunction in the system. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
No changes should be made to the seat belt system. For example, do not modify the seat belt, add material, or install devices that may change the seat belt routing or tension. Doing so may affect the operation of the seat belt system. Modifying or tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
Once seat belt pretensioner(s) have activated, they cannot be reused and must be replaced together with the retractor. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
All seat belt assemblies, including retractors and attaching hardware, should be inspected after any collision. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. NISSAN recommends that all seat belt assemblies in use during a collision be replaced unless the collision was minor and the belts show no damage and continue to operate properly. Seat belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted.
All child restraints and attaching hardware should be inspected after any collision. Always follow the restraint manufacturer's inspection instructions and replacement recommendations. The child restraints should be replaced if they are damaged.
1-12 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0786
SEAT BELT WARNING LIGHT
Both the driver's and passenger's front seats are equipped with a seat belt warning light. The warning light, located on the instrument panel, will show the status of the driver and passenger seat belt.
NOTE:
The front passenger seat belt warning light will not light up if the seat is not occupied.
For additional information, refer to "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
PREGNANT WOMEN
NISSAN recommends that pregnant women use seat belts. The seat belt should be worn snug and always position the lap belt as low as possible around the hips, not the waist. Place the shoulder belt over your shoulder and across your chest. Never run the lap/shoulder belt over your abdominal area. Contact your doctor for specific recommendations.
INJURED PERSONS
NISSAN recommends that injured persons use seat belts. Check with your doctor for specific recommendations.
THREE-POINT TYPE SEAT BELT WITH RETRACTOR
WARNING
Every person who drives or rides in this vehicle should use a seat belt at all times.
Do not ride in a moving vehicle when the seatback is reclined. This can be dangerous. The shoulder belt will not be against your body. In an accident, you could be thrown into it and receive neck or other serious injuries. You could also slide under the lap belt and receive serious internal injuries.
For the most effective protection when the vehicle is in motion, the seat should be upright. Always sit well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor and adjust the seat belt properly.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-13
Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
Fastening the seat belts
LRS2795
1. Adjust the seat. For additional information, refer to "Seats" in this section.
1-14 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS3087
2. Slowly pull the seat belt out of the retractor and insert the tongue into the
buckle A until you hear and feel the
latch engage.
The retractor is designed to lock during a sudden stop or on impact. A slow pulling motion permits the seat belt to move, and allows you some freedom of movement in the seat.
If the seat belt cannot be pulled from its fully retracted position, firmly pull the belt and release it. Then smoothly pull the belt out of the retractor.
LRS2675
3. Position the lap belt portion low and
snug on the hips B as shown.
4. Pull the shoulder belt portion toward
the retractor to take up extra slack C .
Be sure the shoulder belt is routed over your shoulder and across your chest.
The front passenger seat and the rear seating positions' three-point seat belts have two modes of operation:
Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR)
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
The ELR mode allows the seat belt to extend and retract to allow the driver and passengers some freedom of movement in the seat. The ELR locks the seat belt when the vehicle slows down rapidly or during certain impacts.
The ALR mode (child restraint mode) locks the seat belt for child restraint installation.
When the ALR mode is activated, the seat belt cannot be extended again until the seat belt tongue is detached from the buckle and fully retracted. The seat belt returns to the ELR mode after the seat belt fully retracts. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.
The ALR mode should be used only for child restraint installation. During normal seat belt use by an occupant, the ALR mode should not be activated. If it is activated, it may cause uncomfortable seat belt tension. It can also change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to "Supplemental air bag warning light" in this section.
WARNING
When fastening the seat belts, be certain that the seatbacks are completely secured in the latched position. If they are not completely secured, passengers may be injured in an accident or sudden stop.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-15
To increase your confidence in the seat belts, check the operation as follows:
Grasp the shoulder belt and pull forward quickly. The retractor should lock and restrict further belt movement.
If the retractor does not lock during this check, get the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service, or to learn more about seat belt operation.
WRS0139
Unfastening the seat belts
To unfasten the seat belt, press the button
on the buckle 1 . The seat belt automati-
cally retracts.
Checking seat belt operation
Seat belt retractors are designed to lock seat belt movement by two separate methods:
When the seat belt is pulled quickly from the retractor
When the vehicle slows down rapidly
1-16 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0242
Shoulder belt height adjustment (front seats)
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. For additional information, refer to "Precautions on seat belt usage" in this section. To
adjust, pull out the adjustment button 1
and move the shoulder belt anchor to the
desired position 2 , so the belt passes over
the center of the shoulder. The belt should be away from your face and neck, but not falling off your shoulder. Release the adjustment button to lock the shoulder belt anchor into position.
WARNING
After adjustment, release the adjustment button and try to move the shoulder belt anchor up and down to make sure it is securely fixed in position.
The shoulder belt anchor height should be adjusted to the position best for you. Failure to do so may reduce the effectiveness of the entire restraint system and increase the chance or severity of injury in an accident.
dealer for assistance with purchasing an extender if an extender is required.
WARNING
Only NISSAN seat belt extenders, made by the same company which made the original equipment seat belts, should be used with NISSAN seat belts.
Seat belt hook
LRS3082
When the seat belt is not in use and when folding down the rear seats, hook the rear seat belts on the seat belt hooks.
SEAT BELT EXTENDERS
If, because of body size or driving position, it is not possible to properly fit the lap/shoulder belt and fasten it, an extender that is compatible with the installed seat belts is available for purchase. The extender adds approximately 8 in (200 mm) of length and may be used for either the driver or front passenger seating position. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN
Adults and children who can use the standard seat belt should not use an extender. Such unnecessary use could result in serious personal injury in the event of an accident.
Never use seat belt extenders to install child restraints. If the child restraint is not secured properly, the child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision or a sudden stop.
SEAT BELT MAINTENANCE
To clean the seat belt webbing, apply a mild soap solution or any solution recommended for cleaning upholstery or carpet. Then wipe with a cloth and allow the seat belts to dry in the shade. Do not allow the seat belts to retract until they are completely dry.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-17
CHILD SAFETY
If dirt builds up in the shoulder belt guide of the seat belt anchors, the seat belts may retract slowly. Wipe the shoulder belt guide with a clean, dry cloth.
Periodically check to see that the seat belt and the metal components, such as buckles, tongues, retractors, flexible wires and anchors, work properly. If loose parts, deterioration, cuts or other damage on the webbing is found, the entire seat belt assembly should be replaced.
WARNING
Do not allow children to play with the seat belts. Most seating positions are equipped with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode seat belts. If the seat belt becomes wrapped around a child's neck with the ALR mode activated, the child can be seriously injured or killed if the seat belt retracts and becomes tight. This can occur even if the vehicle is parked. Unbuckle the seat belt to release the child. If the seat belt cannot be unbuckled or is already unbuckled, release the child by cutting the seat belt with a suitable tool (such as a knife or scissors) to release the seat belt.
Children need adults to help protect them. They need to be properly restrained.
In addition to the general information in this manual, child safety information is available from many other sources, including doctors, teachers, government traffic safety offices, and community organizations. Every child is different, so be sure to learn the best way to transport your child.
There are three basic types of child restraint systems:
Rear-facing child restraints
Forward-facing child restraints
Booster seats
The proper restraint depends on the child's size. Generally, infants up to about 1 year and less than 20 lbs. (9 kg) should be placed in rear-facing child restraints. Forwardfacing child restraints are available for children who outgrow rear-facing child restraints and are at least 1 year old. Booster seats are used to help position a vehicle lap/shoulder belt on a child who can no longer use a forward-facing child restraint.
WARNING
Infants and children need special protection. The vehicle's seat belts may not fit them properly. The shoulder belt may come too close to the face or neck. The lap belt may not fit over their small hip bones. In an accident, an improperly fitting seat belt could cause serious or fatal injury. Always use appropriate child restraints.
1-18 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require the use of approved child restraints for infants and small children. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.
A child restraint may be secured in the vehicle by using either the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system or with the vehicle seat belt. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.
NISSAN recommends that all pre-teens and children be restrained in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat.
This is especially important because your vehicle has a supplemental restraint system (air bag system) for the front passenger. For additional information, refer to "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" in this section.
INFANTS
Infants up to at least 1 year old should be placed in a rear-facing child restraint. NISSAN recommends that infants be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
SMALL CHILDREN
Children that are over 1 year old and weigh at least 20 lbs. (9 kg) should remain in a rear-facing child restraint as long as possible up to the height or weight limit of the child restraint. Children who outgrow the height or weight limit of the rear-facing child restraint and are at least 1 year old should be secured in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness. Refer to the manufacturer's instructions for minimum and maximum weight and height recommendations. NISSAN recommends that small children be placed in child restraints that comply with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards. You should choose a child restraint that fits your vehicle and always follow the manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
LARGER CHILDREN
Children should remain in a forward-facing child restraint with a harness until they reach the maximum height or weight limit allowed by the child restraint manufacturer.
Once a child outgrows the height or weight limit of the harness-equipped forwardfacing child restraint, NISSAN recommends that the child be placed in a commercially available booster seat to obtain proper seat belt fit. For a seat belt to fit properly, the booster seat should raise the child so that the shoulder belt is properly positioned across the chest and the top, middle portion of the shoulder. The shoulder belt should not cross the neck or face and should not fall off the shoulder. The lap belt should lie snugly across the lower hips or upper thighs, not the abdomen. A booster seat can only be used in seating positions that have a three-point type seat belt. The booster seat should fit the vehicle seat and have a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-19
A booster seat should be used until the child can pass the seat belt fit test below:
Are the child's back and hips against the vehicle seatback?
Is the child able to sit without slouching?
Do the child's knees bend easily over the front edge of the seat with feet flat on the floor?
Can the child safely wear the seat belt (lap belt low and snug across the hips and shoulder belt across mid-chest and shoulder)?
Is the child able to use the properly adjusted head restraint/headrest?
Will the child be able to stay in position for the entire ride?
LRS2690
If you answered no to any of these questions, the child should remain in a booster seat using a three-point type seat belt.
NOTE:
Laws in some communities may follow different guidelines. Check local and state regulations to confirm your child is using the correct restraint system before traveling.
WARNING
Never let a child stand or kneel on any seat and do not allow a child in the cargo area. The child could be seriously injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision.
1-20 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CHILD RESTRAINTS
ARS1098
PRECAUTIONS ON CHILD RESTRAINTS
WRS0256
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
The child restraint must be used and installed properly. Always follow all of the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation and use.
Infants and children should never be held on anyone's lap. Even the strongest adult cannot resist the forces of a collision.
Do not put a seat belt around both a child and another passenger.
NISSAN recommends that all child restraints be installed in the rear seat. Studies show that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seat than in the front seat. If you must install a forwardfacing child restraint in the front seat, refer to "Forward-facing child restraint installation using the seat belts" in this section.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating air bag could seriously injure or kill a child. A rearfacing child restraint must only be used in the rear seat.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-21
Be sure to purchase a child restraint that will fit the child and vehicle. Some child restraints may not fit properly in your vehicle.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
Never use the anchor points for adult seat belts or other items.
A child restraint with a top tether strap should not be used in the front passenger seat.
Keep seatbacks as upright as possible after fitting the child restraint.
Infants and children should always be placed in an appropriate child restraint while in the vehicle.
When the child restraint is not in use, keep it secured with the LATCH system or a seat belt. In a sudden stop or collision, loose objects can injure occupants or damage the vehicle.
CAUTION
A child restraint in a closed vehicle can become very hot. Check the seating surface and buckles before placing a child in the child restraint.
This vehicle is equipped with a universal child restraint anchor system, referred to as the LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system. Some child restraints include rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to these anchors. For additional information, refer to "LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) system" in this section.
If you do not have a LATCH compatible child restraint, the vehicle seat belts can be used.
Several manufacturers offer child restraints for infants and children of various sizes. When selecting any child restraint, keep the following points in mind:
1-22 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Choose only a restraint with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Check the child restraint in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.
If the child restraint is compatible with your vehicle, place your child in the child restraint and check the various adjustments to be sure the child restraint is compatible with your child. Choose a child restraint that is designed for your child's height and weight. Always follow all recommended procedures.
If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is less than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), you may use the LATCH anchors to install the child restraint (not both at the same time).
If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint.
Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated. Canadian law requires the top tether strap on forwardfacing child restraints be secured to the designated anchor point on the vehicle.
install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
The LATCH anchor points are provided to install child restraints in the rear outboard seating positions only. Do not attempt to install a child restraint in the center position using the LATCH anchors.
LATCH lower anchor
WARNING
LRS3073
LATCH system lower anchor locations
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with special anchor points that are used with LATCH system compatible child restraints. This system may also be referred to as the ISOFIX or ISOFIX compatible system. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint unless the combined weight of the child and child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use and installation of child restraints could result in serious injury or death of a child or other passengers in a sudden stop or collision:
Attach LATCH system compatible child restraints only at the locations shown in the illustration.
Do not secure a child restraint in the center rear seating position using the LATCH lower anchors. The child restraint will not be secured properly.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-23
Inspect the lower anchors by inserting your fingers into the lower anchor area. Feel to make sure there are no obstructions over the anchors such as seat belt webbing or seat cushion material. The child restraint will not be secured properly if the lower anchors are obstructed.
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
LRS3036
LATCH lower anchor location
LATCH lower anchor location
The LATCH lower anchors are located as shown. A label is attached to the seatback to help you locate the LATCH lower anchors.
1-24 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0661
LATCH webbing-mounted attachment
Installing child restraint LATCH lower anchor attachments
LATCH compatible child restraints include two rigid or webbing-mounted attachments that can be connected to two anchors located at certain seating positions in your vehicle. With this system, you do not have to use a vehicle seat belt to secure the child restraint. Check your child restraint for a label stating that it is compatible with LATCH. This information may also be in the instructions provided by the child restraint manufacturer.
Top tether anchor
LRS0662
LATCH rigid-mounted attachment
When installing a child restraint, carefully read and follow the instructions in this manual and those supplied with the child restraint.
WARNING
If the cargo cover (if so equipped) contacts the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor, remove the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether strap during a collision. A child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged.
LRS3063
Top tether anchor point locations
Anchor points are located on the back of the rear seats.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-25
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
1-26 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS2997
Rear-facing webbing-mounted step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
LRS2996
Rear-facing rigid-mounted step 2
LRS0673
Rear-facing step 3
3. For child restraints that are equipped with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your hand to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
LRS0674
Rear-facing step 4
4. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint or try installing by using
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-27
the vehicle seat belt (if applicable). Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
5. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 4.
REAR-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg), use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a rear-facing child restraint using the vehicle seat belts in the rear seats:
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
1-28 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0256
Rear-facing step 1
1. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and therefore must not be used in the front seat. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
WRS0761
Rear-facing step 2
2. Route the seat belt tongue through the child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing.
LRS0669
Rear-facing step 3
3. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the ALR mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to the ELR mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS0670
Rear-facing step 4 4. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-29
WRS0762
Rear-facing step 5
5. Remove any additional slack from the seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.
WRS0763
Rear-facing step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
1-30 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
7. Check to make sure that the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 6.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING LATCH
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the LATCH system:
1. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
LRS2995
LRS2994
Forward-facing webbing-mounted step 2
2. Secure the child restraint anchor attachments to the LATCH lower anchors. Check to make sure the LATCH attachment is properly attached to the lower anchors.
If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point. For additional information, refer to "Installing top tether strap" in this section. Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating po-
Forward-facing rigid-mounted step 2 sitions that do not have a top tether anchor.
3. The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section for
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-31
head restraint/headrest adjustment information.
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.
LRS0671
Forward-facing step 4 4. For child restraints that are equipped
with webbing-mounted attachments, remove any additional slack from the anchor attachments. Press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while tightening the webbing of the anchor attachments.
5. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
1-32 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0697
Forward-facing step 6
6. After attaching the child restraint, test it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the LATCH attachment path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the LATCH attachment holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the LATCH attachment as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
7. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the child restraint is loose, repeat steps 1 through 6.
Rear seats
1 Top tether strap 2 Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
LRS2803
The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchor attachments.
First, secure the child restraint with the LATCH lower anchors (rear outboard positions only).
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-33
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
FORWARD-FACING CHILD RESTRAINT INSTALLATION USING THE SEAT BELTS
WARNING
The three-point seat belt with Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) must be used when installing a child restraint. Failure to use the ALR mode will result in the child restraint not being properly secured. The restraint could tip over or be loose and cause injury to a child in a sudden stop or collision. Also, it can change the operation of the front passenger air bag. For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section.
1-34 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WRS0699
Forward-facing (front passenger seat) step 1
Refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety" and "Child restraints" sections before installing a child restraint.
Do not use the lower anchors if the combined weight of the child and the child restraint exceeds 65 lbs. (29.5 kg). If the combined weight of the child and the child restraint is greater than 65 lbs. (29.5 kg) use the vehicle's seat belt (not the lower anchors) to install the child restraint. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for installation.
Follow these steps to install a forwardfacing child restraint using the vehicle seat belt in the rear seats or in the front passenger seat:
1. If you must install a child restraint in the front seat, it should be placed in a forward-facing direction only. Move the seat to the rearmost position. Child restraints for infants must be used in the rear-facing direction and, therefore, must not be used in the front seat.
2. Position the child restraint on the seat. Always follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions.
The back of the child restraint should be secured against the vehicle seatback.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct child restraint fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section for head restraint/headrest adjustment, removal and installation information.
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper child restraint fit, try another seating position or a different child restraint.
WRS0680
Forward-facing step 3 3. Route the seat belt tongue through the
child restraint and insert it into the buckle until you hear and feel the latch engage. Be sure to follow the child restraint manufacturer's instructions for belt routing. If the child restraint is equipped with a top tether strap, route the top tether strap and secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point (rear seat installation only). For additional information, refer to "Installing top tether strap" in this section.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-35
Do not install child restraints that require the use of a top tether strap in seating positions that do not have a top tether anchor.
LRS0667
Forward-facing step 4
4. Pull the shoulder belt until the belt is fully extended. At this time, the seat belt retractor is in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode (child restraint mode). It reverts to Emergency Locking Retractor (ELR) mode when the seat belt is fully retracted.
LRS0668
Forward-facing step 5 5. Allow the seat belt to retract. Pull up on
the shoulder belt to remove any slack in the belt.
1-36 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
9. Check to make sure the child restraint is properly secured prior to each use. If the seat belt is not locked, repeat steps 2 through 8.
WRS0681
Forward-facing step 6 6. Remove any additional slack from the
seat belt; press downward and rearward firmly in the center of the child restraint with your knee to compress the vehicle seat cushion and seatback while pulling up on the seat belt.
7. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
WRS0698
Forward-facing step 8 8. After attaching the child restraint, test
it before you place the child in it. Push it from side to side while holding the child restraint near the seat belt path. The child restraint should not move more than 1 inch (25 mm), from side to side. Try to tug it forward and check to see if the belt holds the restraint in place. If the restraint is not secure, tighten the seat belt as necessary, or put the restraint in another seat and test it again. You may need to try a different child restraint. Not all child restraints fit in all types of vehicles.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-37
LRS0865
Forward-facing step 10
10. If the child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front
passenger air bag status light should illuminate. If this light is not illuminated, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section. Move the child restraint to another seating position. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
After the child restraint is removed and the seat belt is fully retracted, the ALR mode (child restraint mode) is canceled.
Rear seats
1 Top tether strap 2 Anchor point
Installing top tether strap
LRS3060
The child restraint top tether strap must be used when installing the child restraint with seat belts.
First, secure the child restraint with the seat belt.
1-38 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Rear bench seat
OUTBOARD SEATING POSITIONS
1. Remove the head restraint/headrest and store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the child restraint is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.
2. Position the top tether strap as shown.
3. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
4. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
CENTER SEATING POSITION
1. Position the top tether strap as shown.
2. Secure the tether strap to the tether anchor point as shown.
3. Tighten the tether strap according to the manufacturer's instructions to remove any slack.
If you have any questions when installing a top tether strap, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be used to attach adult seat belts, or other items or equipment to the vehicle. Doing so could damage the child restraint anchorages. The child restraint will not be properly installed using the damaged anchorage, and a child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision.
BOOSTER SEATS
For additional information on installing a booster seat in your vehicle, follow the instructions outlined in this section.
Precautions on booster seats
WARNING
If a booster seat and seat belt are not used properly, the risk of a child being injured or killed in a sudden stop or collision greatly increases:
Make sure the shoulder portion of the belt is away from the child's face and neck and the lap portion of the belt does not cross the stomach.
Make sure the shoulder belt is not behind the child or under the child's arm.
A booster seat must only be installed in a seating position that has a lap/shoulder belt.
A. Low back booster seat B. High back booster seat
LRS2479
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-39
LRS0453
Booster seats of various sizes are offered by several manufacturers. When selecting any booster seat, keep the following points in mind:
Choose only a booster seat with a label certifying that it complies with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.
Check the booster seat in your vehicle to be sure it is compatible with the vehicle's seat and seat belt system.
LRS0464
Make sure the child's head will be properly supported by the booster seat or vehicle seat. The seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. For example, if a low back booster seat is chosen, the vehicle seatback must be at or above the center of the child's ears. If the seatback is lower than the center of the child's ears, a high back booster seat should be used.
If the booster seat is compatible with your vehicle, place the child in the booster seat and check the various adjustments to be sure the booster seat is compatible with the child. Always follow all recommended procedures.
All U.S. states and Canadian provinces or territories require that infants and small children be restrained in an approved child restraint at all times while the vehicle is being operated.
The instructions in this section apply to booster seat installation in the rear seats or the front passenger seat.
Booster seat installation
WARNING
To avoid injury to child, do not use the lap/shoulder belt in the Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) mode when using a booster seat with the seat belts.
For additional information, refer to all Warnings and Cautions in the "Child safety", "Child restraints" and "Booster seats" sections of this manual before installing a child restraint.
1-40 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Follow these steps to install a booster seat in the rear seat or in the front passenger seat:
WRS0699
1. If you must install a booster seat in the front seat, move the seat to the rearmost position.
2. Position the booster seat on the seat. Only place it in a front-facing direction. Always follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions.
LRS0454
Front passenger position 3. The booster seat should be positioned
on the vehicle seat so that it is stable.
If necessary, adjust or remove the head restraint/headrest to obtain the correct booster seat fit. If the head restraint/headrest is removed, store it in a secure place. Be sure to reinstall the head restraint/headrest when the booster seat is removed. For additional information, refer to "Head restraints/headrests" in this section.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-41
If the seating position does not have an adjustable head restraint/headrest and it is interfering with the proper booster seat fit, try another seating position or a different booster seat.
4. Position the lap portion of the seat belt low and snug on the child's hips. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
5. Pull the shoulder belt portion of the seat belt toward the retractor to take up extra slack. Be sure the shoulder belt is positioned across the top, middle portion of the child's shoulder. Be sure to follow the booster seat manufacturer's instructions for adjusting the seat belt routing.
6. Follow the warnings, cautions and instructions for properly fastening a seat belt shown in "Three-point type seat belt with retractor" in this section.
SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM (SRS)
LRS0865
7. If the booster seat is installed in the front passenger seat, place the ignition switch in the ON position. The front pas-
senger air bag status light
may or
may not illuminate, depending on the
size of the child and the type of booster
seat being used. For additional infor-
mation, refer to "Front passenger air
bag and status light" in this section.
PRECAUTIONS ON SRS
This SRS section contains important information concerning the following systems:
Driver and front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag (NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System)
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag
Driver supplemental knee air bag
Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
Supplemental front-impact air bag system
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System can help cushion the impact force to the head and chest of the driver and front passenger in certain frontal collisions.
1-42 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the chest area of the driver and front passenger in certain side-impact collisions. The side air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted.
Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bag system
This system can help cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the outboard seating positions in certain sideimpact or rollover collisions. In a side impact, the curtain air bags are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. In a rollover, curtain air bags are designed to inflate and remain inflated for a short time.
These supplemental restraint systems are designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and are not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, refer to "Seat belts" in this section.
Driver supplemental knee air bag This system can help cushion the impact force to the driver's knees in certain collisions. The SRS is designed to supplement the crash protection provided by the driver and front passenger seat belts and is not a substitute for them. Seat belts should always be correctly worn and the occupant seated a suitable distance away from the steering wheel, instrument panel and door finishers. For additional information, refer to "Seat belts" in this section. The supplemental air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-43
WARNING
The front air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a side impact, rear impact, rollover, or lower severity frontal collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents
The front passenger air bag will not inflate if the passenger air bag status light is lit or if the front passenger seat is unoccupied. For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section.
WRS0031
The seat belts and the front air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat. The front air bags inflate with great force. Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, if you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the front air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback
1-44 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
and as far away as practical from the steering wheel or instrument panel. Always properly use the seat belts.
The driver and front passenger seat belt buckles are equipped with sensors that detect if the seat belts are fastened. The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors the severity of a collision and seat belt usage, then inflates the air bags as needed. Failure to properly wear seat belts can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
The front passenger seat is equipped with an occupant classification sensor (weight sensor) that turns the front passenger air bag OFF under some conditions. This sensor is only used in this seat. Failure to be properly seated and wearing the seat belt can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident. For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section.
Keep hands on the outside of the steering wheel. Placing them inside the steering wheel rim could increase the risk that they are injured when the front air bag inflates.
ARS1133
ARS1041
WARNING
Never let children ride unrestrained or extend their hands or face out of the window. Do not attempt to hold them in your lap or arms. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-45
ARS1042
ARS1043
ARS1044
1-46 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
ARS1045
ARS1046
WARNING
Children may be severely injured or killed when the front air bags, side air bags or curtain air bags inflate if they are not properly restrained. Pre-teens and children should be properly restrained in the rear seat, if possible.
Even with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, never install a rearfacing child restraint in the front seat. An inflating front air bag could seriously injure or kill your child. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.
SSS0101
WARNING
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags and roofmounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags:
The side air bags and curtain air bags ordinarily will not inflate in the event of a frontal impact, rear impact, or lower severity side collision. Always wear your seat belts to help reduce the risk or severity of injury in various kinds of accidents.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-47
SSS0162
SSS0159
LRS3119
1-48 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
WARNING
The seat belts, the side air bags and curtain air bags are most effective when you are sitting well back and upright in the seat with both feet on the floor. The side air bag and curtain air bag inflate with great force. Do not allow anyone to place their hand, leg or face near the side air bag on the side of the seatback of the front seat or near the side roof rails. Do not allow anyone sitting in the front seats or rear outboard seats to extend their hand out of the window or lean against the door. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the previous illustrations.
WRS0032
WARNING
When sitting in the rear seat, do not hold onto the seatback of the front seat. If the side air bag inflates, you may be seriously injured. Be especially careful with children, who should always be properly restrained. Some examples of dangerous riding positions are shown in the illustrations.
Do not use seat covers on the front seatbacks. They may interfere with side air bag inflation.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-49
NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System (front seats)
1. Supplemental front-impact air bag modules
2. Air bag Control Unit (ACU)
3. Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bags
4. Roof-mounted curtain side-impact and rollover supplemental air bags
5. Side satellite sensors
6. Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
7. Front door satellite sensor (driver's side shown; front passenger side similar)
8. Occupant classification sensor (weight sensor -- located in front passenger cushion frame)
9. Driver supplemental knee air bag
10. Crash zone sensor
1-50 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS3064
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger's NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following items.
Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket.
Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.
Make sure that there is nothing pressing against the rear of the seatback, such as a child restraint installed in the rear seat or an object stored on the floor.
Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
Make sure that there is no object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
If a forward-facing child restraint is installed in the front passenger seat, do not position the front passenger seat so the child restraint contacts the instrument panel. If the child restraint does contact the instrument panel, the system may determine the seat is occupied and the passenger air bag may deploy in a collision. Also the front passenger air bag status light may not illuminate. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.
Confirm the operating condition with the front passenger air bag status light.
If you notice that the front passenger air bag status light is not operating as described later in this section, get the occupant classification system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Until you have confirmed with a dealer that your front passenger seat occupant classification system is working properly, position the occupants in the rear seating positions.
Do not position the front passenger seat so it contacts the rear seat. If the front seat does contact the rear seat, the air bag system may determine a sensor malfunction has occurred and the front passenger air bag status light may illuminate and the supplemental air bag warning light may flash.
This vehicle is equipped with the NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System for the driver and front passenger seats. This system is designed to meet certification requirements under U.S. regulations. It is also permitted in Canada. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual still apply and must be followed.
The driver supplemental front-impact air bag is located in the center of the steering wheel. The front passenger supplemental front-impact air bag is mounted in the dashboard above the glove box. The front air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. They may not inflate in certain frontal collisions. Vehicle
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-51
damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper front air bag system operation.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System monitors information from the crash zone sensor, the Air bag Control Unit (ACU), seat belt buckle sensors and occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). Inflator operation is based on the severity of a collision and seat belt usage for the driver. For the front passenger, the occupant classification sensors are also monitored. Based on information from the sensors, only one front air bag may inflate in a crash, depending on the crash severity and whether the front occupants are belted or unbelted. Additionally, the front passenger air bag may be automatically turned OFF under some conditions, depending on the weight detected on the front passenger seat and how the seat belt is used. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, the front passenger air bag status light will be illuminated. For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in this section. One front air bag inflating does not indicate improper performance of the system.
If you have any questions about your air bag system, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. If you are considering modification of your vehicle due to a disability, you may also contact NISSAN. Contact information is contained in the front of this Owner's Manual.
When a front air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by the release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken to not inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Front air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the face and chest of the front occupants. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating front air bag may cause facial abrasions or other injuries. Front air bags, other than the driver's knee air bag, do not provide restraint to the lower body.
Even with NISSAN Advanced Air Bags, seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and front passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the steering wheel or instrument panel. The front air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the front occupants. Because of this, the force of the front air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, the front air bag module during inflation.
The front air bags deflate quickly after a collision.
The front air bags operate only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
1-52 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
CONDITION Empty
Nobody/Somebody Adult
Front passenger air bag and status light Status light
LRS0865
WARNING
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF under some conditions. Read this section carefully to learn how it operates. Proper use of the seat, seat belt and child restraints is necessary for most effective protection. Failure to follow all instructions in this manual concerning the use of seats, seat belts and child restraints can increase the risk or severity of injury in an accident.
The front passenger seat is equipped with
an occupant classification sensor (weight
sensor) that turns the front passenger air
bag on or off depending on the weight ap-
plied to the front passenger seat. The sta-
tus of the front passenger air bag (ON or
OFF) is indicated by the front passenger air
bag status light
which is located on
the instrument panel.
After the ignition switch is placed in the
"ON" position, the front passenger air bag
status light on the instrument panel illumi-
nates for about 7 seconds and then turns
off or remains illuminated depending on
the front passenger seat occupied status.
The light operates as follows:
DESCRIPTION
Empty front passenger seat Bag or Child or Child Restraint or Small Adult in front passenger seat Adult in the front passenger seat
PASSENGER AIR BAG STA-
TUS LIGHT (
)
ON (illuminated)
ON (illuminated)
OFF (dark)
FRONT PASSENGER AIR BAG STATUS INHIBITED INHIBITED ACTIVATED
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-53
In addition to the above, certain objects seat by weight. For example, if a child is in
placed on the front passenger seat may the front passenger seat, the NISSAN Adalso cause the light to operate as de- vanced Air Bag System is designed to turn
scribed above depending on their weight.
For additional information related to the normal operation and troubleshooting of this occupant classification sensor system, please refer to "Normal operation" and "Troubleshooting" in this section.
Front passenger air bag
The front passenger air bag is designed to automatically turn OFF when the vehicle is operated under some conditions as described below in accordance with U.S. regulations. If the front passenger air bag is OFF, it will not inflate in a crash. The driver air bag and other air bags in your vehicle are not part of this system.
The purpose of the regulation is to help reduce the risk of injury or death from an inflating air bag to certain front passenger seat occupants, such as children, by requiring the air bag to be automatically turned OFF. Certain sensors are used to meet the requirements.
The occupant classification sensor in this vehicle is a weight sensor. It is designed to detect an occupant and objects on the
the front passenger air bag OFF in accordance with the regulations. Also, if a child restraint of the type specified in the regulations is on the seat, its weight and the child's weight can be detected and cause the air bag to turn OFF.
Front passenger seat adult occupants who are properly seated and using the seat belt as outlined in this manual should not cause the front passenger air bag to be automatically turned OFF. For small adults it may be turned OFF, however if the occupant takes his/her weight off the seat cushion (for example, by not sitting upright, by sitting on an edge of the seat, or by otherwise being out of position), this could cause the sensor to turn the air bag OFF. Always be sure to be seated and wearing the seat belt properly for the most effective protection by the seat belt and supplemental air bag.
NISSAN recommends that pre-teens and children be properly restrained in a rear seat. NISSAN also recommends that appropriate child restraints and booster seats be properly installed in a rear seat. If this is not possible, the occupant classifica-
1-54 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
tion sensor is designed to operate as described above to turn the front passenger air bag OFF for specified child restraints as required by the regulations. Failing to properly secure child restraints and to use the ALR mode may allow the restraint to tip or move in a collision or sudden stop. This can also result in the passenger air bag inflating in a crash instead of being OFF. For additional information, refer to "Child restraints" in this section.
If the front passenger seat is not occupied, the front passenger air bag is designed not to inflate in a crash. However, heavy objects placed on the seat could result in air bag inflation, because of the object's weight detected by the occupant classification sensor. Other conditions could also result in air bag inflation, such as if a child is standing on the seat, or if two children are on the seat, contrary to the instructions in this manual. Always be sure that you and all vehicle occupants are seated and restrained properly.
Using the front passenger air bag status light, you can monitor when the front passenger air bag is automatically turned OFF.
If an adult occupant is in the seat but the front passenger air bag status light is illu-
minated (indicating that the air bag is OFF), it could be that the person is a small adult, or is not sitting on the seat properly or not using the seat belt properly.
If a child restraint must be used in the front seat, the front passenger air bag status light may or may not be illuminated, depending on the size of the child and the type of child restraint being used. If the air bag status light is not illuminated (indicating that the air bag might inflate in a crash), it could be that the child restraint or seat belt is not being used properly. Make sure that the child restraint is installed properly, the seat belt is used properly and the occupant is positioned properly. If the air bag status light is still not illuminated, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
If the front passenger air bag status light will not illuminate even though you believe that the child restraint, the seat belts and the occupant are properly positioned, it is recommended that you take your vehicle to a NISSAN dealer. A NISSAN dealer can check system status by using a special tool. However, until you have confirmed with a dealer that your air bag is working properly, reposition the occupant or child restraint in a rear seat.
The NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System and front passenger air bag status light will take a few seconds to register a change in the front passenger seat status. This is normal system operation and does not indicate a malfunction.
If a malfunction occurs in the front passen-
ger air bag system, the supplemental air
bag warning light
, located in the me-
ter and gauges area of the instrument
panel, will be illuminated (blinking or steadily lit). Have the system checked. It is
recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
In order for the occupant classification sensor system to classify the front passenger based on weight, please follow the precautions and steps outlined below:
Precautions
Make sure that there are no objects weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
Make sure that a child restraint or other object is not pressing against the rear of the seatback.
Make sure that a rear passenger is not pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
Make sure that the front passenger seat or seatback is not forced back against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
Make sure that there is no object placed under the front passenger seat.
Steps
1. Adjust the seat as outlined in the "Seats" section of this manual. Sit upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with your feet comfortably extended to the floor.
2. Make sure there are no objects on your lap.
3. Fasten the seat belt as outlined in the "Seat belts" section of this manual. Front passenger seat belt buckle status is monitored by the occupant classification system, and is used as an input to determine occupancy status. So, it is highly recommended that the front passenger fasten their seat belt.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-55
4. Remain in this position for 30 seconds allowing the system to classify the front passenger before the vehicle is put into motion.
5. Ensure proper classification by checking the front passenger air bag status light.
Occupant is a small adult -- the air bag light is functioning as intended. The front passenger air bag is suppressed.
However, if the occupant is not a small adult, then this may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
NOTE:
This vehicle's occupant classification sensor system generally keeps the classification locked during driving, so it is important that you confirm that the front passenger is properly classified prior to driving. However, the occupant classification sensor may recalculate the
Occupant is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
weight of the occupant under some conditions (both while driving and when stopped), so front passenger seat occupants should continue to remain seated as outlined above.
Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
An object placed under the front passenger seat.
Troubleshooting
If you think the front passenger air bag status light is incorrect:
An object placed between the seat cushion and center console or between the seat cushion and the door.
1. If the light is ON with an adult occupying the front passenger seat:
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
1-56 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still ON after this, the person should be advised not to ride in the front passenger seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. If the light is OFF with a small adult, child or child restraint occupying the front passenger seat.
This may be due to the following conditions that may be interfering with the weight sensors:
Small adult or child is not sitting upright, leaning against the seatback, and centered on the seat cushion with his/her feet comfortably extended to the floor.
The child restraint is not properly installed, as outlined in the "Child restraints" section of this manual.
An object weighing over 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) hanging on the seat or placed in the seatback pocket.
A child restraint or other object pressing against the rear of the seatback.
A rear passenger pushing or pulling on the back of the front passenger seat.
Forcing the front seat or seatback against an object on the seat or floor behind it.
An object placed under the front passenger seat.
An object placed between the seat cushion and center console.
If the vehicle is moving, please come to a stop when it is safe to do so. Check and correct any of the above conditions. Restart the vehicle and wait 1 minute.
NOTE:
A system check will be performed during which the front passenger air bag status light will remain lit for about 7 seconds initially.
If the light is still OFF after this, the small adult, child or child restraint should be repositioned in the rear seat and the vehicle should be checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
3. If the light is OFF with no front passenger and no objects on the front passenger seat, the vehicle should be checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible.
Other supplemental front-impact air bag precautions
WARNING
Do not place any objects on the steering wheel pad or on the instrument panel. Also, do not place any objects between any occupant and the steering wheel or instrument panel. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if the front air bags inflate.
Do not place objects with sharp edges on the seat. Also, do not place heavy objects on the seat that will leave permanent impressions in the seat. Such objects can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor (weight sensor). This can affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
Immediately after inflation, several front air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the supplemental air bag system. This is to prevent accidental inflation of the supplemental air bag or damage to the supplemental air bag system.
Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or front end structure. This could affect proper operation of the front air bag system.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-57
Tampering with the front air bag system may result in serious personal injury. Tampering includes changes to the steering wheel and the instrument panel assembly by placing material over the steering wheel pad and above the instrument panel or by installing additional trim material around the air bag system.
Removing or modifying the front passenger seat may affect the function of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
Modifying or tampering with the front passenger seat may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material on the seat cushion or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, on the seat that are not specifically designed to assure proper air bag operation. Additionally, do not stow any objects under the front passenger seat or the seat cushion and seatback. Such objects may interfere with the proper operation of the occupant classification sensor (weight sensor).
No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the seat belt system. This may affect the front air bag system. Tampering with the seat belt system may result in serious personal injury.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the front air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the air bag system.
A cracked windshield should be replaced immediately by a qualified repair facility. A cracked windshield could affect the function of the supplemental air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness connectors are yellow and orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the front air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.
1-58 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
LRS0259
Front seat-mounted side-impact supplemental air bag and roof-mounted curtain sideimpact and rollover supplemental air bag systems
The side air bags are located in the outside of the seatback of the front seats. The curtain air bags are located in the side roof rails. All of the information, cautions, and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The side air bags and curtain air bags are designed to inflate in higher severity side collisions, although they may inflate if the forces in another type of colli-
sion are similar to those of a higher severity side impact. They are designed to inflate on the side where the vehicle is impacted. They may not inflate in certain side collisions.
Curtain air bags are also designed to inflate in certain types of rollover collisions or near rollovers. As a result, certain vehicle movements (for example, during severe offroading) may cause the curtain air bags to inflate.
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper side air bag and curtain air bag operation.
When the side air bags and curtain air bags inflate, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
Side air bags, along with the use of seat belts, help to cushion the impact force on the chest of the front occupants. Curtain air bags help to cushion the impact force to the head of occupants in the front and rear outboard seating positions. They can help save lives and reduce serious injuries. How-
ever, an inflating side air bag or curtain air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. Side air bags and curtain air bags do not provide restraint to the lower body.
The seat belts should be correctly worn and the driver and passenger seated upright as far as practical away from the side air bag. Rear seat passengers should be seated as far away as practical from the door finishers and side roof rails. The side air bags and curtain air bags inflate quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the side air bags and curtain air bags inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, these air bag modules during inflation. The side air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over.
The curtain air bags will remain inflated for a short time.
The side air bags and curtain air bags operate only when the ignition switch is in the ON or START position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-59
WARNING
Do not place any objects near the seatback of the front seats. Also, do not place any objects (an umbrella, bag, etc.) between the front door finisher and the front seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a side air bag inflates.
Right after inflation, several side air bag and curtain air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the side air bag and curtain air bag systems.
Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system, suspension system or side panel. This could affect proper operation of the curtain air bag systems.
Tampering with the side air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the front seats by placing material near the seatbacks or by installing additional trim material, such as seat covers, around the side air bag.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work around and on the side air bag and curtain air bag system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the side air bag or curtain air bag systems.
* The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the side air bag and curtain air bag systems and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's Manual.
LRS3080
Driver supplemental knee air bag
The knee air bag is located in the knee bolster, on the driver's side. The knee air bag is located on the driver's side of the vehicle only. All of the information, cautions and warnings in this manual apply and must be followed. The knee air bag is designed to inflate in higher severity frontal collisions, although it may inflate if the forces in another type of collision are similar to those of a higher severity frontal impact. It may not inflate in certain collisions.
1-60 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
Vehicle damage (or lack of it) is not always an indication of proper knee air bag operation.
When the knee air bag inflates, a fairly loud noise may be heard, followed by release of smoke. This smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
The knee air bag helps to cushion the impact force on the knees of the driver. It can help reduce serious injuries. However, an inflating knee air bag may cause abrasions or other injuries. The knee air bag provides restraint to the lower body.
The knee air bag inflates quickly in order to help protect the occupants. Because of this, the force of the knee air bag inflating can increase the risk of injury if the occupant is too close to, or is against, this air bag module during inflation. The knee air bag will deflate quickly after the collision is over OR the knee air bag will remain inflated for a short time.
The knee air bag operates only when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
After placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates. The supplemental air bag warning light will turn off after about 7 seconds if the system is operational.
WARNING
Do not place any objects between the knee bolster and the driver's seat. Such objects may become dangerous projectiles and cause injury if a knee air bag inflates.
Right after inflation, the knee air bag system components will be hot. Do not touch them; you may severely burn yourself.
No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the knee air bag system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental inflation of the knee air bag system.
Do not make unauthorized changes to your vehicle's electrical system or suspension system. This could affect proper operation of the knee air bag system.
Tampering with the knee air bag system may result in serious personal injury. For example, do not change the driver knee bolster or install additional trim material around the knee air bag.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work on and around the knee air bag. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. The SRS wiring harnesses* should not be modified or disconnected. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the knee air bag system.
*The SRS wiring harness or connectors are yellow or orange for easy identification.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the knee air bag system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this manual.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-61
Seat belt with pretensioner(s) (front seats)
WARNING
The pretensioner(s) cannot be reused after activation. They must be replaced together with the retractor and buckle as a unit.
If the vehicle becomes involved in a collision but pretensioner(s) are not activated, be sure to have the pretensioner system checked and, if necessary, replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
No unauthorized changes should be made to any components or wiring of the pretensioner system. This is to prevent damage to or accidental activation of the pretensioner(s). Tampering with the pretensioner system may result in serious personal injury.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for work around and on the pretensioner system. It is also recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for installation of electrical equipment. Unauthorized electrical test equipment and probing devices should not be used on the pretensioner system.
If you need to dispose of the pretensioner(s) or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
The pretensioner system may activate with the supplemental air bag system in certain types of collisions. Working with the seat belt retractor, the pretensioner(s) help tighten the seat belt when the vehicle becomes involved in certain types of collisions, helping to restrain front seat occupants.
The pretensioner(s) are encased with the seat belt retractor. These seat belts are used the same way as conventional seat belts.
When pretensioner(s) activate, smoke is released and a loud noise may be heard. This
1-62 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
smoke is not harmful and does not indicate a fire. Care should be taken not to inhale it, as it may cause irritation and choking. Those with a history of a breathing condition should get fresh air promptly.
After the pretensioner(s') activation, load limiters allow the seat belt to release webbing (if necessary) to reduce forces against the chest.
The supplemental air bag warning
light
is used to indicate malfunctions
in the pretensioner(s) system. For addi-
tional information, refer to "Supplemental
air bag warning light" in this section. If the operation of the supplemental air bag warning light indicates there is a malfunction, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When selling your vehicle, we request that you inform the buyer about the pretensioner system and guide the buyer to the appropriate sections in this Owner's
Manual.
LRS2617
1. SRS Air Bag Warning Labels (located on the sun visors)
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LABELS
Warning labels about the supplemental front-impact air bag system are placed in the vehicle as shown in the illustration.
WARNING
Do not use a rear-facing child restraint on a seat protected by an air bag in front of it. If the air bag deploys, it may cause serious injury or death.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.
If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and pretensioner systems need servicing:
The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
LRS0100
SUPPLEMENTAL AIR BAG WARNING LIGHT
The supplemental air bag warning light,
displaying
in the instrument panel,
monitors the circuits for the Air bag Control
Unit (ACU), satellite sensors, crash zone
sensor, occupant classification sensor, the
supplemental front-impact air bag, front
seat-mounted side-impact supplemental
air bag, roof-mounted curtain side-impact
supplemental air bag and seat belt preten-
sioner systems. The monitored circuits in-
clude air bag systems, pretensioner(s) and
all related wiring.
The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
Under these conditions, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag or pretensioner systems may not operate properly. They must be checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-63
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Repair and replacement procedure
The front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bag and pretensioner(s) are designed to inflate on a one-time-only basis. As a reminder, unless it is damaged, the supplemental air bag warning light remains illuminated after inflation has occurred. These systems should be repaired and/or replaced as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When maintenance work is required on the vehicle, the front air bags, side air bags, curtain air bags, knee air bag, pretensioner(s) and related parts should be pointed out to the person performing the maintenance. The ignition switch should always
be in the LOCK position when working under the hood or inside the vehicle.
WARNING
Once a front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, or knee air bag has inflated, the air bag module will not function again and must be replaced. Additionally, the activated pretensioner(s) must also be replaced. The air bag module and pretensioner(s) should be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. However, the air bag module and pretensioner(s) cannot be repaired.
The front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, knee air bag systems and the pretensioner system should be inspected if there is any damage to the front end or side portion of the vehicle. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If you need to dispose of a supplemental air bag or pretensioner systems or scrap the vehicle, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer. Incorrect disposal procedures could cause personal injury.
1-64 Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system
If there is an impact to your vehicle from any direction, your Occupant Classification Sensor (OCS) should be checked to verify it is still functioning correctly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The OCS should be checked even if no air bags deploy as a result of the impact. Failure to verify proper OCS function may result in an improper air bag deployment resulting in injury or death.
MEMO
Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system 1-65
2 Instruments and controls
Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2 Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
Speedometer and odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-5 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-7 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Distance To Empty (DTE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-8 Trip computer (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11 Checking lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-12 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-18 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21 Vehicle information display (if so equipped) . . . . . 2-22 How to use the vehicle information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-22 Startup display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-23 Vehicle information display warnings and indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-31 Security systems (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-35 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-37 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-39 Rear switch operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-40 Rear window or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-41 Headlight and turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Headlight control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-42 Daytime Running Lights (DRL) system (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Instrument brightness control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-45 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Fog light switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-46 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Heated seat switches (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . 2-47 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) switch (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-48 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch. . . . . . 2-48 Power outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 12v outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-49 Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-50 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51 Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-51
Storage trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-52 Glove box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Cup holders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-53 Luggage hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-54 Grocery hooks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Cargo cover (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-55 Roof rack (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-56
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-60
Interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-63 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Personal Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-64 Luggage compartment light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-65
INSTRUMENT PANEL 2-2 Instruments and controls
1. Vents (P. 4-30) 2. Headlight/fog light (if so
equipped)/turn signal switch (P. 2-42) 3. Driver's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) Horn (P. 2-47) 4. Meters and gauges (P. 2-4) Warning and indicator lights (P. 2-11) Trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9) Vehicle information display (if so equipped) (P. 2-22) 5. Wiper and washer switch (P. 2-39) 6. Front passenger airbag status light (P. 1-42) 7. Center display controls (if so equipped) (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42) Audio controls (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42) 8. Hazard warning flasher switch (P. 6-2) 9. Center display (P. 4-2, 4-3, 4-42) 10. Passenger's supplemental air bag (P. 1-42) 11. Glove box (P. 2-51)
LII2579
12. Climate controls (P. 4-31, 4-39) Heated seat switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-47)
13. Shift lever (P. 5-15) 14. Push-button ignition switch
(P. 5-9) 15. Power outlet (P. 2-49)
USB connection port (P. 4-2, 4-42) AUX jack (P. 4-2, 4-42) 16. Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (P. 4-2, 4-67) Cruise control switches (P. 5-39) 17. Driver supplemental knee air bag (P. 1-42) 18. Tilt and telescopic steering wheel lock lever (P. 3-26) 19. Hood release (P. 3-21) Fuel-filler door release (P. 3-24) Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) switch (if so equipped) (P 2-48) 20. Steering wheel switches for audio control (P. 4-2, 4-62) Control panel and vehicle information display switches (if so equipped) (P. 2-22)
21. Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch (P. 2-48) Enter/select switch for trip computer (if so equipped) (P. 2-9)
* Refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual (if so equipped).
Refer to the page number indicated in parentheses for operating details.
Instruments and controls 2-3
METERS AND GAUGES
LIC3561
Type A (if so equipped)
1. Tachometer
2. Warning and indicator lights
Vehicle information display
3. Speedometer
Odometer
4. Trip reset switch
Twin trip odometer
Instrument brightness control
Fuel gauge
knob
Engine coolant temperature gauge
2-4 Instruments and controls
SPEEDOMETER AND ODOMETER
This vehicle is equipped with a speedometer and odometer. The speedometer is located on the right side the meter cluster. The odometer is located within the vehicle information display (Type A -- if so equipped) or the trip computer (Type B -- if so equipped) to the left of the speedometer.
1. Tachometer 2. Trip computer
Odometer Twin trip odometer 3. Speedometer
LIC3592
Type B (if so equipped) 4. Trip reset switch Instrument brightness control knob 5. Warning and indicator lights
Instruments and controls 2-5
Speedometer
LIC2255
The speedometer indicates vehicle speed.
LIC3584
Type A (if so equipped)
Odometer/Twin trip odometer
The odometer and the twin trip odometer
1 are displayed in the vehicle information
display (Type A) (if so equipped) or the trip computer (Type B) (if so equipped) when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The odometer records the total distance the vehicle has been driven.
The twin trip odometer records the distance of individual trips.
LIC3595
Type B (if so equipped)
Changing the display
Push the TRIP RESET switch 2 on the right
side of the instrument panel to change the display as follows:
Trip
Trip
age Trip
Odometer Mile-
2-6 Instruments and controls
Resetting the trip odometer
Pushing the TRIP RESET switch 2 for more
than 1 second resets the currently displayed trip odometer to zero.
Average fuel economy information is also available. For additional information, refer to "Trip computer" in this section.
LIC3562
Type A (if so equipped)
TACHOMETER
The tachometer indicates engine speed in
revolutions per minute (rpm). Do not rev
engine into the red zone 1 .
Type A (if so equipped): To access the ta-
chometer, use the
and
on the
steering wheel to navigate to the "Gauges"
display. For additional information, refer to
"How to use the vehicle information dis-
play" in this section.
Type B (if so equipped): The tachometer is
located on the left side of the meter cluster.
LIC3536
Type B (if so equipped) CAUTION
When engine speed approaches the red zone, shift to a higher gear or reduce engine speed. Operating the engine in the red zone may cause serious engine damage.
Instruments and controls 2-7
LIC3564
Type A (if so equipped)
FUEL GAUGE
The gauge indicates the approximate fuel level in the tank. The gauge may move slightly during braking, turning, acceleration, or going up or down hills. Type A (if so equipped): The low fuel warning message shows in the vehicle information display when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low.
2-8 Instruments and controls
LIC3593
Type B (if so equipped) Type B (if so equipped): The low fuel warning light illuminates when the amount of fuel in the tank is getting low. Refill the fuel tank before the gauge registers 0 (Empty).
The
indicates that the fuel-filler
door is located on the driver's side of the
vehicle.
CAUTION
If the vehicle runs out of fuel, the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on. Refuel as soon as possible.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off. If the light remains on
after a few driving trips, have the ve-
hicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this
service
For additional information, refer to "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" in this section.
DISTANCE TO EMPTY (DTE)
Displays the estimated distance the vehicle can be driven before refueling. The value is calculated based on recent fuel economy, the amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank, and the actual fuel consumption.
Changes in driving patterns or conditions can cause the DTE value to vary. As a result, the value displayed may differ from the actual distance that can be driven.
DTE display will change to "---" when the fuel level in the tank is getting low, prior to the fuel gauge reaching 0 (Empty).
NOTE:
The DTE value after refill is estimated based on recent fuel economy and amount of fuel added.
If a small amount of fuel is added, or the ignition is on during refueling, the display may not be updated.
Conditions that affect the fuel economy will also affect the estimated DTE value (city/highway driving, idle time, remote start time, terrain, seasonal weather, added vehicle weight, added deflectors, roof racks, etc.).
LIC3594
TRIP COMPUTER (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, modes of the trip computer can be selected by pushing the TRIP RESET
switch A .
Each time the TRIP RESET switch is pushed, the display changes as follows:
Trip A Trip B Odometer
The
switch for the trip computer is
located on the lower left side of the instru-
ment panel.
Each time the
switch is pushed, the
display will change as follows:
Average fuel economy Average speed
Trip time Trip Distance
Average fuel economy (mpg or km/l)
The average fuel economy mode shows the average fuel economy since the last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the change/reset switch for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. At about the first 1/3 mi (500 m) after a reset, the display shows (----).
Average speed (mph or km/h)
The average speed mode shows the average vehicle speed since last reset. Resetting is done by pressing the change/reset switch for more than approximately 1 second. The display is updated every 30 seconds. The first 30 seconds after a reset, the display shows (----).
Instruments and controls 2-9
Trip time
The trip time mode shows the time since the last reset. The displayed time can be reset by pressing the change/trip switch for more than approximately 1 second.
Trip distance
The trip distance mode shows the distance traveled since the last reset. The trip distance can be reset by pressing the change/trip switch for more than approximately 1 second.
Shipping mode
This message may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this message appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, refer to "Extended storage switch" in this section.
2-10 Instruments and controls
WARNING LIGHTS, INDICATOR LIGHTS AND AUDIBLE REMINDERS
or
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
warning light
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped)
or
Brake warning light
Charge warning light
Door open warning light (if so equipped)
Engine oil pressure warning light
High temperature warning light (red) (if so equipped)
Low fuel warning light (if so equipped)
Low tire pressure warning light
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)
Master warning light (if so equipped)
NISSAN Intelligent Key® warning light (if so equipped) Power steering warning light
Seat belt warning light
Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped) Supplemental air bag warning light CRUISE indicator light (if so equipped)
DRIVE SPORT mode indicator light (if so equipped) Engine start operation indicator light (if so equipped) Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
Front passenger air bag status light
High beam indicator light (blue)
Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so equipped) Security indicator light (if so equipped)
SET indicator light (if so equipped) Side light and headlight indicator light (green) Slip indicator light
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light
Instruments and controls 2-11
CHECKING LIGHTS
With all doors closed, apply the parking brake, fasten the seat belts and place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. The following lights (if so equipped) will come on:
,
or
,
,
,
,
, The following lights (if so equipped) will come on briefly and then go off:
or
,
,
,
,
,
If any light does not come on or operate in a way other than described, it may indicate a burned-out bulb and/or a system malfunction. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING LIGHTS
For additional information on warnings and indicators, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.
2-12 Instruments and controls
or
Anti-lock Braking
System (ABS)
warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the ABS warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates the ABS is operational.
If the ABS warning light illuminates while the engine is running or while driving, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If an ABS malfunction occurs, the anti-lock function is turned off. The brake system then operates normally but without antilock assistance. For additional information, refer to "Brake system" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. It turns off after the engine is started.
This light illuminates when the AEB system is set to OFF on the vehicle information display.
If the light illuminates when the AEB system is on, it may indicate that the system is unavailable. For additional information, refer to "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
or
Brake warning
light
This light functions for both the parking brake and the foot brake systems.
Parking brake indicator
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on when the parking brake is applied.
Low brake fluid warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the light warns of a low brake fluid level. If the light comes on while the engine is running with the parking brake not applied, stop the vehicle and perform the following:
1. Check the brake fluid level. Add brake fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to "Brake fluid" in the "Doit-yourself " section of this manual.
2. If the brake fluid level is correct, have the warning system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
Your brake system may not be working properly if the warning light is on. Driving could be dangerous. If you judge it to be safe, drive carefully to the nearest service station for repairs. Otherwise, have your vehicle towed because driving it could be dangerous.
Pressing the brake pedal with the engine stopped and/or a low brake fluid level may increase your stopping distance and braking will require greater pedal effort as well as pedal travel.
If the brake fluid level is below the MINIMUM or MIN mark on the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive until the brake system has been checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning indicator (if so equipped)
When the parking brake is released and the brake fluid level is sufficient, if both the brake warning light and the ABS warning light illuminate, it may indicate the ABS is not functioning properly. Have the brake system checked and, if necessary, repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to "Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) warning light" in this section.
Charge warning light
If this light comes on while the engine is running, it may indicate the charging system is not functioning properly. Turn the engine off and check the generator belt. If the belt is loose, broken, missing, or if the light remains on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Do not ground electrical accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely. For additional information, refer to "Variable voltage control system" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
Do not continue driving if the generator belt is loose, broken or missing.
Door open warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when any of the doors are not closed securely while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Engine oil pressure warning light
This light warns of low engine oil pressure. If the light flickers or comes on during normal driving, pull off the road in a safe area, stop the engine immediately and call a NISSAN dealer or other authorized repair shop.
Instruments and controls 2-13
The engine oil pressure warning light is not designed to indicate a low oil level. Use the dipstick to check the oil level. For additional information, refer to "Engine oil" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
CAUTION
Running the engine with the engine oil pressure warning light on could cause serious damage to the engine almost immediately. Such damage is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Turn off the engine as soon as it is safe to do so.
High temperature warning light (red) (if so equipped)
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the high temperature warning light illuminates and then turns off. This indicates that the high temperature sensor in the engine coolant system is operational.
When driving, the high temperature warning light may turn off. This indicates that the engine coolant temperature is within the normal range.
CAUTION
If the high temperature warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the engine temperature is extremely high. Stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible. If the vehicle is overheated, continuing vehicle operation may seriously damage the engine. For additional information, refer to "If your vehicle overheats" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
Low fuel warning light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty).
Low tire pressure warning
light
Your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that monitors the tire pressure of all tires except the spare.
The low tire pressure warning light warns of low tire pressure or indicates that the TPMS is not functioning properly.
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light illuminates for about 1 second and turns off.
Low tire pressure warning
If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the warning light will illuminate. A "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning also appears in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).
When the low tire pressure warning light illuminates, you should stop and adjust the tire pressure of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver's door opening. The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
2-14 Instruments and controls
For vehicles with a vehicle information display, the "Tire Pressure Low - Add Air" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section, "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" and "In case of emergency" sections of this manual.
TPMS malfunction
If the TPMS is not functioning properly, the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
For additional information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" section and "Tire pressure" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
If the light does not illuminate with the ignition switch placed in the ON position, have the vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If the light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with under-inflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury or death. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure show on the Tire and Loading Information label located in the driver's door opening to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-15
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
CAUTION The TPMS is not a substitute for the
regular tire pressure check. Be sure to check the tire pressure regularly. If the vehicle is being driven at speeds of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), the TPMS may not operate correctly. Be sure to install the specified size of tires to the four wheels correctly.
2-16 Instruments and controls
Low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped)
This light comes on when the windshieldwasher fluid is at a low level. Add windshield-washer fluid as necessary. For additional information, refer to "Windshieldwasher fluid" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
Master warning light (if so equipped)
This light illuminates when various vehicle information display warnings appear.
No key
I-Key system warning
Low washer fluid
Door open
Parking brake release
For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.
NISSAN Intelligent Key®
warning light (if so
equipped)
After the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, this light comes on for about 2 seconds and then turns off. This light illuminates or blinks as follows:
The light blinks in yellow when the door is closed with the Intelligent Key left outside the vehicle and the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
The light blinks in green when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power. Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to "Battery" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
The light illuminates in yellow when it warns of a malfunction with the electrical steering lock system or the Intelligent Key system.
If the warning light illuminates in yellow while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to free the steering lock or to start the engine. If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the vehicle
checked and repaired as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, refer to "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.
Power steering warning light
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle, but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, the power steering warning light illuminates. After starting the engine, the power steering warning light turns off. This indicates the power steering is operational.
If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering, but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds.
For additional information, refer to "Power steering" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Seat belt warning light
The light reminds you to fasten your seat belts. The light illuminates whenever the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position and remains illuminated until the driver's seat belt is fastened.
The seat belt warning light may also illuminate if the front passenger's seat belt is not fastened when the front passenger's seat is occupied.
For additional information, refer to "Seat belts" in the "Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual.
Shift P (Park) warning light (if so equipped)
This light blinks red and the key reminder chime sounds if the shift lever is in any position other than P (Park) and the ignition switch is in the OFF position. Return the shift lever to P (Park) with the ignition switch in the OFF position and the light will turn off. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the chime will turn off. For additional information, refer to "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.
Supplemental air bag warning light
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON or START position, the supplemental air bag warning light illuminates for about 7 seconds and then turns off. This means the system is operational.
Instruments and controls 2-17
If any of the following conditions occur, the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag, and pretensioner seat belt systems need servicing:
The supplemental air bag warning light remains on after approximately 7 seconds.
The supplemental air bag warning light flashes intermittently.
The supplemental air bag warning light does not come on at all.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
Unless checked and repaired, the supplemental restraint system (air bag system) and/or the pretensioner(s) may not function properly. For additional information, refer to "Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)" in the "Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual.
WARNING
If the supplemental air bag warning light is on, it could mean that the front air bag, side air bag, curtain air bag and/or pretensioner systems will not operate in an accident. To help avoid injury to yourself or others, have your vehicle checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
INDICATOR LIGHTS
For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.
CRUISE indicator light (if so equipped)
The light comes on when the cruise control switch is pushed. The light goes out when the switch is pushed again. When the cruise indicator light comes on, the cruise control system is operational. For additional information, refer to "Cruise control" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
DRIVE SPORT mode indicator light (if so equipped)
This light illuminates and then turns off when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, and when the DRIVE SPORT mode is selected.
For additional information, refer to "Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Engine start operation indicator light (if so equipped)
For vehicles equipped with push-button ignition this indicator illuminates when the ignition switch is in the LOCK, OFF or ON position with the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the push-button ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed.
2-18 Instruments and controls
Front fog light indicator light (green) (if so equipped)
The front fog light indicator light illuminates when the front fog lights are on. For additional information, refer to "Fog light switch" in this section.
Front passenger air bag status light
The front passenger air bag status light will be lit and the passenger front air bag will be off depending on how the front passenger seat is being used.
For additional information, refer to "Front passenger air bag and status light" in the "Safety -- Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual.
High beam indicator light (blue)
This blue light comes on when the headlight high beams are on and goes out when the low beams are selected.
The high beam indicator light also comes on when the passing signal is activated.
Malfunction Indicator Light
(MIL)
If this indicator light comes on steady or blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate a potential emission control malfunction.
The MIL may also come on steady if the fuel-filler cap is loose or missing, or if the vehicle runs out of fuel. Check to make sure the fuel-filler cap is installed and closed tightly, and that the vehicle has at least 3 gallons (11.4 liters) of fuel in the fuel tank.
After a few driving trips, the
light
should turn off if no other potential emis-
sion control system malfunction exists.
If this indicator light comes on steady for
20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds
when the engine is not running, it indicates
that the vehicle is not ready for an emission
control system inspection/maintenance
test. For additional information, refer to
"Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
(I/M) test" in the "Technical and consumer
information" section of this manual.
Operation
The MIL will come on in one of two ways:
MIL on steady -- An emission control sys-
tem malfunction has been detected.
Check the fuel-filler cap if the Loose Fuel
Cap warning appears in the vehicle infor-
mation display (if so equipped) or the trip
computer (if so equipped). If the fuel-filler
cap is loose or missing, tighten or install
the cap and continue to drive the vehicle.
The
light should turn off after a few
driving trips. If the
light does not
turn off after a few driving trips, have the
vehicle inspected. It is recommended
that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this ser-
vice. You do not need to have your vehicle
towed to the dealer.
MIL blinking -- An engine misfire has been detected which may damage the emission control system. To reduce or avoid emission control system damage:
do not drive at speeds above 45 mph (72 km/h).
avoid hard acceleration or deceleration.
avoid steep uphill grades.
if possible, reduce the amount of cargo being hauled or towed.
Instruments and controls 2-19
The MIL may stop blinking and come on steady. Have the vehicle inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. You do not need to have your vehicle towed to the dealer.
CAUTION
Continued vehicle operation without having the emission control system checked and repaired as necessary could lead to poor driveability, reduced fuel economy, and possible damage to the emission control system.
Overdrive OFF indicator light (if so equipped)
The overdrive OFF indicator light illuminates when the overdrive OFF mode is selected.
For additional information, refer to "Driving the vehicle" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Security indicator light (if so equipped)
This light blinks when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position.
2-20 Instruments and controls
The blinking security indicator light indicates that the security systems equipped on the vehicle are operational.
For additional information, refer to "Security systems" in this section.
SET indicator light (if so
equipped)
This light comes on while the vehicle speed is controlled by the cruise control system. If the light blinks while the engine is running, it may indicate the cruise control system is not functioning properly. Have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information, refer to "Cruise control" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Side light and headlight indicator light (green)
The side light and headlight indicator light illuminates when the side light or headlights are on. If the headlight switch is in the AUTO position, the side light and headlight indicator light will illuminate when the headlights turn on. For additional information, refer to "Headlight and turn signal switch" in this section.
Slip indicator light
This indicator will blink when the VDC system is operating, thus alerting the driver to the fact that the road surface is slippery and the vehicle is nearing its traction limits.
You may feel or hear the system working; this is normal.
The light will blink for a few seconds after the VDC system stops limiting wheel spin.
The
indicator light also comes on
when you place the ignition switch in the
ON position. The light will turn off after ap-
proximately 2 seconds if the system is op-
erational. If the light does not come on
have the system checked. It is recom-
mended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for
this service.
Turn signal/hazard indicator lights
The appropriate light flashes when the turn signal switch is activated.
NOTE:
In case of a turn signal light bulb malfunction, the turn signal will flash at a higher frequency when the turn signal switch is activated.
Both lights flash when the hazard switch is turned on.
For additional information, refer to "Lights" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the VDC OFF indicator light illuminates and the turns off.
The VDC OFF indicator light illuminates when the VDC OFF switch is pushed to the OFF position.
When the VDC OFF switch is pushed to the OFF position, the VDC system is turned off.
For additional information, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
AUDIBLE REMINDERS Brake pad wear warning
The disc brake pads have audible wear warnings. When a disc brake pad requires replacement, it makes a high pitched scraping sound when the vehicle is in motion, whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the warning sound is heard. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Light reminder chime
With the ignition switch placed in the OFF position, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened if the headlights or parking lights are on.
Turn the headlight control switch off or to AUTO before leaving the vehicle.
NISSAN Intelligent Key® Lock-in Prevention (if so equipped)
The Intelligent Key buzzer sounds if the Intelligent Key is left inside the vehicle when the doors are closed and locked. When the buzzer sounds, be sure to take the Intelligent Key with you when leaving the vehicle. For additional information, refer to "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.
Parking brake reminder chime
A chime sounds if the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven. The chime will stop if the parking brake is released or the vehicle speed returns to zero.
Instruments and controls 2-21
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY (if so equipped)
Gear Position Indicator (P, R, N, D, L) Distance To Empty and Fuel Indicator
LIC3565
The vehicle information display is located to the left of the speedometer. It displays such items as:
Audio Information Navigation Information Drive Computer Information Fuel Economy Information Indicators and Warnings Vehicle and Meter Display Settings Odometer/twin trip odometer
2-22 Instruments and controls
LIC3566
HOW TO USE THE VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY
The vehicle information display can be
changed using the
,
, and OK buttons located on the
steering wheel.
1
- Use these
buttons to navigate the vehicle infor-
mation display.
2 OK - Change or select an item in the
vehicle information display.
3
(if so equipped) -- Returns to the
previous menu.
The OK,
and
buttons also
control audio and control panel functions
in some conditions. Most screens and
menus offer instruction prompts of the
steering switch buttons to indicate how to
control the vehicle information display.
Dots on the left side of the vehicle informa-
tion display will appear if there is more than
one page of menu items. The OK button
changes the audio source and
the
buttons also control voice
recognition manual mode. For additional
information, refer to the separate
NissanConnect® Owner's Manual.
STARTUP DISPLAY
When the vehicle in placed in the ON position the screens that display in the vehicle information display include:
Gauges
Audio
Navigation
Fuel Economy
Drive Computer
Warning Review
Settings
For additional information on warnings and indicators, refer to "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" in this section.
To control what items display in the vehicle information display, refer to "Customize display" in this section.
SETTINGS
The setting mode allows you to change the information displayed in the vehicle information display as well as the model for several vehicle functions:
Driver Assistance Customize Display Vehicle Settings TPMS Settings Maintenance Clock Unit/Language Factory Reset
Instruments and controls 2-23
Driver Assistance
The driver assistance menu allows the user to change the various driving aids and assistance options.
Menu item Blind Spot (if so equipped)
Blind Spot Warning
Emergency Brake
System
Parking Aids (if so equipped) Moving Object (if so equipped)
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (if so equipped) Timer Alert Low Temperature Alert Chassis Control (if so equipped) Active Trace Control
Active Engine Brake
Result Displays the available Blind Spot options. Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, refer to "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual. Displays the available emergency brake options. Allows user to turn the emergency brake on or off. For additional information, refer to "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual. Displays the available parking aids options. Allows user to turn moving object detection on or off. For additional information, refer to "Moving Object Detection (MOD)" in the "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems" section of this manual. Allows user to turn rear cross traffic alert on or off. For additional information, refer to "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual. Allows user to set or reset an alert at a specific time interval. Allows user to turn the low temperature alert on or off. Displays the available chassis control options. Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to "Chassis Control" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual. Allows the user to turn the Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) feature on or off. For additional information, refer to "Chassis Control" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
2-24 Instruments and controls
Customize Display
The customize display menu allows the user to customize the information that appears in the vehicle information display.
Menu item Main Menu Selection
Status Drive Computer Driving Aids Tire Pressures Coolant Temp. Chassis Control (if so equipped) ECO Info Settings ECO Drive Report (if so equipped) View History Navigation Settings (if so equipped) Alerts Welcome Effect (if so equipped)
Result Displays available screens that can be shown in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the status screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the drive computer screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the driving aids screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the tire pressures screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the coolant temp. screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Allows user to turn the chassis control screen on or off in the vehicle information display. Displays the available ECO info settings. Select to display this report when the ignition in switch is placed in the ON position. Select to view the vehicle's history. Displays the available navigation settings. Allows user to set available navigation alerts. Displays the available welcome effect settings.
Instruments and controls 2-25
Vehicle Settings
The vehicle settings allow the user to change the settings for lights, wipers, locking, keys, and other vehicle settings.
Menu item Lighting
Welcome Headlight Welcome & Farewell Welcome Farewell OFF
Auto Room Lamp Light Sensitivity Auto Light (if so equipped) Light Off Delay
Turn Indicator 3 Flash Pass
Locking Ext. Door Switch
Selective Unlock
Auto Door Unlock Shift to P
Result Displays the available lighting settings. Displays the available welcome headlight options. Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach and leave the vehicle. Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they approach the vehicle. Allows user to set the headlights to turn on when they leave the vehicle. Allows user to set the headlights to turn off when not driving. Allows user to turn the auto room lamp on or off. Allows user to change when the lights illuminate based on the brightness outside the vehicle. Allows user to turn the auto light feature on or off. Allows user to change the duration of time, from 0 to 180 seconds, that the automatic headlights stay on after the vehicle is shut off. Displays the available turn indicator settings. Allows user to turn the 3 flash pass feature on or off. For additional information, refer to "Headlight and turn signal switch" in this section. Displays the available locking settings. Allows user to turn the exterior door switch on or off. When turned on, the request switch on the door is activated. Allows user to turn the selective unlock feature on or off. When turned on, only the driver's door is unlocked after the door unlock operation. When the door handle request switch on the driver's or front passenger's side door is pushed to be unlocked, only the corresponding door is unlocked first. All the doors can be unlocked if the door unlock operation is performed again within 30 seconds. When this item is turned off, all the doors will be unlocked after the door unlock operation is performed once. Displays the available auto door unlock options. Doors will unlock when the vehicle is shifted into P (Park).
2-26 Instruments and controls
Menu item IGN OFF OFF
Answer Back Horn
Wipers Reverse Link Speed Dependent (if so equipped) Wiper with Speed (if so equipped)
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped)
Result Doors will unlock when the ignition is turned off. Doors will have to be manually unlocked. Allows user to turn the answer back horn feature on or off. When turned on, the horn will chirp and the hazard indicators will flash twice when locking the vehicle with the Intelligent Key. Displays the available wipers settings. Allows user to turn the reverse link feature on or off. Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off. Allows user to turn the wiper with speed feature on or off. Allows user to turn the Remote Engine Start feature on or off. When turned off, the vehicle cannot be started remotely.
TPMS Settings
The TPMS settings menu allows the user to change the tire pressure units displayed in the vehicle information display.
Menu item TPMS Settings
Tire Pressure Unit
Result Displays available TPMS Settings. Allows user to select the tire pressure units that will display in the vehicle information display.
Instruments and controls 2-27
Maintenance
The maintenance menu allows the user to set reminders for various vehicle maintenance items.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to "Changing wheels and tires" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance
does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.
Oil and Filter Tire Other
Menu item
Result Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one. Allows user to set a reminder at a specific interval or reset the current one.
2-28 Instruments and controls
Clock
Clock
Menu item
Result Allows user to adjust the clock settings and time within the vehicle information display. Adjustments that can be made include manually setting the time, and 12H/24H format. If these options do not appear, the clock must be set within the center display. For additional information, refer to the separate NissanConnect® Owner's Manual (if so equipped).
Unit/Language
The unit/language menu allows the user to change the units shown in the vehicle information display.
Mileage/Fuel Tire Pressures Temperature Language
Menu item
Result Displays the available mileage/fuel display units and allows user to select preferred unit for display. Allows user to select the tire pressure display units. Allows user to select the temperature display units. Displays the available language options and allows user to select preferred language for display.
Factory Reset
The factory reset menu allows the user to restore the vehicle information display settings to factory status.
Factory Reset
Menu item
Result Allows user to reset the vehicle information display settings to the original factory settings. Once selected, the user can confirm or cancel the reset.
Instruments and controls 2-29
2-30 Instruments and controls
LIC3962
VEHICLE INFORMATION DISPLAY WARNINGS AND INDICATORS
1. No Key Detected
2. Key Battery Low
3. I-Key System Error: See Owner's Manual
4. Shift to Park
5. Engine start operation (for Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models) (if so equipped)
6. Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
7. Release Parking Brake
8. Low Fuel
9. Door/liftgate Open
10. Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air (if so equipped)
11. TPMS Error: See Owner's Manual (if so equipped)
12. Alarm - Time for a break? (if so equipped)
13. Power will turn off to save the battery
14. Power turned off to save the battery
15. Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights 16. Headlight System Error: See Owner's
Manual 17. Cruise control indicator (if so equipped) 18. Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator (if so
equipped) 19. Malfunction (if so equipped) 20. Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse 21. CVT Error: See Owner's Manual (if so
equipped) 22. Steering lock release malfunction indi-
cator (if so equipped) 23. Illumination indicator 24. Transmission Shift Position indicator (if
so equipped) 25. High Coolant Temp: See Owner's
Manual 26. Outside Temperature Display 27. Low Outside Temperature 28. Oil and Filter 29. Tire 30. Other
31. Front Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
32. Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
33. Drive Sport mode indicator (if so equipped)
No Key Detected
This warning appears when the Intelligent Key is left outside the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. Make sure the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
For additional information, refer to "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.
Key Battery Low
This indicator illuminates when the Intelligent Key battery is running out of power.
If this indicator illuminates, replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
I-Key System Error: See Owner's Manual
After the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position, this light comes on for a period of time and then turns off.
Instruments and controls 2-31
The I-Key System Error message warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system. If the light comes on while the engine is stopped, it may be impossible to start the engine.
If the light comes on while the engine is running, you can drive the vehicle. However, in these cases, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Shift to Park
This warning illuminates when the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. Also, a chime sounds when the ignition switch is in the OFF position.
If this warning illuminates, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and start the engine.
Engine start operation (for Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models) (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the shift lever is in the P (Park) position.
2-32 Instruments and controls
This indicator means that the engine will start by pushing the ignition switch with the brake pedal depressed. You can start the engine directly in any position of the ignition switch.
Engine start operation for Intelligent Key system (if I-Key battery level is low)
This indicator appears when the battery of the Intelligent Key is low and when the Intelligent Key system and the vehicle are not communicating normally.
If this appears, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key while depressing the brake pedal. For additional information, refer to "NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Release Parking Brake
This warning illuminates in the message area of the vehicle information display when the parking brake is set and the vehicle is driven.
Low Fuel
This warning illuminates when the fuel level in the fuel tank is getting low. Refuel as soon as it is convenient, preferably before the fuel gauge reaches 0 (Empty). There will be a small reserve of fuel in the tank when the fuel gauge needle reaches 0 (Empty).
Door/liftgate Open
This warning illuminates when a door or the liftgate has been opened.
Tire Pressure Low - Add Air (if so equipped)
This warning appears when the low tire pressure warning light in the meter illuminates and low tire pressure is detected. The warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated. If this warning appears, stop the vehicle and adjust the tire pressures of all four tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
TPMS Error: See Owner's Manual (if so equipped)
This warning appears when there is an error with your TPMS. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Alarm - Time for a break? (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the driver enables the Timer Alert function within the Driving Assistance settings and the selected set time is expired. The time is based on ignition on time and can be set up to six hours.
Power will turn off to save the battery
This message appears in the vehicle information display after a period of time if the ignition switch is in the ON position and if the vehicle is in P (Park). For additional information, refer to "Push-button ignition switch positions" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Power turned off to save the battery
This message appears after the ignition switch is automatically turned off. For additional information, refer to "Push-button ignition switch positions" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Reminder: Turn OFF Headlights
This warning appears when the headlights are left in the ON position when exiting the vehicle. Place the headlight switch in the OFF or AUTO position. For additional information, refer to "Headlight and turn signal switch" in this section.
Headlight System Error: See Owner's Manual
This warning illuminates when there is an error with the system. For additional information, refer to "Headlight and turn signal switch" in this section.
Cruise control indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows the cruise control system status.
For additional information, refer to "Cruise control" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Blind Spot Warning (BSW) indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows when the BSW system is engaged.
For additional information, refer to "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Malfunction (if so equipped)
This warning appears when one or more of the following systems (if so equipped) is not functioning properly:
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
Blind Spot Warning (BSW)
Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)
If one or more of these warning appears, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Shipping Mode On Push Storage Fuse
This warning may appear if the extended storage switch is not pushed in. When this warning appears, push in the extended storage switch to turn off the warning. For additional information, refer to "Extended storage switch" in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-33
CVT Error: See Owner's Manual (if so equipped)
This warning illuminates when there is a problem with the CVT system. If this warning comes on, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Steering lock release malfunction indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator appears when the steering lock cannot be released.
If this indicator appears, push the ignition switch while lightly turning the steering wheel right and left.
Illumination indicator
This indicator shows the illumination adjustment of the instrument panel. For additional information, refer to "Instrument brightness control" in this section.
Transmission Shift Position indicator (if so equipped)
This indicator shows the transmission shift position.
High Coolant Temp: See Owner's Manual
This warning appears when the temperature of the engine coolant is too high. Stop
2-34 Instruments and controls
the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible. Avoid quick starting or abrupt acceleration. When the warning turns off, the vehicle can be driven.
If the warning appears again soon after it turns off, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Outside Temperature Display
The outside temperature display appears in the center region of the vehicle information display.
Low Outside Temperature
This warning appears if the outside temperature is below 37°F (3°C). The temperature can be changed to display in Celsius or Fahrenheit. For additional information, refer to "Settings" in this section.
Oil and Filter
This indicator appears when the customer set distance comes for changing the engine oil and filter. You can set or reset the distance for checking or replacing these items. For scheduled maintenance items and intervals, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
Tire
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for replacing tires. You can set or reset the distance for replacing tires.
WARNING
The tire replacement indicator is not a substitute for regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks. For additional information, refer to "Changing wheels and tires" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual. Many factors including tire inflation, alignment, driving habits and road conditions affect tire wear and when tires should be replaced. Setting the tire replacement indicator for a certain driving distance does not mean your tires will last that long. Use the tire replacement indicator as a guide only and always perform regular tire checks. Failure to perform regular tire checks, including tire pressure checks could result in tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to a collision, which could result in serious personal injury or death.
SECURITY SYSTEMS (if so equipped)
Other
This indicator appears when the customer set distance is reached for checking or replacing maintenance items other than the engine oil, oil filter and tires. Other maintenance items can include such things as air filter or tire rotation. The distance for checking or replacing the items can be set or reset.
Front Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
This warning appears when there is a radar obstruction detected. For additional information, refer to "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Side Radar Obstruction (if so equipped)
This message appears when the Blind Spot Warning (BSW) or Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) systems become unavailable because a radar blockage is detected. For additional information, refer to "Blind Spot Warning (BSW)" or "Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Drive Sport mode indicator (if so equipped)
A small "S" appears to the right of the Transmission Shift Position indicator in the vehicle information display when the Drive Sport mode is engaged.
Activate the Drive Sport mode by pressing the switch on the shift lever while the shift lever is in the D (Drive) position.
For additional information, refer to "Driving the vehicle" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
LIC3633
Your vehicle may have three types of security systems:
Vehicle security system
NISSAN Anti-Theft System
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System
VEHICLE SECURITY SYSTEM
The vehicle security system provides visual and audible alarm signals if someone opens the doors, hood or liftgate when the system is armed. It is not, however, a motion detection type system that activates when a vehicle is moved or when a vibration occurs.
Instruments and controls 2-35
The system helps deter vehicle theft but cannot prevent it, nor can it prevent the theft of interior or exterior vehicle components in all situations. Always secure your vehicle even if parking for a brief period. Never leave your keys in the vehicle, and always lock the vehicle when unattended. Be aware of your surroundings, and park in secure, well-lit areas whenever possible. Many devices offering additional protection, such as component locks, identification markers, and tracking systems, are available at auto supply stores and specialty shops. A NISSAN dealer may also offer such equipment. Check with your insurance company to see if you may be eligible for discounts for various theft protection features.
How to arm the vehicle security system
1. Close all windows. (The system can be armed even if the windows are open.)
2. Remove the keys from the vehicle.
3. Close all doors, hood and liftgate. Lock all doors. The doors can be locked with the key fob (if so equipped), Intelligent Key (if so equipped), door handle request switch, or mechanical key (if so equipped).
2-36 Instruments and controls
4. Confirm that the
security indica-
tor light stays on for about 30 seconds.
The vehicle security system is now pre-
armed. The vehicle security system will automatically shift into the armed
phase. The
security light begins
to flash once every three seconds. If
during the pre-armed phase one of the following occurs, the system will not arm:
Any door is unlocked with the key fob (if so equipped), the Intelligent Key (if so equipped), mechanical key (if so equipped), or door request switch.
Ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
Even when the driver and/or passengers are in the vehicle, the system will activate with all the doors, hood and liftgate locked with the ignition switch placed in the LOCK position. When placing the ignition switch in the ON position, the system will be released.
Vehicle security system activation
The vehicle security system will give the following alarm:
The headlights or turn lamps blink and the horn sounds intermittently but synchronously.
The alarm automatically turns off after a period of time. However, the alarm reactivates if the vehicle is tampered with again.
The alarm is activated by:
opening any door, hood or the liftgate without using the key or Intelligent Key (even if the door is unlocked by releasing the door inside lock knob).
How to stop an activated alarm
The alarm stops only by unlocking a door
or the liftgate with the key fob (if so
equipped), pressing the
button on
the Intelligent Key (if so equipped), or push-
ing the request switch on the driver's or
passenger's door with the Intelligent Key (if
so equipped) in range of the door handle.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS) (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered NATS key.
If the engine does not start using the registered NATS key, it may be due to interference caused by:
Another NATS key
Automated toll road device
Automated payment device
Other devices that transmit similar signals
Start the engine using the following procedure:
1. Remove any items that may be causing the interference away from the NATS key.
2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position and wait approximately 10 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3 again.
5. Start the engine.
6. Repeat the steps above until all possible interferences are eliminated.
If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered NATS key separate from other devices to avoid interference.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of a registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices. FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions; (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
Instruments and controls 2-37
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
If the light still remains on and/or the engine will not start, seek service for the NATS as soon as possible. Please bring all registered keys that you have. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LIC0474
Security indicator light (if so equipped)
The security indicator light blinks whenever the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position. This function indicates the NISSAN AntiTheft System (NATS) is operational. If the NATS is malfunctioning, the light will remain on while the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
2-38 Instruments and controls
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
SWITCH OPERATION
LIC2661
WARNING
In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the windshield and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the windshield with the defroster before you wash the windshield.
CAUTION
Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.
NOTE:
If the windshield wiper operation is interrupted by snow or ice, the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to the OFF position and remove the snow or ice that is on and around the wiper arms. In approximately 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
The windshield wiper and washer operates when the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Push the lever down to operate the wiper at the following speed:
1 Intermittent -- intermittent operation
can be adjusted by turning the knob
toward A (Faster) or B (Slower). Also,
the intermittent operation speed varies in accordance with the vehicle speed (if so equipped). (For example, when the vehicle speed is high, the intermittent operation speed will be faster.)
2 Low -- continuous low speed opera-
tion
3 High -- continuous high speed opera-
tion
Instruments and controls 2-39
Push the lever up 4 to have one sweep
operation (MIST) of the wiper.
Pull the lever toward you 5 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
NOTE:
The Wiper with Speed feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.
LIC2662
REAR SWITCH OPERATION
WARNING In freezing temperatures the washer solution may freeze on the rear window and obscure your vision which may lead to an accident. Warm the rear window with the defroster before you wash the rear window.
CAUTION
Do not operate the washer continuously for more than 30 seconds.
Do not operate the washer if the windshield-washer fluid reservoir is empty.
Do not fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir with windshield-washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based windshield-washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
Pre-mix windshield-washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshieldwasher fluid reservoir. Do not use the windshield-washer fluid reservoir to mix the windshield-washer fluid concentrate and water.
2-40 Instruments and controls
REAR WINDOW OR OUTSIDE MIRROR DEFROSTER SWITCH (if so equipped)
NOTE:
If the rear window wiper operation is interrupted by snow, etc., the wiper may stop moving to protect its motor. If this occurs, turn the wiper switch to OFF and remove the snow, etc. on and around the wiper arms. After about 1 minute, turn the switch on again to operate the wiper.
The rear window wiper and washer operate when the ignition switch is in the ON position. Turn the switch clockwise from the OFF position to operate the wiper.
1 Intermittent -- intermittent operation
(not adjustable)
2 Low -- continuous low speed opera-
tion
Push the switch forward 3 to operate the
washer. The wiper will also operate several times.
If the windshield wipers are on and the vehicle is placed in R (Reverse) the rear wiper will automatically turn on while the vehicle remains in R (Reverse).
NOTE:
The Reverse Link feature may be disabled. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.
LIC3600
Type A (if so equipped) To defrost the rear window glass (if so equipped), start the engine and push the rear window defroster switch on. The rear window defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.
To defrost the outside mirrors (if so equipped), start the engine and push the outside mirror defroster switch on. The outside mirror defroster indicator light on the switch comes on. Push the switch again to turn the defroster off.
Instruments and controls 2-41
HEADLIGHT AND TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
LIC3570
Type B (if so equipped) The rear window/outside mirror defroster (if so equipped) automatically turns off after approximately 15 minutes.
NOTE:
Use defogger and/or outside mirror defroster when engine is running to avoid discharging the battery.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inner side of the rear window, be careful not to scratch or damage the rear window defroster.
LIC2634
Type A (if so equipped)
HEADLIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
Lighting
1 Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the side, tail, license plate, and in-
strument panel lights will come on.
2 Rotate the switch to the
position,
and the headlights will come on and all
the other lights remain on.
LIC4008
Type B (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Use the headlights with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
2-42 Instruments and controls
LIC4007
Type C (if so equipped)
LIC2636
Autolight system (if so equipped)
The autolight system allows the headlights to turn on and off automatically. The autolight system can:
Turn on the headlights, front parking, tail, license plate and instrument panel lights automatically when it is dark.
Turn off all the lights when it is light.
Keep all the lights on for a period of time after you place the ignition switch in the OFF position and all doors are closed.
To turn on the autolight system:
1. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO
position 1 .
2. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
3. The autolight system automatically turns the headlights on and off.
Initially, if the ignition switch is turned off and a door is opened and left open, the headlights remain on for a period of time. If another door is opened while the headlights are on, then the timer is reset.
To turn the autolight system off, turn the
switch to the OFF,
, or
position.
NOTE:
Autolight activation sensitivity and the time delay for autolight shutoff may be able to be adjusted. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.
Instruments and controls 2-43
LIC4006
Be sure you do not put anything on top of the autolight sensor located in the top
side 1 of the instrument panel. The au-
tolight sensor controls the autolight; if it is covered, the autolight sensor reacts as if it is dark out and the headlights will illuminate. If this occurs while parked with the engine off and the ignition switch placed in the ON position, your vehicle's battery could become discharged.
LIC2637
Headlight beam select
1 To select the high beam function, push
the lever forward while the low beams
are on. The high beam lights come on
and the
indicator light illumi-
nates.
2 Pull the lever back to return to the low
beam.
3 Pulling and releasing the lever flashes
the headlight high beams on and off. The low beams do not need to be on for this to function.
Battery saver system
The battery saver system automatically turns off the ignition after a period of time when the ignition switch is left in the ON position.
The battery saver system automatically turns off the following lights after a period of time when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position:
Headlights, when the headlight switch
is in the
or
position
Interior lights, when left in the ON position
CAUTION
Even though the battery saver feature automatically turns off the headlights after a period of time, you should turn the headlight switch to the OFF position when the engine is not running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
2-44 Instruments and controls
DAYTIME RUNNING LIGHTS (DRL) SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The Daytime Running Lights (DRL) portion of the fog light assembly automatically illu-
minates when the engine is started with the parking brake released. The DRL operate with the headlight switch in the OFF position. Turn the headlight switch to
the
position for full illumination when
driving at night. (The DRL will turn off.)
If the parking brake is applied before the engine is started, the DRL do not illuminate. The DRL illuminate once the parking brake
is released. The DRL will remain on until the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
It is necessary at dusk to turn the headlight switch on for interior controls and switches to illuminate, as those remain off while the switch is in the OFF position.
WARNING
When the DRL system is active, tail lights on your vehicle are not on. It is necessary at dusk to turn on your headlights. Failure to do so could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
LIC4150
Type B (if so equipped)
INSTRUMENT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
Turn the control knob A to adjust the
brightness of instrument panel lights.
LIC4151
Type B (if so equipped)
Instruments and controls 2-45
NOTE:
The 3 flash pass lane change signal may be able to be disabled. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in this section.
TURN SIGNAL SWITCH
LIC2638
Turn signal
1 Move the lever up or down to signal the
turning direction. When the turn is completed, the turn signal cancels automatically.
Lane change signal
2 To signal a lane change, move the lever
up or down until the turn signal begins to flash, but the lever does not latch.
The turn signal will automatically flash three times.
2-46 Instruments and controls
FOG LIGHT SWITCH (if so equipped)
LIC2639
To turn the fog lights on, turn the headlight
switch to the
or
position, then
turn the fog light switch to the
posi-
tion.
To turn the fog lights on with the headlight
switch in the AUTO position, the headlights
must be on, then turn the fog light switch to
the
position.
To turn the fog lights off, turn the fog light
switch to the OFF position.
HORN
HEATED SEAT SWITCHES (if so equipped)
LIC3568
To sound the horn, push near the horn icon on the steering wheel.
WARNING
Do not disassemble the horn. Doing so could affect proper operation of the supplemental front air bag system. Tampering with the supplemental front air bag system may result in serious personal injury.
LIC3973
WARNING
Do not use or allow occupants to use the seat heater if you or the occupants cannot monitor elevated seat temperatures or have an inability to feel pain in body parts that contact the seat. Use of the seat heater by such people could result in serious injury.
CAUTION
The battery could run down if the seat heater is operated while the engine is not running.
Do not use the seat heater for extended periods or when no one is using the seat.
Do not put anything on the seat which insulates heat, such as a blanket, cushion, seat cover, etc. Otherwise, the seat may become overheated.
Do not place anything hard or heavy on the seat or pierce it with a pin or similar object. This may result in damage to the heater.
Any liquid spilled on the heated seat should be removed immediately with a dry cloth.
When cleaning the seat, never use gasoline, benzine, thinner, or any similar materials.
If any malfunctions are found or the heated seat does not operate, turn the switch off and have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Instruments and controls 2-47
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) SWITCH (if so equipped)
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) OFF SWITCH
The front seats are warmed by built-in heaters.
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Push the switch once for the high (2 indicators illuminated) setting. Push the switch again for the low (1 indicator illuminated) setting.
The heater is controlled by a thermostat, automatically turning the heater on and off. The indicator light(s) will remain on as long as the switch is on.
3. Push the switch again to turn it off (no indicators illuminated).
4. When the seat is warmed or before you leave the vehicle, be sure to push the switch to turn it off.
LIC3983
When this switch is illuminated, the following system is activated.
Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
To turn the systems on, push the AEB switch. The light will illuminate. To turn the systems off, push the switch again. The light will go off, and the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system warning light will illuminate in the meter.
For additional information, refer to "Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
LIC3344
The vehicle should be driven with the VDC system on for most driving conditions.
If the vehicle is stuck in mud or snow, the VDC system reduces the engine output to reduce wheel spin. The engine speed will be reduced even if the accelerator is depressed to the floor. If maximum engine power is needed to free a stuck vehicle, turn the VDC system off.
To turn off the VDC system, push the VDC
OFF switch. The
indicator and the Au-
tomatic Emergency Braking (AEB) system
warning light will come on.
2-48 Instruments and controls
POWER OUTLETS
Push the VDC OFF switch again or restart the engine to turn on the system. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
NOTE:
When the ignition is in the OFF position, the front console power outlet stops delivering power one minute after the door is opened and stays open.
If the door remains closed after the ignition is placed in the OFF position, the front console power outlet continues to deliver power until the accessory power timer has elapsed.
Instrument Panel
12V OUTLETS
LIC4003
The power outlet is for powering electrical accessories such as cellular telephones. It is rated at 12 volt, 120W (10A) maximum.
The front console power outlet is powered only when the ignition switch is in the ON position, or while the accessory power is active.
CAUTION
The outlet and plug may be hot during or immediately after use.
Only certain power outlets are designed for use with a cigarette lighter unit. Do not use any other power outlet for an accessory lighter. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
Do not use with accessories that exceed a 12 volt, 120W (10A) power draw.
Do not use double adapters or more than one electrical accessory.
Instruments and controls 2-49
EXTENDED STORAGE SWITCH
Use power outlets with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
Avoid using power outlets when the air conditioner, headlights or rear window defroster is on.
Before inserting or disconnecting a plug, be sure the electrical accessory being used is turned off.
Push the plug in as far as it will go. If good contact is not made, the plug may overheat or the internal temperature fuse may open.
When not in use, be sure to close the cap. Do not allow water or any other liquid to contact the outlet.
LIC3581
The extended storage switch is used when the vehicle is in transit from the factory. It is
located in the fuse panel A which is on the
driver's side left kick panel, near the floor, on the inside of the panel. If any electrical equipment does not operate, ensure the extended storage switch is pushed fully in place, as shown.
Pulled position
LIC3266
2-50 Instruments and controls
STORAGE
Do not place heavy loads heavier than 9.1 lbs. (4 kg) on the seatback, head restraint/headrest or in the seatback pocket.
Pushed position
LIC3268
SEATBACK POCKETS
LIC0016
The seatback pockets are located on the back of the driver's and passenger's seats. The pockets can be used to store maps.
WARNING
To ensure proper operation of the passenger's NISSAN Advanced Air Bag System, please observe the following items:
Do not allow a passenger in the rear seat to push or pull on the seatback pocket or head restraint/headrest.
Instruments and controls 2-51
LIC4004
Storage compartment
STORAGE TRAYS
WARNING
Do not place sharp objects in the trays to help prevent injury in an accident or sudden stop.
LIC3558
Instrument panel pocket
Center console
LIC3986
2-52 Instruments and controls
GLOVE BOX
LIC3580
Open the glove box by pulling the handle.
WARNING
Keep glove box lid closed while driving to help prevent injury in an accident or a sudden stop.
Front console
CUP HOLDERS
LIC3987
WARNING
Avoid abrupt starting and braking when the cup holder is being used to prevent spilling the drink. If the liquid is hot, it can scald you or your passenger.
Use only soft cups in the cup holder. Hard objects can injure you in an accident.
LIC3574
Bottle holder -- front
CAUTION
Do not use bottle holder for any other objects that could be thrown about in the vehicle and possibly injure people during sudden braking or an accident.
Do not use bottle holder for open liquid containers.
Instruments and controls 2-53
LIC3575
Bottle holder -- rear
LUGGAGE HOOKS
LIC3577
The luggage hooks that are located on the floor should have loads less than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.
The luggage hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
WARNING
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
Use suitable ropes and hooks to secure cargo.
Never allow anyone to ride in the luggage area. It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
2-54 Instruments and controls
CARGO COVER (if so equipped)
LIC3569
Left side shown (right similar)
GROCERY HOOKS
The grocery hooks are located in the cargo area and allow for standard size plastic grocery bags to hang side by side.
WARNING
Never put anything on the cargo cover, no matter how small. Any object on it could cause an injury in an accident or sudden stop.
Do not put objects heavier than 44 lbs. (20 kg) on the cargo cover for long periods of time.
Do not leave the cargo cover in the vehicle with it disengaged from the holder.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
CAUTION
Do not apply a total load of more than 6.6 lbs. (3 kg) to a single grocery hook.
Properly secure cargo and do not allow it to contact the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor. Cargo that is not properly secured or cargo that contacts the top tether strap may damage the top tether strap during a collision. If the cargo cover contacts the top tether strap when it is attached to the top tether anchor, remove the cargo cover from the vehicle or secure it on the cargo floor below its attachment location. If the cargo cover is not removed, it may damage the top tether strap during a collision. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the child restraint top tether strap is damaged.
The cargo cover keeps the luggage compartment contents hidden from the outside.
Instruments and controls 2-55
LIC3349
To remove the cargo cover:
1 Remove the straps from the rear
hatch.
2 Remove the cargo cover from the
holders on the rear pillar.
LIC2386
ROOF RACK (if so equipped)
Do not apply any load directly to the roof side rails. Cross bars must be installed before applying load/cargo/luggage to the roof of the vehicle. Genuine NISSAN accessory cross bars are available through a NISSAN dealer. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for additional information.
The service load capacity for the roof side rails is 165 lbs. (74 kg.), however do not exceed the cross bars load capacity.
Be careful that your vehicle does not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR front and rear).
For additional information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to:
"Vehicle loading information" or the "Dimensions and Weights" table in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
F.M.V.S.S. or C.V.M.S.S. certification label (located on the driver's door pillar) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Always install the cross bars onto the roof side rails before loading cargo of any kind. Loading cargo directly onto the roof side rails or the vehicle's roof may cause vehicle damage.
Drive extra carefully when the vehicle is loaded at or near the cargo carrying capacity, especially if the significant portion of that load is carried on the cross bars.
2-56 Instruments and controls
Heavy loading of the cross bars has the potential to affect the vehicle stability and handling during sudden or unusual handling maneuvers.
Roof rack cross bars should be evenly distributed.
Do not exceed maximum roof rack cross bars load capacity.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
Installing Crossbars (if so equipped)
WARNING
It is recommended that you have the roof rack crossbars installed by a NISSAN dealer.
Removal and re-installation of crossbars requires purchase of new M6 bolts (T99R1 5RL0A-S1) or the reapplication of thread-locking adhesive such as LOCTITE® , 242® , or equivalent.
Do not attempt to adjust fasteners on the underside of the end supports. Fasteners are pre-adjusted to the proper torque requirement by the manufacturer.
Protect the painted area on the vehicle roof under the crossbars by placing a piece of cloth under the cross bars to prevent scratch damage.
LIC4010
1. Manually remove all 8 protective caps from the roof rack rails. See Fig. 1.
NOTE: Please stow these protective covers in the glove box.
CAUTION Covers should be re-installed if crossbar is removed.
Instruments and controls 2-57
LIC4011
2. Identify the FRONT (A) & REAR (B) crossbar assembly in the kit.
NOTE:
REAR Crossbar is shorter in length compared to the FRONT Crossbar
LIC4012
3. Identify markings on bottom side of crossbar end supports.
NOTE:
FL is FRONT Crossbar Driver Side.
FR is FRONT Crossbar Passenger Side
RL is REAR Crossbar Driver Side.
RR is REAR Crossbar Passenger Side. When assembled, the Arrow on the bottom side of the crossbar end support always points towards the front of the vehicle.
LIC4013
4. Position FRONT crossbar onto left and right roof rack rail; and adjust right support in and out until it fits securely into position.
See Fig. 4.
2-58 Instruments and controls
LIC4014
5. Make sure that the FRONT crossbar is in proper position with respect to the roof rack rail attachment positions, and loosely install all 4 bolts on FRONT crossbar using the T30 TORX® screwdriver provided.
See Fig. 5.
NOTE:
Start with driver side front bolt. Bolts should not be fully tightened, only partially tightened.
LIC4015
6. Tighten all 4 bolts to 89 N-m torque using a T30 TORX® torque wrench.
NOTE:
a. Start with driver side front bolt.
b. T30 TORX® torque wrench is not provided with kit.
7. Repeat steps 4 through 6 for the REAR crossbar installation.
8. After installation, gently wiggle the crossbars to check for any loose fit. If loose fit is noticed, please uninstall and repeat the steps 4 through 7.
CAUTION Please locate max load label on cross-
bar end support. Do not load more that 100 lbs. (45kg). Be careful that your vehicle does not
exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or its Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR Front and Rear). The GVWR and GAWR are located on the Safety Compliance Certification Label. For more information regarding GVWR and GAWR, refer to the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual. Always evenly distribute the luggage and appropriate crossbar attachment on the crossbar.
Instruments and controls 2-59
WINDOWS
POWER WINDOWS
WARNING
Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle while it is in motion and before closing the windows. Use the window lock switch to prevent unexpected use of the power windows.
To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
The power windows operate when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position or for a period of time after the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position. If the driver's or passenger's door is opened during this period of time, the power to the windows is canceled.
LIC3238
1. Window lock button 2. Power door lock switch 3. Front passenger side automatic
switch 4. Right rear passenger side switch 5. Left rear passenger side switch 6. Driver's side automatic switch
Driver's side power window switch
The driver's side control panel is equipped with switches to open or close all of the windows.
To open a window, push the switch to the detent and continue to hold down until the desired window position is reached. To close a window, pull the switch to the detent and continue to hold up until the desired window position is reached.
2-60 Instruments and controls
LIC3588
Front passenger's power window switch
The passenger's window switch operates only the corresponding passenger's window. To open the window partially, push the
switch down 1 lightly until the desired
window position is reached. To close the
window partially, pull the switch up 2 until
the desired window position is reached.
LIC2663
Rear power window switch
The rear power window switches open or close only the corresponding windows. To open the window, push the switch and hold
it down 1 . To close the window, pull the switch up 2 .
Locking passengers' windows
When the window lock switch is depressed, only the driver's side window can be opened or closed. Push it again to cancel the window lock function.
Automatic operation
LIC0410
To fully open a window equipped with automatic operation, press the window switch down to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. The window automatically opens all the way. To stop the window, lift the switch up while the window is opening.
If so equipped, it may be possible to fully close a window equipped with automatic operation, pull the switch up to the second detent and release it; it need not be held. To stop the window, press the switch down while the window is closing.
Instruments and controls 2-61
Auto-reverse function
The auto-reverse function can be activated when a window is closed by automatic operation.
Depending on the environment or driving conditions, the auto-reverse function may be activated if an impact or load similar to something being caught in the window occurs.
WARNING
There are some small distances immediately before the closed position which cannot be detected. Make sure that all passengers have their hands, etc., inside the vehicle before closing the window.
If the vehicle's battery is disconnected, replaced, or jump started, the power window auto-reverse function may not operate properly. Have the power window autoreverse system re-initialized. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If the control unit detects something caught in a window equipped with automatic operation as it is closing, the window will be immediately lowered.
2-62 Instruments and controls
When power window switch does not operate
If the power window automatic function (closing only) does not operate properly, perform the following procedure to initialize the power window system:
1. Place the ignition switch in the ON position.
2. Open the window more than halfway by operating the power window switch.
3. Pull the power window switch and hold it to close the window, and then hold the switch more than 3 seconds after the window is closed.
4. Release the power window switch. Operate the window by the automatic function to confirm the initialization is complete. The power window automatically opens or closes depending on if the automatic down or up function is selected.
5. Perform steps 2 through 4 above for other windows.
If the power window function does not operate properly after performing the above procedure have the system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
INTERIOR LIGHTS
LIC3985
The interior light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position 3 ,
the interior lights illuminate, regardless of door position. The lights will go off after a period of time unless the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
When the switch is in the 2 position, the
interior lights will stay on for a period of time when:
The doors are unlocked by the key or the power door lock switch while all doors are closed and the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The driver's door is opened and then closed while the key is removed from the ignition switch.
The key is removed from the ignition switch while all doors are closed.
The light will turn off while the timer is activated when:
The driver's door is locked by the key, or the power door lock switch.
The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
When the switch is in the OFF position 1 ,
the interior lights do not illuminate, regardless of door position.
The lights will turn off automatically after a period of time while doors are open to prevent the battery from becoming discharged.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
Instruments and controls 2-63
MAP LIGHTS
LIC3988
To turn the map lights on, push the switch
to the 1 position. To turn them off, push the switch to the 2 position.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
SIC2063A
Center personal light
PERSONAL LIGHT
The personal light has a three-position switch and operates regardless of ignition switch position.
When the switch is in the ON position 1 ,
the light illuminates, regardless of door position.
When the switch is in the DOOR position 2 ,
the light illuminates by opening a door.
The personal light will stay on for about 15 seconds when:
The doors are unlocked while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position and all doors are closed.
The driver's door is opened and then closed while the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The ignition switch is placed in the OFF position while all doors are closed.
The personal light will turn off while the 15 second timer is activated when:
The driver's door is locked by the key fob, a key or the lock-unlock switch.
The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
When the switch is in the OFF position 3 ,
the light does not illuminate, regardless of door position.
2-64 Instruments and controls
Some vehicles are equipped with a battery saver feature that will automatically turn off the interior lights after approximately 10 minutes if:
doors are open, or
the interior light switch is in the ON position.
LUGGAGE COMPARTMENT LIGHT
The light illuminates when the rear hatch is opened. When the rear hatch is closed, the light goes off. For additional information, refer to "Exterior and interior lights" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
NOTE:
If the interior lights are turned off automatically by the battery saver feature, the ignition switch must be placed in the ON position before the interior lights will illuminate again.
For information regarding the interior light bulb replacement, refer to "Exterior and interior lights" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
CAUTION
Do not use for extended periods of time with the engine stopped. This could result in a discharged battery.
Instruments and controls 2-65
MEMO
2-66 Instruments and controls
3 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4 Locking with key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with inside lock knob. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5 Locking with power door lock switch . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Automatic door locks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7 Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 Door locks/unlocks precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8 NISSAN Intelligent Key® operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9 How to use the remote keyless entry function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-12 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-15 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-16
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18 Remote Engine Start operating range . . . . . . . 3-18 Remote starting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19
Extending engine run time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Canceling a Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-19 Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-20 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-21 Opening the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Closing the liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Secondary liftgate unlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-23 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Opener operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 Fuel-filler cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-25 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-26 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Vanity mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-27 Card holder (driver's side only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Manual anti-glare rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-28
KEYS
LPD2487
Type A (if so equipped) 1. Intelligent Keys (two sets) 2. Mechanical key 3. Key number plate (one plate)
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Your vehicle can only be driven with the Intelligent Keys which are registered to your vehicle's Intelligent Key System components.
LPD2797
Type B (if so equipped) Never leave the keys in the vehicle.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. The new keys must be registered by a NISSAN dealer prior to use with the Intelligent Key System of your vehicle. Since the registration process requires erasing all memory in the Intelligent Key components when registering new keys, be sure to take all Intelligent Keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer.
A key number plate is supplied with your keys. Record the key number and keep it in a safe place (such as your wallet), not in the vehicle. If you lose your keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for duplicates by using the key number. NISSAN does not record key numbers so it is very important to keep track of your key number plate.
A key number is only necessary when you have lost all keys and do not have one to duplicate from. If you still have a key, it can be duplicated without knowing the key number.
CAUTION
Listed below are conditions or occurrences which will damage the Intelligent Key:
Do not allow the Intelligent Key, which contains electrical components, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect the system function.
Do not drop the Intelligent Key.
Do not strike the Intelligent Key sharply against another object.
3-2 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Do not change or modify the Intelligent Key.
Wetting may damage the Intelligent Key. If the Intelligent Key gets wet, immediately wipe until it is completely dry.
Do not place the Intelligent Key for an extended period in a place where temperatures exceed 140°F (60°C).
Do not attach the Intelligent Key with a key holder that contains a magnet.
Do not place the Intelligent Key near equipment that produces a magnetic field, such as a TV, audio equipment and personal computers.
If an Intelligent Key is lost or stolen, NISSAN recommends erasing the ID code of that Intelligent Key from the vehicle. This may prevent the unauthorized use of the Intelligent Key to operate the vehicle. For information regarding the erasing procedure, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
CAUTION
Always carry the mechanical key installed in the Intelligent Key slot.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM KEYS
You can only drive your vehicle using the Intelligent Keys which are registered to the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System components in your vehicle.
The mechanical key can be used for all the locks.
Mechanical key
SPA1951
Never leave the keys in the vehicle. Additional or replacement keys:
The Intelligent Key contains the mechanical key.
To remove the mechanical key, release the lock knob on the back of the Intelligent Key.
To install the mechanical key, firmly insert it into the Intelligent Key until the lock knob returns to the lock position.
Use the mechanical key to lock or unlock the driver's door.
If you still have a key, the key number is not necessary when you need extra NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys. Your existing key can be duplicated without knowing the key number. As many as four NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys can be used with one vehicle. You should bring all NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys that you have to the NISSAN dealer for registration. This is because the registration process will erase the memory of all key codes previously registered into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System. After the registration process, these compo-
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-3
DOORS
nents will only recognize keys coded into the NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System during registration. Any key that is not given to the dealer at the time of registration will no longer be able to start your vehicle.
CAUTION
Do not allow the immobilizer system key, which contains an electrical transponder, to come into contact with water or salt water. This could affect system function.
When the doors are locked using one of the following methods, the doors cannot be opened using the inside or outside door handles. The doors must be unlocked to open the doors.
WARNING
Always have the doors locked while driving. Along with the use of seat belts, this provides greater safety in the event of an accident by helping to prevent persons from being thrown from the vehicle. This also helps keep children and others from unintentionally opening the doors, and will help keep out intruders.
Before opening any door, always look for and avoid oncoming traffic.
To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
3-4 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Driver's side
LOCKING WITH KEY
LPD2129
To lock or unlock the vehicle, turn the key as shown.
Manual
To lock a door, turn the key toward the front
of the vehicle 1 . To unlock a door, turn the key toward the rear 2 .
Power (if so equipped)
LPD0461
The power door lock system allows you to lock or unlock all doors at the same time.
Turning the key toward the front 1 of the
vehicle locks all doors.
Turning the key one time toward the rear
2 of the vehicle unlocks that door. From
that position, returning the key to neutral
3 (where the key can only be removed and
inserted) and turning it toward the rear again within 5 seconds unlocks all doors
4 .
LPD2092
Inside lock
LOCKING WITH INSIDE LOCK KNOB
To lock the door without the key, move the
inside lock knob to the lock position 1 ,
then close the door.
To unlock the door without the key, move the inside lock knob to the unlock position
2 .
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-5
LPD2093
LOCKING WITH POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH
To lock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front passen-
ger's side) to the lock position 1 . When
locking the door this way, be certain not to leave the key inside the vehicle.
To unlock all the doors without a key, push the door lock switch (driver's or front pas-
senger's side) to the unlock position 2 .
Lockout protection
When the power door lock switch (driver's or front passenger's side) is moved to the lock position with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle while any door is open, a warning chime will sound and all doors unlock automatically.
AUTOMATIC DOOR LOCKS
All doors lock automatically when the vehicle speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/h).
All doors unlock automatically when the transmission is placed in the P (Park) position or when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
NOTE:
The automatic door unlock function can be changed using "Vehicle Settings" of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
SPA2037
CHILD SAFETY REAR DOOR LOCK
Child safety locks help prevent the rear doors from being opened accidentally, especially when small children are in the vehicle.
The child safety lock levers are located on the edge of the rear doors.
When the lever is in the unlock position 2 ,
the door can be opened from the outside or the inside.
When the lever is in the LOCK position 1 ,
the door can be opened only from the outside.
3-6 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
The Intelligent Key transmits radio waves when the buttons are pressed. The FAA advises the radio waves may affect aircraft navigation and communication systems. Do not operate the Intelligent Key while on an airplane. Make sure the buttons are not operated unintentionally when the unit is stored for a flight.
Never leave the Intelligent Key in the vehicle when you leave the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key system can operate all the door and liftgate locks using the remote control function or pushing the request switch (if so equipped) on the vehicle without taking the key out from a pocket or purse. The operating environment and/or conditions may affect the Intelligent Key system operation.
Be sure to read the following before using the Intelligent Key system.
CAUTION
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you when operating the vehicle.
The Intelligent Key is capable of receiving and transmitting radio waves. The Intelligent Key system transmits weak radio waves from various distances. Environmental conditions may interfere with the operation of the Intelligent Key system under the following operating conditions:
When operating near a location where strong radio waves are transmitted, such as a TV tower, power station and broadcasting station.
When in possession of wireless equipment, such as a cellular telephone, transceiver, or a CB radio.
When the Intelligent Key is in contact with or covered by metallic materials.
When any type of radio wave remote control is used nearby.
In such cases, correct the operating conditions before using the Intelligent Key function or use the mechanical key.
Although the life of the battery varies depending on the operating conditions, the battery's life is approximately two years. If the battery is discharged, replace it with a new one.
When the Intelligent Key battery is low, a yellow indicator illuminates with the message "Key Battery Low" in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display warnings and indicators" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
Since the Intelligent Key is capable of receiving radio waves, if the key is left near equipment which transmits strong radio waves, such as signals from a TV and personal computer, the battery life may become shorter.
For additional information, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
When the Intelligent Key is placed near an electric appliance such as a personal computer.
When the vehicle is parked near a parking meter.
As many as four Intelligent Keys can be registered and used with one vehicle. For information about the purchase and use of additional Intelligent Keys, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-7
OPERATING RANGE
LPD2073
The Intelligent Key functions can only be
used when the Intelligent Key is within the
specified operating range from the request
switch (if so equipped) 1 .
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The operating range is within 31.5 in (80 cm) from each request switch (if so equipped)
1 .
If the Intelligent Key is too close to the door glass, handle or rear bumper, the request switches (if so equipped) may not function.
When the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the request switch (if so equipped) to lock/unlock the doors.
DOOR LOCKS/UNLOCKS PRECAUTION
LPD2554
Do not push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key held in your hand as illustrated. The close distance to the door handle will cause the Intelligent Key system to have difficulty recognizing that the Intelligent Key is outside the vehicle.
After locking with the door handle request switch (if so equipped), verify the doors are securely locked by testing them.
3-8 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being left inside the vehicle, make sure you carry the Intelligent Key with you and then lock the doors.
Do not pull the door handle before pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped). The door will be unlocked but will not open. Release the door handle once and pull it again to open the door.
LPD2445
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® OPERATION
You can lock or unlock the doors without taking the key out of your pocket or bag.
When you carry the Intelligent Key with you, you can lock or unlock the doors by pushing the door handle request switch (if so equipped) or liftgate request switch (if so equipped) within the range of operation.
Locking doors
LPD2798
1. Place the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Close all doors and the liftgate.
3. Push any door handle request switch (if
so equipped) 1 or the liftgate request switch (if so equipped) 2 while carry-
ing the Intelligent Key with you.
4. All doors and the liftgate will lock.
5. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the outside chime sounds twice.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-9
NOTE:
LPD2816
Doors are locked by the door handle request switch (if so equipped) or liftgate request switch (if so equipped) while the vehicle is any power position and Intelligent Key is in the operating range of the vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Operating range" in this section.
LPD2446
Doors do not lock with the door handle request switch (if so equipped) or the liftgate request switch (if so equipped) with the Intelligent Key inside the vehicle and a chime sounds to warn you. However, when an Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle, doors can be locked with another Intelligent Key.
3-10 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the request switch (if so equipped), make sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles or the liftgate opener switch.
When locking the doors using the request switch (if so equipped), make sure to have the Intelligent Key in your possession before operating the request switch (if so equipped) to prevent the Intelligent Key from being left in the vehicle.
The request switch (if so equipped) is operational only when the Intelligent Key has been detected by the Intelligent Key system.
Lockout protection
To prevent the Intelligent Key from being accidentally locked in the vehicle, lockout protection is equipped with the Intelligent Key system.
When any door is open, the doors are locked, and then the Intelligent Key is put inside the vehicle and all the doors are closed, a chime will sound and the lock will automatically unlock.
NOTE:
The doors may not lock when the Intelligent Key is in the same hand that is operating the request switch (if so equipped) to lock the door. Put the Intelligent Key in a purse, pocket or your other hand.
CAUTION
The lockout protection may not function under the following conditions:
When the Intelligent Key is placed on top of the instrument panel.
When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the glove box or a storage bin.
When the Intelligent Key is placed inside the door pockets.
When the Intelligent Key is placed inside or near metallic materials.
Unlocking doors
1. Carry the Intelligent Key.
LPD2798
LPD2816
2. Push the door handle request switch (if
so equipped) 1 or the liftgate request switch (if so equipped) 2 .
3. The hazard warning lights flash once and the outside chime sounds once.
4. Push the door handle request switch (if
so equipped) 1 again within 30 sec-
onds to unlock all doors and the liftgate.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-11
NOTE:
Request switches (if so equipped) for all doors can be deactivated when the Intelligent Key Door Lock setting is switched to OFF in "Vehicle Settings" of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
NOTE:
LPD2446
If "Selective Unlock" is turned off in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display, all doors will unlock upon the first push of the door handle request switch (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
If a door handle is pulled while unlocking the doors, that door may not be unlocked. Returning the door handle to its original position will unlock the door. If the door does not unlock after returning the door handle, push the door handle request switch (if so equipped) to unlock the door.
All doors and the liftgate will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds after pushing the request switch (if so equipped).
Opening any doors or the liftgate.
Engaging the ignition switch from the locked position.
3-12
The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The interior light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations.
Placing the ignition switch to the ON position.
Locking the doors with the Intelligent Key.
Switching the room light switch to the OFF position.
HOW TO USE THE REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY FUNCTION
The remote keyless entry function can operate all door locks using the remote keyless function of the Intelligent Key. The remote keyless function can operate at a distance of 33 ft (10 m) away from the vehicle. The operating distance depends upon the conditions around the vehicle.
The remote keyless entry function will not function under the following conditions:
When the Intelligent Key is not within the operational range.
When the doors or the liftgate are open or not closed securely.
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged.
CAUTION
When locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure not to leave the key in the vehicle.
CAUTION
After locking the doors using the Intelligent Key, be sure that the doors have been securely locked by operating the door handles.
Locking doors
LPD2799
1. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position.
2. Close all doors and the liftgate.
3. Press the gent Key.
button on the Intelli-
4. The hazard warning lights flash twice and the vehicle chimes twice.
5. All doors and the liftgate will be locked.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-13
Unlocking doors
LPD2800
1. Press the Key.
button on the Intelligent
2. The hazard warning lights flash once.
3. Press the
button again within
30 seconds to unlock all doors and the
liftgate.
NOTE:
If "Selective Unlock" is turned off in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display, all doors will unlock upon the
first
press of the key fob. For addi-
tional information, refer to "Vehicle in-
formation display" in the "Instruments
and controls" section of this manual.
All doors and the liftgate will be locked automatically unless one of the following operations is performed within 30 seconds
after pressing the
button.
Opening any doors or the liftgate.
Engaging the ignition switch from the lock position.
The interior light illuminates for a period of time when a door is unlocked and the room light switch is in the DOOR position.
The light can be turned off without waiting by performing one of the following operations.
Placing the ignition switch in the ON position.
Locking the doors with the remote control.
Switching the room light switch in the OFF position.
Using the panic alarm
WPD0374
If you are near your vehicle and feel threat-
ened, you may activate the panic alarm to call attention by pressing and holding
the
button on the Intelligent Key for
longer than 1 second.
The panic alarm and hi beams will stay on for a period of time.
The panic alarm stops when:
It has run for a period of time, or
Any button is pressed on the Intelligent Key.
3-14 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The request switch (if so equipped) has been pushed and the Intelligent Key is in range of the door handle.
LPD2836
Intelligent Key button operation light
The light blinks only when you push any button on the Intelligent Key. The light illumination only signifies that the key fob has transmitted a signal. You may look and/or listen to verify that the vehicle has performed the intended operation. The number of blinks identifies each registered key (i.e. 1 blink = 1st key,...,4 blinks = 4th key) for
your own identification purposes. If the light does not blink, your battery may be too weak to communicate to the vehicle. If this occurs, the battery may need to be replaced. For additional information regarding the replacement of a battery, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-ityourself" section of this manual.
WARNING SIGNALS
To help prevent the vehicle from moving unexpectedly by erroneous operation of the Intelligent Key or to help prevent the vehicle from being stolen, a chime or buzzer sounds from inside and outside the vehicle and a warning is displayed in the instrument panel.
When a chime or beep sounds or a warning is displayed, be sure to check the vehicle and the Intelligent Key.
For additional information, refer to "Troubleshooting guide" in this section and "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-15
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Verify the location of all Intelligent Keys that are programmed for the vehicle. If another Intelligent Key is in range or inside the vehicle, the vehicle system may respond differently than expected.
Symptom
When pushing the ignition switch to stop the engine
The Shift to Park warning appears on the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.
When pushing the
button on The outside chime sounds for approxi-
the Intelligent Key or the door handle mately a few seconds.
request switch (if so equipped) to lock
the door
The Door Open warning appears on
When opening the driver's door to get
out of the vehicle
the display and the inside warning chime sounds continuously.
The No Key Detected warning appears
on the display, the outside chime
sounds three times and the inside
warning chime sounds for approxi-
When closing the doors
mately 3 seconds. The Shift to Park warning appears on
the display and the outside chime
sounds continuously.
The outside chime sounds for approxi-
mately 3 seconds and all doors unlock.
Possible Cause The shift lever is not in the P (Park) position with the parking brake fully applied. The Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle.
A door is not closed securely.
The ignition switch is in the ON position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC or ON position.
The ignition switch is in the ACC position and the shift lever is not in the P (Park) position. The Intelligent Key is in the vehicle.
Remedy Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you. Close the door securely.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position.
Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and place the ignition switch in the OFF position. Be sure to carry the Intelligent Key with you.
3-16 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
Symptom The Key Battery Low warning appears on the display.
When pushing the ignition switch to start the engine
The No Key Detected warning appears on the display, the outside chime sounds three times and the inside warning chime sounds for approximately 3 seconds. The I-Key System Error: See Owner's Manual warning appears in the vehicle information display.
Possible Cause The battery charge is low.
The Intelligent Key is not in the vehicle.
It warns of a malfunction with the Intelligent Key system.
Remedy Replace the battery with a new one. For additional information, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-ityourself" section of this manual. Carry the Intelligent Key with you.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-17
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
LPD2860
The
button will be on the NISSAN In-
telligent Key® if the vehicle has Remote En-
gine Start. This feature allows the engine to
start from outside the vehicle.
The following features may be affected
when the Remote Engine Start feature is
used:
Vehicles with a manual climate control system (if so equipped) will default to the last used heating or cooling mode.
Vehicles with an automatic climate control system (if so equipped) will default to either heating or cooling mode. For additional information, refer to "Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control" in the "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems" section of this manual.
Laws in some local communities may restrict the use of remote starters. For example, some laws require a person using Remote Engine Start to have the vehicle in view. Check local regulations for any requirements.
Other conditions may affect the function of the Remote Engine Start feature. For additional information, refer to "Conditions the Remote Engine Start will not work" in this section.
Other conditions can affect the performance of the Intelligent Key transmitter. For additional information, refer to "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" in this section.
REMOTE ENGINE START OPERATING RANGE
WARNING
To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, including entrapment in windows or inadvertent door lock activation, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
CAUTION
When the Intelligent Key battery is discharged or other strong radio wave sources are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key operating range becomes narrower, and the Intelligent Key may not function properly.
The Remote Engine Start function can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range from the vehicle.
3-18 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The Remote Engine Start operating range is approximately 197 ft (60 m) from the vehicle.
REMOTE STARTING THE VEHICLE
To use the Remote Engine Start feature perform the following:
1. Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle.
2. Press the doors.
button to lock all
3. Within 5 seconds press and hold
the
button until the turn signal
lights flash and the tail lamps turn on. If
the vehicle is not within view press and
hold the
button for at least 2 sec-
onds.
The following events will occur when the engine starts:
The parking lights will turn on and remain on as long as the engine is running.
The doors will be locked and the climate control system may come on.
The engine will continue to run for 10 minutes. Repeat the steps to extend the time for an additional 10 minutes. For additional information, refer to "Extending engine run time" in this section.
Press and hold the brake pedal while switching the ignition to the ON position before driving. For additional information, refer to "Driving the vehicle" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
EXTENDING ENGINE RUN TIME
The Remote Engine Start feature can be extended one time by performing the steps listed in "Remote starting the vehicle" in this section. Run time will be calculated as follows:
The first 10 minute run time will start when the Remote Engine Start function is performed.
The second 10 minutes will start immediately when the Remote Engine Start function is performed again. For example, if the engine has been running for 5 minutes, and 10 minutes are added, the engine will run for a total of 15 minutes.
Extending engine run time will bring you to the two Remote Engine Start limit.
A maximum of two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, are allowed between ignition cycles. The ignition switch must be cycled to the ON position and then back to the OFF position before the Remote Engine Start procedure can be used again.
CANCELING A REMOTE ENGINE START
To cancel a Remote Engine Start, perform one of the following:
Aim the Intelligent Key at the vehicle
and press turn off.
until the parking lights
Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
Cycle the ignition switch on and then off.
The extended engine run time has expired.
The first 10 minute timer has expired.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-19
Opening the engine hood. Shifting the vehicle out of P (Park).
The
button is not pressed and
held for at least 2 seconds.
The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
Pushing the ignition switch without the Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
The
button is not pressed and
held within 5 seconds of pressing the
lock button.
The brake is pressed.
Not pressing the brake pedal while pressing the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key in the vehicle.
The doors are not closed and locked. The liftgate is open.
CONDITIONS THE REMOTE ENGINE START WILL NOT WORK
The Remote Engine Start will not operate if any of the following conditions are present:
The IKey Indicator Light remains solid is in the vehicle information display.
The alarm sounds due to illegal entry into the vehicle.
The ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The hood is not securely closed.
The hazard indicator lights are on.
The engine is still running. The engine must be completely stopped. Wait at least 6 seconds if the engine goes from running to off. This is not applicable when extending engine run time.
Two Remote Engine Starts, or a single Remote Engine Start with an extension, have already been used.
The vehicle is not in P (Park).
There is a detected registered key already inside of the vehicle.
The Remote Engine Start function has been switched to the OFF position in Vehicle Settings of the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
3-20 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
The Remote Engine Start may display a warning or indicator in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
HOOD
LIFTGATE
1. Pull the hood lock release handle A
located below the driver side instrument panel. The hood will spring up slightly.
2. Push the lever B at the front of the
hood to the side as illustrated with your
fingertips and raise the hood C .
3. Remove the support rod and insert it
into the slot D .
4. When closing the hood, reset the support rod to its original position.
5. When closing the hood, return the support rod to its original position, lower
LPD2494
the hood slowly and drop the hood from the height of 8 to 12 in (20 to 30 cm). This allows proper engagement of the hood latch.
WARNING
Make sure the hood is completely closed and latched before driving. Failure to do so could cause the hood to fly open and result in an accident.
If you see steam or smoke coming from the engine compartment, to avoid injury do not open the hood.
WARNING
Always be sure the liftgate has been closed securely to prevent it from opening while driving.
Do not drive with the liftgate open. This could allow dangerous exhaust gases to be drawn into the vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidently injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
Always be sure that hands and feet are clear of the door frame to avoid injury while closing the liftgate.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-21
CAUTION
Before opening the liftgate, be sure to clear away snow, ice or dust that may be stuck to the liftgate. If the liftgate is opened while materials are still stuck to it, it may suddenly close again due to the weight of these materials.
Always be sure to fully open the liftgate. If it is not fully opened, it may suddenly shut.
Be especially careful when opening the liftgate in strong wind. The door could be caught by a gust of wind and may close suddenly.
Do not close the liftgate while holding the gas stays or hang anything on them. Doing so may lead to hands or arms becoming trapped in the liftgate and could result in an injury.
LPD2475
The liftgate gas stays A are installed in
order to support the weight of the liftgate. In order to prevent the gas stays being damaged or not operating properly, be sure to observe the following points. Do not insert hands or cords into the
gas stays A or apply any force to
them laterally. Do not attach any adhesive foreign
materials such as pieces of plastic or
stickers to the rod B portion.
3-22 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
With the Intelligent Key in range, push the liftgate request switch (if so equipped) and pull up on the liftgate.
CLOSING THE LIFTGATE
OPENING THE LIFTGATE
LPD2476
To open the liftgate use the following operations:
Release the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key and insert the key into the key cylinder on the liftgate (if so equipped) to unlock. Then push the liftgate opener switch and pull up on the liftgate.
Push the
button on the Intelligent
Key. Then push the liftgate opener
switch and pull up on the liftgate.
WARNING
Do not shut the liftgate with one hand and the other hand remaining on the liftgate or vehicle body. Doing so may lead to your hand becoming trapped and could result in an injury.
When closing the liftgate, do not place your hands near the edge of the liftgate. Always be sure to close the liftgate from the outside.
After closing the liftgate, be sure to check that it has been closed securely. If the liftgate opens while the vehicle is being driven this could result in a serious accident.
To close the liftgate, pull down until it securely locks.
LPD2604
SECONDARY LIFTGATE UNLOCK
Follow the following steps to unlock the liftgate when the battery is discharged.
NOTE:
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer as soon as possible for inspection.
Unlocking the liftgate:
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-23
FUEL-FILLER DOOR
LPD2478
1. Move the cover A by using a screw-
driver or a similar tool available on hand.
LPD2479
2. Then move the inside lever B by using
a screwdriver or similar tool available on hand. The liftgate will open.
OPENER OPERATION
LPD2460
The fuel-filler door release is located below the instrument panel. To open the fuel-filler door, pull the release. To lock, close the fuelfiller door securely.
3-24 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
FUEL-FILLER CAP
WARNING
Gasoline is extremely flammable and highly explosive under certain conditions. You could be burned or seriously injured if it is misused or mishandled. Always stop the engine and do not smoke or allow open flames or sparks near the vehicle when refueling.
Do not attempt to top off the fuel tank after the fuel pump nozzle shuts off automatically. Continued refueling may cause fuel overflow, resulting in fuel spray and possibly a fire.
Use only an original equipment type fuel-filler cap as a replacement. It has a built-in safety valve needed for proper operation of the fuel system and emission control system. An incorrect cap can result in a serious malfunction and possible injury. It could also cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to come on.
Never pour fuel into the throttle body to attempt to start your vehicle.
Do not fill a portable fuel container in the vehicle or trailer. Static electricity can cause an explosion of flammable liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To reduce the risk of serious injury or death when filling portable fuel containers:
Always place the container on the ground when filling.
Do not use electronic devices when filling.
Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container while you are filling it.
Use only approved portable fuel containers for flammable liquid.
CAUTION
Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Fuel recommendation" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
If fuel is spilled on the vehicle body, flush it away with water to avoid paint damage.
NOTE:
Changing ignition switch status during the refueling process may cause a delay in fuel gauge response.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-25
STEERING WHEEL
To remove the fuel-filler cap:
LCE2260
1. Turn the fuel-filler cap counterclockwise to remove.
2. Loop the tether strap around the hook
1 while refueling.
To install the fuel-filler cap:
1. Insert the fuel-filler cap straight into the fuel-filler tube.
2. Turn the fuel-filler cap clockwise until a single click is heard.
WARNING
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
Do not adjust the steering wheel any closer to you than is necessary for proper steering operation and comfort. The driver's air bag inflates with great force. If you are unrestrained, leaning forward, sitting sideways or out of position in any way, you are at greater risk of injury or death in a crash. You may also receive serious or fatal injuries from the air bag if you are up against it when it inflates. Always sit back against the seatback and as far away as practical from the steering wheel. Always use the seat belts.
MANUAL OPERATION
LPD2448
Tilt and telescopic operation
Pull the lock lever 1 down:
Adjust the steering wheel up or down in
direction 2 to the desired position.
Adjust the steering wheel forward or
backward in direction 3 to the desired
position.
Push the lock lever 1 up firmly to lock the
steering wheel in place.
3-26 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
SUN VISORS
3. Slide the sun visor extension 3 in or
out as needed.
CAUTION Do not store the sun visor before re-
turning the extension to its original position.
Do not pull the extension sun visor forcibly downward.
WPD0435
1. To block glare from the front, swing
down the sun visor 1 .
2. To block glare from the side, remove the sun visor from the center mount
and swing the visor to the side 2 .
VANITY MIRRORS
LPD2820
To access the vanity mirror, pull the sun visor down and flip open the mirror cover.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-27
MIRRORS
LPD2471
CARD HOLDER (driver's side only)
To access the card holder, pull the sun visor
down and slide card in the card holder A .
Do not view information while operating the vehicle.
WPD0126
MANUAL ANTI-GLARE REARVIEW MIRROR
The night position 1 reduces glare from
the headlights of vehicles behind you at night.
Use the day position 2 when driving in
daylight hours.
WARNING
Use the night position only when necessary, because it reduces rearview clarity.
OUTSIDE MIRRORS
LPD2452
To operate the outside mirror remote con-
trol move the small switch 1 to select the
right or left mirror. Adjust each mirror to the
desired position using the large switch 2 .
Move the small switch to the center (neutral) position to prevent accidentally moving the mirror.
3-28 Pre-driving checks and adjustments
WARNING
Do not adjust the mirrors while driving. You could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
Objects viewed in the outside mirror on the passenger side are closer than they appear. Be careful when moving to the right. Using only this mirror could cause an accident. Use the inside mirror or glance over your shoulder to properly judge distances to other objects.
LPD0259
Foldable outside mirrors
Pull the outside mirror toward the door to fold it.
Heated mirrors (if so equipped)
The electric control type outside mirrors can be heated to defrost, defog, or de-ice for improved visibility. Push the rear window defroster switch to activate the heating function. Push the switch again to deactivate, or the heating function will automatically turn off after approximately 15 minutes.
Pre-driving checks and adjustments 3-29
4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NissanConnect® Owner's Manual (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
How to use the touch-screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
How to use the
MENU button . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
(brightness control) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7 How to use the VOL (volume) knob /
PUSH
(power) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Selecting menu from launch bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
RearView Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-8
RearView Monitor system operation . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
How to read the displayed lines. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10
Difference between predicted and actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-10 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-12
RearView Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . 4-13
System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-14
Intelligent Around View Monitor (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-15
Intelligent Around View Monitor system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-16 Difference between predicted and actual distances. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-19
How to park with predicted course lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-21 How to switch the display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-22 Adjusting the screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 Intelligent Around View Monitor system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-23 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-25 Moving Object Detection (MOD) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-26 MOD system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-27 Turning MOD on and off (if so equipped) . . . . . 4-28 MOD system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-29 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-30 Heater and air conditioner (manual) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-31 Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-32 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Air conditioner operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Air flow charts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-35 Heater and air conditioner (automatic) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-39 Automatic operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-40 Manual operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41
Operating tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 Audio system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-42 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 Audio operation precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-43 FM/AM radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-52 iPod®* player operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Bluetooth® streaming audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58 Steering wheel switch for audio control. . . . . . 4-62 USB/iPod® charging ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-63 Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Operating Siri® Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64
Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System . . . . . . . . . 4-67
Regulatory information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-69 Using the system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-70 Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Control buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-71 Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-72 Voice commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 Phone display screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Making a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-76 Receiving a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 During a call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-77 Ending a call. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Text messaging (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-78 Bluetooth® connections screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-81 Phone and text message settings . . . . . . . . . . . 4-82
NISSANCONNECT® OWNER'S MANUAL (if so equipped)
Refer to the NissanConnect® Owner's Manual that includes the following information.
Audio system Apple CarPlayTM Android AutoTM
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone system
Viewing information
Other settings
Voice Recognition (if so equipped)
General system information
WARNING Positioning of the heating or air con-
ditioning controls and display controls should not be done while driving in order that full attention may be given to the driving operation. Do not disassemble or modify this system. If you do, it may result in accidents, fire, or electrical shock.
Do not use this system if you notice any abnormality, such as a frozen screen or lack of sound. Continued use of the system may result in accident, fire or electric shock.
In case you notice any foreign object in the system hardware, spill liquid on it, or notice smoke or smell coming from it, stop using the system immediately. Ignoring such conditions may lead to accidents, fire or electrical shock. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
4-2 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CONTROL PANEL BUTTONS
1.
MENU button
2. Display screen
3. DISP button
4.
BACK button
8.
button*
* For additional information, refer to
"Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System" in
this section regarding the Bluetooth®
Hands-Free Phone System control button.
When you use this system, make sure the engine is running.
If you use the system with the engine not running for a long time, it will discharge the battery, and the engine will not start.
Reference symbols:
"Example" -- Words marked in quotes refer to a key shown only on the display. These keys can be selected by touching the screen.
LHA4703
5. TUNE·SCROLL knob / PUSH SOUND button
6. VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power) button
7.
(brightness control) button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-3
HOW TO USE THE TOUCH-SCREEN
CAUTION
The glass display screen may break if it is hit with a hard or sharp object. If the glass screen breaks, do not touch it. Doing so could result in an injury.
To clean the display, never use a rough cloth, alcohol, benzine, thinner or any kind of solvent or paper towel with a chemical cleaning agent. They will scratch or deteriorate the panel.
Do not splash any liquid such as water or car fragrance on the display. Contact with liquid will cause the system to malfunction.
To help ensure safe driving, some functions cannot be operated while driving.
The on-screen functions that are not available while driving will be "grayed out" or muted.
WARNING
ALWAYS give your full attention to driving.
Avoid using vehicle features that could distract you. If distracted, you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident.
LHA4700
Touch-screen operation
Menu Item Selecting the item
Adjusting the item
Inputting characters 123 OK
Result
Touch an item to select. To select the "Phone" key, touch the "Phone" key on the screen. Touch the "
" key to
return to the previous screen.
Touch the "+" key or the "" key to adjust the settings of an item. Touch the up arrow to scroll up the page one
item at a time. Touch the down arrow to scroll down the page one item at a time.
Touch the number key. There are some options available when inputting characters.
Touch to manually enter numbers.
Completes the character input.
4-4 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Touch-screen maintenance
If you clean the display screen, use a dry, soft cloth. If additional cleaning is necessary, use a small amount of neutral detergent with a soft cloth. Never spray the screen with water or detergent. Dampen the cloth first and then wipe the screen.
LHA4706
HOW TO USE THE MENU BUTTON
To select and/or adjust several functions, features and modes that are available for your vehicle:
1. Press the
MENU button.
2. Touch the "Settings" key.
3. Touch the desired item.
LHA4700
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-5
Menu item Settings
Connections
Phone Sound Volume & Beeps Clock
On-screen Clock Clock Format Daylight Savings Time Set Clock Manually
System Voice Camera Others
Display
Language OSS Licenses Return All Settings To Default
Result Touch to change the following settings. Touch this key to select either Bluetooth® phone, Bluetooth® audio or USB audio options. For additional information, refer to "USB connections screen" and "Bluetooth® connections screen" in this section. For additional information, refer to "Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System" in this section. For additional information, refer to "Audio system" in this section. For additional information, refer to "Volume & beeps" in this section. Touch this key to adjust clock settings. Touch to toggle ON or OFF the clock display on the upper right corner of the display screen. Touch to set the clock to 12hour or 24hour format. Touch to adjust the daylight savings time to on or off. Touch to adjust the clock manually; then touch to change between AM and PM, the hour and the minutes. For additional information, refer to "Settings" in this section. Touch this key to change the camera settings. Touch this key to select and/or adjust various functions of this system. A screen with additional options will appear. Touch this key to toggle the display off or to adjust the appearance of the display. For additional information, refer to "Adjusting the screen" in this section. Touch this key to change the language on the display. Touch this key to display software licensing information. Touch this key to return all settings to default and to clear the memory.
4-6 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
(brightness control) BUTTON
To change the display brightness, press
the
button. Pressing the button again
will change the display to the day or the
night display.
Press and hold the
button for more
than 2 seconds to turn the display off. Press
and hold the button again to turn the dis-
play on.
HOW TO USE THE VOL (volume) KNOB / PUSH (power) BUTTON
Press the PUSH
(power) button to
turn audio function on and off. Turn the VOL
(volume) knob to adjust audio volume.
LHA4707
SELECTING MENU FROM LAUNCH BAR
Various system functions can be accessed by touching the items on the Launch Bar
1 which is displayed on most of the main
menu screens (the Launch Bar does not appear on some screens such as keyboard screens, camera screens, etc.)
Touch the keys on the Launch Bar to display the corresponding menu screens.
The following menu items are available on the Launch Bar:
AM FM USB/iPod Bluetooth AUX Settings
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-7
REARVIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)
1. CAMERA button 2. DISP button
4-8 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4681
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RearView Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
RearView Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper backing. Always turn and look out the windows and check mirrors to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always back up slowly.
The system is designed as an aid to the driver in showing large stationary objects directly behind the vehicle, to help avoid damaging the vehicle.
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a level paved surface. The distance viewed on the monitor is for reference only and may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
CAUTION Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The RearView Monitor system automatically shows a rear view of the vehicle when the shift lever is shifted into the R (Reverse) position. The radio can still be heard while the RearView Monitor is active.
LHA4109
To display the rear view, the RearView Monitor system uses a camera located just
above the vehicle's license plate 1 .
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the RearView Monitor.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-9
LHA4754
HOW TO READ THE DISPLAYED LINES
Guiding lines which indicate the vehicle width and distances to objects with refer-
ence to the vehicle body line A are dis-
played on the monitor.
Distance guide lines
Indicate distances from the vehicle body.
Red line 1 : approx. 1.5 ft (0.5 m) Yellow line 2 : approx. 3 ft (1 m) Green line 3 : approx. 7 ft (2 m)
Vehicle width guide lines 5
Indicate the vehicle width when backing up.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.
4-10 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA5050
Backing up on a steep uphill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
LHA5051
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object
LHA4757
Backing up near a projecting object
The vehicle may seem to nearly clear the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-11
object when backing up to the position A
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
LHA5052
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position C is shown farther than the position B in the display. However, the position C is actually at the same distance as the position A . The vehicle may hit the
4-12 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
LHA3522
1. While on the main menu screen, touch the "Settings" key.
2. Touch the "Camera" key.
3. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.
4. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "" key on the touch-screen display.
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving.
REARVIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for RearView Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
The system cannot completely eliminate blind spots and may not show every object.
Underneath the bumper and the corner areas of the bumper cannot be viewed on the RearView Monitor because of its monitoring range limitation. The system will not show small objects below the bumper, and may not show objects close to the bumper or on the ground.
Objects viewed in the RearView Monitor differ from actual distance because a wide-angle lens is used.
Objects in the RearView Monitor will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the rearview and outside mirrors.
Use the displayed lines as a reference. The lines are highly affected by the number of occupants, fuel level, vehicle position, road conditions and road grade.
Make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when backing up.
Do not put anything on the rearview camera. The rearview camera is installed above the license plate.
When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the camera. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
Do not strike the camera. It is a precision instrument. Otherwise, it may malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not clearly display objects.
When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
Vertical lines may be seen in objects on the screen. This is due to strong reflected light from the bumper.
The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
The colors of objects on the RearView Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
Objects on the monitor may not be clear in a dark environment.
There may be a delay when switching between views.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulate on the camera, the RearView Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera.
Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-13
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on the
camera 1 , the RearView Monitor may not
display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping it with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping it with a dry cloth.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
LHA4109
CAUTION
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
4-14 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR (if so equipped)
1. CAMERA button
LHA4682
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-15
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for the proper use of the Intelligent Around View Monitor system could result in serious injury or death.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor is a convenience feature and is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation because it has areas where objects cannot be viewed. The four corners of the vehicle in particular, are areas where objects do not always appear in the bird's-eye, front, or rear views. Always check your surroundings to be sure that it is safe to move before operating the vehicle. Always operate the vehicle slowly.
The driver is always responsible for safety during parking and other maneuvers.
CAUTION
Do not scratch the camera lens when cleaning dirt or snow from the front of the camera.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor system is designed as an aid to the driver in situations such as slot parking or parallel parking.
The monitor displays various views of the position of the vehicle in a split screen format. Not all views are available at all times.
Available views:
Front View An approximately 150degree view of the front of the vehicle.
Rear View An approximately 150degree view of the rear of the vehicle.
Bird's-Eye View The surrounding views of the vehicle from above.
Front-Side View The view around and ahead of the front passenger's side wheel.
LHA4113
To display the multiple views, the Intelligent Around View Monitor system uses cameras located in the front grille, on the vehicle's outside mirrors and one just above
the vehicle's license plate 1 .
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
With the ignition switch in the ON position, move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position or press the CAMERA button to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
4-16 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The screen displayed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor will automatically return to the previous screen 3 minutes after the CAMERA button has been pressed with the shift lever in a position other than R (Reverse) position.
Available views
WARNING
The distance guide lines and the vehicle width lines should be used as a reference only when the vehicle is on a paved, level surface. The apparent distance viewed on the monitor may be different than the actual distance between the vehicle and displayed objects.
Use the displayed lines and the bird'seye view as a reference. The lines and the bird's-eye view are greatly affected by the number of occupants, cargo, fuel level, vehicle position, road condition and road grade.
If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines and the bird's-eye view may be displayed incorrectly.
When driving the vehicle up a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are further than they appear. When driving the vehicle down a hill, objects viewed in the monitor are closer than they appear.
Objects in the rear view will appear visually opposite compared to when viewed in the monitor and outside mirrors.
Use the mirrors or actually look to properly judge distances to other objects.
On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course lines and the actual course line.
The vehicle width and predicted course lines are wider than the actual width and course.
The displayed lines will appear slightly off to the right, because the rearview camera is not installed in the rear center of the vehicle.
Front view Front and rear view
SAA1840
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate
vehicle width and distance to objects with
reference to the vehicle body line A are
displayed on the monitor.
Distance guide lines:
Indicate distances from the vehicle body:
Red line 1 : approximately 1.5 ft (0.5 m) Yellow line 2 : approximately 3 ft (1 m) Green line 3 : approximately 7 ft (2 m)
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-17
not be displayed while the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead position.
The front view will not be displayed when the vehicle speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
NOTE:
LHA4992
Rear view
Green line 4 : approximately 10 ft (3 m)
(if so equipped)
Vehicle width guide lines 5 :
When the monitor displays the front view and the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or less from the straightahead position, both the right and left
predicted course lines 6 are displayed.
When the steering wheel turns about 90 degrees or more, a line is displayed only on the opposite side of the turn.
Indicate the approximate vehicle width when backing up.
Predicted course lines 6 :
Indicate the predicted course when operating the vehicle. The predicted course lines will be displayed on the monitor when the steering wheel is turned. The predicted course lines will move depending on how much the steering wheel is turned and will
4-18 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Bird's-eye view
LHA4264
The bird's-eye view shows the overhead view of the vehicle, which helps confirm the vehicle position and the predicted course to a parking space.
The vehicle icon 1 shows the position of
the vehicle. Note that the apparent distance between objects viewed in the bird'seye view may differ somewhat from the actual distance to the vehicle.
The areas that the cameras cannot cover
2 are indicated in black.
After the ignition switched is placed in the
ON position, the non-viewable area 2 is
highlighted in yellow for 3 seconds after the birds-eye view is displayed.
In addition, the non-viewable corners 3
are displayed in red and blink for the first 3 seconds to remind the driver to be cautious.
WARNING
Objects in the bird's-eye view will appear further than the actual distance.
Tall objects, such as a curb or vehicle, may be misaligned or not displayed at the seam of the views.
Objects that are above the camera cannot be displayed.
The view of the bird's-eye view may be misaligned when the camera position alters.
A line on the ground may be misaligned and is not seen as being straight at the seam of the views. The misalignment will increase as the line proceeds away from the vehicle.
DIFFERENCE BETWEEN PREDICTED AND ACTUAL DISTANCES
Front-side view
LHA2652
The displayed guidelines and their locations on the ground are for approximate reference only. Objects on uphill or downhill surfaces or projecting objects will be actually located at distances different from those displayed in the monitor relative to the guidelines (refer to illustrations). When in doubt, turn around and view the objects as you are backing up, or park and exit the vehicle to view the positioning of objects behind the vehicle.
Guiding lines
Guiding lines that indicate the approximate width and the front end of the vehicle are displayed on the monitor.
The front-of-vehicle line 1 shows the front
part of the vehicle.
The side-of-vehicle line 2 shows the ap-
proximate vehicle width including the outside mirrors.
The extensions 3 of both the front 1 and side 2 lines are shown with a green dotted
line.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-19
LHA5050
LHA5051
Backing up on a steep uphill
Backing up on a steep downhill
When backing up the vehicle up a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown closer than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is further than it appears on the monitor.
When backing up the vehicle down a hill, the distance guide lines and the vehicle width guide lines are shown farther than the actual distance. Note that any object on the hill is closer than it appears on the monitor.
4-20 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4995
Backing up near a projecting object
The predicted course lines A do not touch
the object in the display. However, the vehicle may hit the object if it projects over the actual backing up course.
object when backing up to the position A
if the object projects over the actual backing up course.
HOW TO PARK WITH PREDICTED COURSE LINES
LHA5052
Backing up behind a projecting object
The position C is shown farther than the position B in the display. However, the position C is actually at the same distance as the position A . The vehicle may hit the
WARNING
If the tires are replaced with different sized tires, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
On a snow-covered or slippery road, there may be a difference between the predicted course line and the actual course line.
If the battery is disconnected or becomes discharged, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly. If this occurs, please perform the following procedures:
Turn the steering wheel from lock to lock while the engine is running.
Drive the vehicle on a straight road for more than 5 minutes.
When the steering wheel is turned with the ignition switch in the ON position, the predicted course lines may be displayed incorrectly.
LHA5043
1. Visually check that the parking space is safe before parking your vehicle.
2. The rear view of the vehicle is displayed
on the screen A when the shift lever is
moved to the R (Reverse) position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-21
LHA4770
3. Slowly back up the vehicle adjusting the steering wheel so that the pre-
dicted course lines B enter the parking space C .
4. Maneuver the steering wheel to make
the vehicle width guide lines D parallel to the parking space C while referring
to the predicted course lines.
5. When the vehicle is parked in the space completely, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and apply the parking brake.
HOW TO SWITCH THE DISPLAY
With the ignition switch in the ON position, press the CAMERA button or move the shift lever to the R (Reverse) position to operate the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The Intelligent Around View Monitor displays different split screen views depending on the position of the shift lever. Press the CAMERA button to switch between the available views.
If the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position, the available views are:
Rear view/bird's-eye view split screen
Rear view/front-side view split screen
If the shift lever is in the P (Park) or D (Drive) position, the available views are:
Front view/bird's-eye view split screen
Front view/front-side view split screen
The display will switch from the Intelligent Around View Monitor screen when:
The shift lever is in the D (Drive) position and the vehicle speed increases above approximately 6 mph (10 km/h).
A different screen is selected.
4-22 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
Do not adjust any of the display settings of the RearView Monitor while the vehicle is moving. Make sure the parking brake is firmly applied.
ADJUSTING THE SCREEN
LHA3522
1. While on the main menu screen, touch the "Settings" key.
2. Use the arrow to tab to the next screen and touch the "Camera" key.
3. Touch the "Display Settings" key.
4. Touch the "Brightness", "Contrast", Tint", "Color", or "Black Level" key.
5. Adjust the item by touching the "+" or "" key on the touch-screen display.
LHA4117
INTELLIGENT AROUND VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-23
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for Intelligent Around View Monitor. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
Do not use the Intelligent Around View Monitor with the outside mirrors in the stored position, and make sure that the liftgate is securely closed when operating the vehicle using the Intelligent Around View Monitor.
The apparent distance between objects viewed on the Intelligent Around View Monitor differs from the actual distance.
The cameras are installed on the front grille, the outside mirrors and above the rear license plate. Do not put anything on the vehicle that covers the cameras.
When washing the vehicle with high pressure water, be sure not to spray it around the cameras. Otherwise, water may enter the camera unit causing water condensation on the lens, a malfunction, fire or an electric shock.
Do not strike the cameras. They are precision instruments. Doing so could cause a malfunction or cause damage resulting in a fire or an electric shock.
There are some areas where the system will not show objects and the system does not warn of moving objects. When in the front or rear view display, an object below the bumper or on the ground may not be
viewed 1 . When in the bird's-eye view, a tall object near the seam 2 of the camera
viewing areas will not appear in the monitor.
The following are operating limitations and do not represent a system malfunction:
There may be a delay when switching between views.
When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly.
When strong light directly shines on the camera, objects may not be displayed clearly.
The screen may flicker under fluorescent light.
The colors of objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may differ somewhat from the actual color of objects.
Objects on the Intelligent Around View Monitor may not be clear and the color of the object may differ in a dark environment.
There may be differences in sharpness between each camera view of the bird's-eye view.
Do not use wax on the camera lens. Wipe off any wax with a clean cloth that has been dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent, then wipe with a dry cloth.
4-24 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA3591
System temporarily unavailable
When the "!" icon is displayed on the screen, there are abnormal conditions in the Intelligent Around View Monitor. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LHA3592
LHA4113
When the "[X]" icon is displayed on the screen, the camera image may be receiving temporary electronic disturbances from surrounding devices. This will not hinder normal driving operation but the system should be inspected if it occurs frequently. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
CAUTION
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
Do not damage the cameras as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras 1 , the Intelligent Around View
Monitor may not display objects clearly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-25
MOVING OBJECT DETECTION (MOD) (if so equipped)
1. CAMERA button
4-26 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4682
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the Moving Object Detection (MOD) system could result in serious injury or death.
The MOD system is not a substitute for proper vehicle operation and is not designed to prevent contact with objects surrounding the vehicle. When maneuvering, always use the outside mirrors and rearview mirror and turn and check the surroundings to ensure it is safe to maneuver.
The system is deactivated at speeds above 5 mph (8 km/h) . It is reactivated at lower speeds.
The MOD system is not designed to detect surrounding stationary objects.
The MOD system can inform the driver of moving objects near the vehicle when backing out of garages, maneuvering in parking lots and in other such instances.
The MOD system detects moving objects by using image processing technology on the image shown in the display.
MOD SYSTEM OPERATION
The MOD system will turn on automatically under the following conditions:
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position.
When the CAMERA button is pressed to activate the camera view on the display.
When vehicle speed decreases below approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) and the camera screen is displayed.
LHA4190
Front and bird's-eye views The MOD system operates in the following conditions when the camera view is displayed:
When the shift lever is in the P (Park) or N (Neutral) position and the vehicle is stopped, the MOD system detects moving objects in the bird's-eye view. The MOD system will not operate if the outside mirrors are moving in or out, in the stowed position, or if either front door is opened.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-27
LHA4191
Rear and bird's-eye views When the shift lever is in the D (Drive)
position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the front view.
When the shift lever is in the R (Reverse) position and the vehicle speed is below approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the MOD system detects moving objects in the rear view. The MOD system will not operate if the liftgate is open.
LHA4997
Rear and front-side views The MOD system does not detect moving objects in the front-side view. The MOD icon is not displayed on the screen when in this view.
When the MOD system detects moving objects near the vehicle, a chime will be heard when in front or rear view and a yellow frame will be displayed on the view where the objects are detected. While the MOD system continues to detect moving objects, the yellow frame continues to be displayed.
4-28 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
In the bird's-eye view, the yellow frame 1 is
displayed on each camera image (front, rear, right, left) depending on where moving objects are detected.
The yellow frame 2 is displayed on each
view in the front view and rear view modes.
A blue MOD icon 3 is displayed in the view
where the MOD system is operative. A gray MOD icon is displayed in the view where the MOD system is not operative.
If the MOD system is turned off, the MOD
icon 3 is not displayed.
TURNING MOD ON AND OFF (if so equipped)
Some vehicles include the option to allow the MOD system to be turned on or off in the vehicle information display.
To turn the MOD system on or off:
1. Using
buttons on the steer-
ing wheel to select "Settings".
2. Select "Driver Assistance" and press the OK button.
3. Select "Parking Aids".
4. Toggle ON or OFF "Moving Object" using the OK button.
MOD SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for MOD. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
Do not use the MOD system when towing a trailer. The system may not function properly.
Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume or open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
The MOD system performance will be limited according to environmental conditions and surrounding objects such as:
When there is low contrast between background and the moving objects.
When there is a blinking source of light.
When strong light such as another vehicle's headlight or sunlight is present.
When camera orientation is not in its usual position, such as when a mirror is folded.
When there is dirt, water drops or snow on the camera lens.
When the position of the moving objects in the display is not changed.
The MOD system might detect flowing water droplets on the camera lens, white smoke from the muffler, moving shadows, etc.
The MOD system may not function properly depending on the speed, direction, distance or shape of the moving objects.
If your vehicle sustains damage to the parts where the camera is installed, leaving it misaligned or bent, the sensing zone may be altered and the MOD system may not detect objects properly.
When the temperature is extremely high or low, the screen may not display objects clearly. This is not a malfunction.
NOTE:
The blue MOD icon will change to orange if one of the following has occurred
When the system is malfunctioning.
When the component temperature reaches a high level (icon will blink).
When the RearView camera has detected a blockage (icon will blink).
If the icon light continues to illuminate orange, have the MOD system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-29
VENTS
If dirt, rain or snow accumulates on any of
the cameras 1 , the MOD system may not
operate properly. Clean the camera by wiping with a cloth dampened with a diluted mild cleaning agent and then wiping with a dry cloth.
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
LHA4113
CAUTION
Do not use alcohol, benzine or thinner to clean the camera. This will cause discoloration.
Do not damage the camera as the monitor screen may be adversely affected.
4-30 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4123
Side vents Adjust air flow direction of side vents by opening, closing, or rotating.
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (manual) (if so equipped)
LHA4124
Center vents Adjust air flow direction of center vent by moving the vent slides.
WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
NOTE:
Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-31
1. Air flow control dial
2. A/C (air conditioner) button
3.
Fan control dial
4.
Air recirculation button
5. Temperature control dial
CONTROLS
Fan control dial
The
fan control dial turns the fan on
and off, and controls fan speed.
Air flow control dial
The air flow control dial allows you to select the air flow outlets.
-- Air flows from center and side
vents. -- Air flows from center and side
vents and foot outlets. -- Air flows mainly from the foot
outlets. -- Air flows from defroster outlets
and the foot outlets. -- Air flows mainly from defroster
outlets.
Temperature control dial
LHA4202
6.
Fresh air intake button
7.
Rear window defroster
switch
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
4-32 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Fresh air intake
Press the
fresh air intake button to
draw outside air into the passenger com-
partment.
Air recirculation
Press the
air recirculation button to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
The air recirculation cannot be activated
when the air conditioner is in the front defrosting mode.
A/C (air conditioner) button
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position and press
the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Rear window defroster switch
For additional information, refer to "Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped)" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
HEATER OPERATION Heating
This mode is used to direct heated air to the foot outlets. Some air also flows from the defrost outlets.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Defrosting or defogging
This mode directs the air to the defrost outlets to defrost/defog the windows.
1. Press the
button for normal heat-
ing. The indicator light on the
but-
ton will go off.
2. Turn the airflow control dial to
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.
Ventilation
This mode directs outside air to the side and center vents.
1. Press the light on the
button. The indicator button will go off.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.
To quickly remove ice or fog from the
windows, turn the
fan control dial
to the right and the temperature con-
trol to the full HOT position.
Bi-level heating
The bi-level mode directs warmed air to the side and center vents and to the foot outlets.
1. Press the light on the
button. The indicator button will go off.
2. Turn the airflow control dial to
the
position.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-33
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Heating and defogging
This mode heats the interior and defogs the windshield.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to the position.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the de-
sired position.
3. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position between the middle and the hot position.
If in the
mode for more than
1 minute, the air conditioning system
will continue to operate until the vehicle
is shut off. This dehumidifies the air
which helps defog the windshield.
The
mode automatically turns off,
allowing outside air to be drawn into the
passenger compartment to further im-
prove the defogging performance.
Operating tips
Clear snow and ice from the wiper blades and air inlet in front of the windshield. This improves heater operation.
AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position, and press
the
button to activate the air condi-
tioner. When the air conditioner is on, cool-
ing and dehumidifying functions are added to the heater operation.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Cooling
This mode is used to cool and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the
button.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the de-
sired position.
4. Press the
button.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
For quick cooling when the outside
temperature is high, press the
button. The indicator light on the
button will come on. Press the button for normal cooling. The indicator
light on the
button will go off.
Dehumidified heating
This mode is used to heat and dehumidify the air.
1. Press the light on the
button. The indicator button will go off.
2. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
3. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
4. Press the
button on.
5. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
4-34 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Dehumidified defogging
This mode is used to defog the windows and dehumidify the air.
1. Turn the air flow control dial to
the
position.
2. Turn the
fan control dial to the
desired position.
3. Press the
button. The indicator
light comes on.
When the
,
or positions in be-
tween are selected, the air conditioner automatically turns on. The air conditioning
system will continue to operate until the fan control dial is turned to OFF or the ve-
hicle is shut off, even if the air flow control dial is turned to a position other than
the
position. This dehumidifies the
air which helps defog the windshield.
The
mode automatically turns off, al-
lowing outside air to be drawn into the pas-
senger compartment to further improve
the defogging performance.
4. Turn the temperature control dial to the desired position.
Operating tips
Keep the windows closed while the air conditioner is in operation.
After parking in the sun, drive for two or three minutes with the windows open to vent hot air from the passenger compartment. Then, close the windows. This allows the air conditioner to cool the interior more quickly.
The air conditioning system should be operated for approximately ten minutes at least once a month. This helps prevent damage to the system due to lack of lubrication.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the ventilators in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
If the high temperature warning light illuminates in red indicating engine coolant temperature is over the normal range, turn the air conditioner off. For additional information, refer to "If your vehicle overheats" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
AIR FLOW CHARTS
The following charts show the button and
dial positions for MAXIMUM AND QUICK
heating, cooling or defrosting. The
air
recirculation button should always be in
the OFF position for heating and defrost-
ing.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-35
LHA4674
4-36 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4675
LHA4676
LHA4677
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-37
LHA4678
4-38 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER (automatic) (if so equipped)
1. Temperature control dial /AUTO
button
2. Display screen
3.
Fan control dial/A/C button
4.
Air recirculation button
8. ON-OFF button
WARNING
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
Do not use the recirculation mode for long periods as it may cause the interior air to become stale and the windows to fog up.
LHA4105
5.
Rear window and outside mir-
ror (if so equipped) defroster
switch
6. MODE (manual air flow control)
button
7.
Front defroster button
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-39
NOTE:
Odors from inside and outside the vehicle can build up in the air conditioner unit. Odor can enter the passenger compartment through the vents.
When parking, set the heater and air conditioner controls to turn off air recirculation to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. This should help reduce odors inside the vehicle.
AUTOMATIC OPERATION
Heating (A/C OFF)
The air conditioner does not activate. When you need to heat only, use this mode.
Cooling and/or dehumidified heating (AUTO)
This mode may be used all year round as the system automatically works to keep a constant temperature. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button on.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to the left or right to set the desired temperature.
The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
1. Press the AUTO button.
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the desired temperature.
The temperature of the passenger compartment will be maintained automatically. Air flow distribution and fan speed are also controlled automatically.
Do not set the temperature lower than the outside air temperature. Otherwise, the system may not work properly.
Not recommended if windows fog up.
A visible mist may be seen coming from the vents in hot, humid conditions as the air is cooled rapidly. This does not indicate a malfunction.
Dehumidified defrosting or defogging
1. Press the on.
front defroster button
2. Turn the temperature control dial to set the maximum temperature to aid in defogging.
4-40 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
To quickly remove ice from the outside
of the windows, use the
fan speed
control dial to set the fan speed to
maximum.
As soon as possible after the windshield is clean, press the AUTO button to return to the automatic mode.
When the
front defroster button is
pressed, the air conditioner will auto-
matically be turned on.
Remote Engine Start with Intelligent Climate Control (if so equipped)
Vehicles equipped with automatic climate controls and Remote Engine Start function may go into automatic heating or cooling mode when Remote Engine Start is activated depending on outside and cabin temperatures. During this period, the climate control display and buttons will be inoperable until the ignition switch is turned on. In Remote Engine Start defrosting mode, the rear window defroster may be activated automatically.
MANUAL OPERATION Fan speed control
Turn the
fan speed control dial to
manually control the fan speed.
Press the AUTO button to return to auto-
matic control of the fan speed.
Temperature control dial
The temperature control dial allows you to adjust the temperature of the outlet air. To lower the temperature, turn the dial to the left. To increase the temperature, turn the dial to the right.
Air recirculation
Press the
air recirculation button to
recirculate interior air inside the vehicle.
A/C (air conditioner) button
Start the engine, turn the
fan control
dial to the desired position and press
the
button to turn on the air condi-
tioner. To turn off the air conditioner, press
the
button again.
The air conditioner cooling function operates only when the engine is running.
Air flow control
Press the MODE button to manually control air flow and select the air outlet.
-- Air flows from center and side vents.
-- Air flows from center and side vents and foot outlets.
-- Air flows mainly from foot outlets.
-- Air flows from defroster and foot outlets.
To turn system off
To turn off the heater and air conditioner, press the ON-OFF button. Press the ONOFF button again, the system will turn on in the mode which was used immediately before the system was turned off.
Rear window and outside mirror (if so equipped) defroster switch
OPERATING TIPS
LHA4125
The sunload sensor, located on the driver's side of the instrument panel, as shown, helps the system maintain a constant temperature. Do not put anything on or around this sensor.
For additional information, refer to "Rear window and/or outside mirror defroster switch (if so equipped)" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
When the engine coolant temperature and outside air temperature are low, the air flow from the foot outlets may not operate for a maximum of 150 seconds. However, this is not a malfunction. After the coolant temperature warms up, air flow from the foot outlets will operate normally.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-41
SERVICING AIR CONDITIONER
AUDIO SYSTEM
If you feel that the air flow mode you have selected and the outlets the air is coming out do not match, select
the
mode.
When you change the air flow mode, you may feel air flow from the feet vents for just a moment. This is not a malfunction.
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle is charged with a refrigerant designed with the environment in mind. This refrigerant does not harm the earth's ozone layer.
Special charging equipment and lubricant is required when servicing your NISSAN air conditioner. Using improper refrigerants or lubricants will cause severe damage to your air conditioner system. For additional information, refer to "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to service your "environmentally friendly" air conditioner system.
WARNING
The air conditioner system contains refrigerant under high pressure. To avoid personal injury, any air conditioner service should be done only by an experienced technician with proper equipment.
4-42 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
RADIO
When the ignition is placed in the ACC or ON
position, press the PUSH
(power) but-
ton to turn the radio on. If you listen to the radio with the engine not running, the ignition should be placed in the ACC position.
Radio reception is affected by station signal strength, distance from radio transmitter, buildings, bridges, mountains and other external influences. Intermittent changes in reception quality normally are caused by these external influences.
Using a cellular phone in or near the vehicle may influence radio reception quality.
Radio reception
Your NISSAN radio system is equipped with state-of-the-art electronic circuits to enhance radio reception. These circuits are designed to extend reception range, and to enhance the quality of that reception.
However, there are some general characteristics of both FM and AM radio signals that can affect radio reception quality in a moving vehicle, even when the finest equipment is used. These characteristics are completely normal in a given reception area and do not indicate any malfunction in your NISSAN radio system.
Reception conditions will constantly change because of vehicle movement. Buildings, terrain, signal distance and interference from other vehicles can work against ideal reception. Described below are some of the factors that can affect your radio reception.
Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
FM RADIO RECEPTION
Range: FM range is normally limited to 25 30 mi (40 48 km), with monaural (single channel) FM having slightly more range than stereo FM. External influences may sometimes interfere with FM station reception even if the FM station is within 25 mi (40 km). The strength of the FM signal is directly related to the distance between the transmitter and receiver. FM signals follow a line-of-sight path, exhibiting many of the same characteristics as light. For example, they will reflect off objects.
Fade and drift: As your vehicle moves away from a station transmitter, the signals will tend to fade and/or drift.
Static and flutter: During signal interference from buildings, large hills or due to antenna position (usually in conjunction with increased distance from the station transmitter), static or flutter can be heard. This can be reduced by adjusting the treble control to reduce treble response.
Multipath reception: Because of the reflective characteristics of FM signals, direct and reflected signals reach the receiver at the same time. The signals may cancel each other, resulting in momentary flutter or loss of sound.
AM RADIO RECEPTION
AM signals, because of their low frequency, can bend around objects and skip along the ground. In addition, the signals can be bounced off the ionosphere and bent back to earth. Because of these characteristics, AM signals are also subject to interference as they travel from transmitter to receiver.
Fading: Occurs while the vehicle is passing through freeway underpasses or in areas with many tall buildings. It can also occur for several seconds during ionospheric turbulence even in areas where no obstacles exist.
Static: Caused by thunderstorms, electrical power lines, electric signs and even traffic lights.
AUDIO OPERATION PRECAUTIONS
MP3 or WMA terms
MP3 -- MP3 is short for Moving Pictures Experts Group Audio Layer 3. MP3 is the most well-known compressed digital audio file format. This format allows for near "CD quality" sound, but at a fraction of the size of normal audio files. MP3 conversion of an audio track from CDROM can reduce the file size by approximately a 10:1 ratio with virtually no perceptible loss in quality. MP3 compression removes the redundant and irrelevant parts of a sound signal that the human ear doesn't hear.
WMA -- Windows Media Audio (WMA)* is a compressed audio format created by Microsoft as an alternative to MP3. The WMA codec offers greater file compression than the MP3 codec, enabling storage of more digital audio tracks in the same amount of space when compared to MP3s at the same level of quality.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-43
Bit rate -- Bit rate denotes the number of bits per second used by a digital music file. The size and quality of a compressed digital audio file is determined by the bit rate used when encoding the file.
Sampling frequency -- Sampling frequency is the rate at which the samples of a signal are converted from analog to digital (A/D conversion) per second.
Multisession -- Multisession is one of the methods for writing data to media. Writing data once to the media is called a single session, and writing more than once is called a multisession.
ID3/WMA Tag -- The ID3/WMA tag is the part of the encoded MP3 or WMA file that contains information about the digital music file such as song title, artist, encoding bit rate, track time duration, etc. ID3 tag information is displayed on the Artist/song title line on the display.
* Windows® and Windows Media® are registered trademarks and trademarks in the United States of America and other countries of Microsoft Corporation of the USA.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
The vehicle is not equipped with a USB device. USB devices should be purchased separately as necessary.
4-44 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
This system cannot be used to format USB devices. To format a USB device, use a personal computer.
In some jurisdictions, the USB device for the front seats plays only sound without images for regulatory reasons, even when the vehicle is parked.
This system supports various USB memory devices, USB hard drives and iPod® players. Some USB devices may not be supported by this system.
Partitioned USB devices may not play correctly.
Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) may not appear properly in the display. Using English language characters with a USB device is recommended.
General notes for USB use
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
Notes for iPod® use
iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly.
An iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod®.
An iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast-forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using an iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on an iPod®.
Large video files cause slow responses in an iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
If an iPod® automatically selects large video files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but will soon recover.
iPod®* player
Some characters used in other languages (Chinese, Japanese, etc.) are not displayed properly on the vehicle center screen. We recommend using English or Spanish language characters with an iPod®.
Audiobooks may not play in the same order as they appear on the iPod®.
The iPod® nano (1st Generation) may remain in fast forward or rewind mode if it is connected during a seek operation. In this case, please manually reset the iPod®.
Large video podcast files cause slow responses in the iPod®. The vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.
If the iPod® automatically selects large video podcast files while in the shuffle mode, the vehicle center display may momentarily black out, but it will soon recover.
Improperly plugging in the iPod® may cause a checkmark to be displayed on and off (flickering). Always make sure that the iPod® is connected properly.
The iPod® nano (2nd Generation) will continue to fast forward or rewind if it is disconnected during a seek operation.
An incorrect song title may appear when the Play Mode is changed while using the iPod® nano (2nd Generation).
If you are using an iPod® (3rd Generation with Dock connector), do not use very long names for the song title, album name or artist name to prevent the iPod® from resetting itself.
Be careful not to do the following, or the cable could be damaged and a loss of function may occur:
Bend the cable excessively (1.6 in (40 mm) radius maximum).
Twist the cable excessively (more than 180 degrees).
Pull or drop the cable.
Do not force the iPod® cable connector into the device port.
Close the center console lid on the cable or connectors.
Store objects with sharp edges in the storage where the cable is stored.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-45
Spill liquids on the cable and connectors.
Do not connect the cable to the iPod® if the cable and/or connectors are wet. It may damage the iPod®.
Do not use the cable for any other purposes other than its intended use in the vehicle.
*iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
If the cable and connectors are exposed to water, allow the cable and/or connectors to dry completely before connecting the cable to the iPod® (wait 24 hours for it to dry).
If the connector is exposed to fluids other than water, evaporative residue may cause a short between the connector pins. In this case, replace the cable, otherwise damage to the iPod® and a loss of function may occur.
If the cable is damaged (insulation cut, connectors cracked, contamination such as liquids, dust, dirt, etc. in the connectors), do not use the cable. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to replace the cable with a new one.
When not in use for extended periods of time, store the cable in a clean, dust free environment at room temperature and without direct sun exposure.
Bluetooth® streaming audio
Some Bluetooth® audio devices may not be recognized by the in-vehicle audio system.
It is necessary to set up the wireless connection between a compatible Bluetooth® audio device and the invehicle Bluetooth® module before using the Bluetooth® audio.
Operating procedure of the Bluetooth® audio will vary depending on the devices. Make sure how to operate your audio device before using it with this system.
The Bluetooth® audio may be stopped under the following conditions:
Receiving a call on the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Checking the connection to the hands-free phone.
4-46 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Do not place the Bluetooth® audio device in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle Bluetooth® module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
While an audio device is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the device may discharge quicker than usual.
This system supports the Bluetooth® Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP, AVRCP).
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Panasonic.
FM/AM RADIO
For additional information, refer to "Audio operation precautions" in this section.
1.
MENU button
2. Display screen
7. VOL (volume) knob/PUSH button
(power)
8. AUDIO button
Audio main operation
VOL (volume) knob / PUSH (power)
button
Place the ignition switch in the ACC or ON
position and press the PUSH
(power)
button while the system is off to call up the
mode (radio, AUX, Bluetooth® audio, USB or
iPod®) that was playing immediately before
the system was turned off.
To turn the system off, press the
PUSH
(power) button.
Turn the VOL (volume) control knob to adjust the volume.
LHA4704
This vehicle may be equipped with Speed Sensitive Volume. When this feature is active, the audio volume changes as the driving speed changes.
3.
SEEK button
MENU button
4.
TRACK button
5.
BACK button
6. PUSH SOUND button / TUNE· SCROLL knob
Press the
MENU button to show the
Menu screen. Touch the "Settings" key on
the display, then touch the "Sound" key.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-47
Sound
Bass Treble Balance
Fade
Speed Sensitive Volume
Adjusts the bass to the desired level. Adjusts the treble to the desired level. Adjusts the balance to the desired level. Balance adjusts the sound level between the left and right speakers. Adjusts the fade to the desired level. Fade adjusts the sound level between the front and rear speakers. Adjusts the speed sensitive volume function, which increases the volume of the audio system as the speed of the vehicle increases. Set to "OFF" to disable the feature. The higher the setting, the more the volume increases in relation to vehicle speed.
Bass, treble, balance, fade and Speed Sensitive Volume can be adjusted by touching "-"/"+", "L"/"R", or "R"/"F" keys.
4-48 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
BACK button
Press the
BACK button to return to
the previous menu screen.
AUDIO button
Press to display the audio screen. When this button is pressed while the audio screen is not displayed, the last audio source played will play.
5. Preset list To listen to a preset station, touch the corresponding station from the preset list. If displayed, touch the "<" or ">" keys to scroll the preset list.
AM radio operation
AM/FM radio screen
LHA4708
1. "AM Menu" / "FM Menu" key Touch to display the radio menu screen.
Press the
MENU button and touch the
"AM" key or press the AUDIO button and
select AM on the bottom of the Launch Bar
to bring up the AM display screen.
If another audio source is playing when the
"AM" key is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will begin playing.
AM Menu
Touch the "AM Menu" key to display the AM Menu screen options:
2. "Direct Tune" (if so equipped) Touch to manually enter a station.
3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.
4. Reception information display Reception information currently available such as frequency, station name, etc. is displayed.
SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the "AM Menu" key on the radio screen and then touch the "SCAN" key. The stations will be turned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting station for several seconds. Touching the "SCAN" key again during this period of several seconds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-49
Refresh: Touch the "Refresh" key to update the station list displayed on the right side of the AM Menu screen.
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
Press the
or
buttons to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting sta-
tion.
Direct Tune
Touch the "Direct Tune" key to display the Direct Tune menu and manually enter a station.
1 to 6 station memory operations
Up to six stations can be registered in the preset list.
1. Select the AM radio band.
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.
The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list.
To select and listen to the preset stations,
press
or
on the steering wheel
briefly or touch a preferred station on the
preset list on the radio screen.
FM radio operation
Press the
MENU button and touch the
"FM" key or press the AUDIO button and
select FM on the bottom of the Launch Bar
to bring up the FM display screen.
If another audio source is playing when the
"FM" key is pressed, the audio source play-
ing will automatically be turned off and the
last radio station played will begin playing.
The FM stereo indicator (STEREO) is shown on the screen during FM stereo reception. When the stereo broadcast signal is weak, the radio automatically changes from stereo to monaural reception.
4-50 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
FM Menu
Touch the "FM Menu" key to display the FM Menu screen options:
SCAN: To scan the stations, touch the "FM Menu" key on the radio screen and then touch the "SCAN" key. The stations will be tuned from low to high frequencies and stop at each broadcasting stations for several seconds. Touching the "SCAN" key again during this period of several seconds will stop tuning and the radio will remain tuned to that station.
Refresh: Touch the "Refresh" key to update the station list displayed on the right side of the FM Menu screen.
RDS Info: Radio station and song information can be displayed on the FM display screen.
(SEEK/TRACK) buttons
Press the
or
buttons to tune
from low to high or high to low frequencies
and to stop at the next broadcasting sta-
tion.
1 to 12 station memory operations
Up to 12 stations can be registered in the preset list.
1. Select the FM radio band.
2. Tune to the station you wish to store.
3. Touch and hold one of the preset numbers in the preset list.
The information such as frequency will be displayed on the preset list.
To select and listen to the preset stations,
press
or
on the steering wheel
briefly or touch a preferred station on the
preset list on the radio screen.
Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation
Connecting auxiliary devices
Connect an AUX device into the AUX input jack located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls.
The AUX input jack accepts any standard analog audio input such as from a portable cassette player, CD player, MP3 player or phone.
Insert a 1/8 in (3.5 mm) stereo mini plug in the audio input jack. If a cable with a mono plug is used, the audio output may not function normally.
Activation and playing
Turn on the AUX device. Connect an AUX cable to the AUX device and the AUX input jack. Select AUX mode from the audio source menu screen or by pressing the Source button on the steering wheel.
AUX screen
LHA4709
Audio source indicator Indicates that the AUX source is currently playing.
"Volume Setting" keys Touch one of the keys to select the sound output gain from Low, Medium and High.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-51
AUX from Launch Bar Touch to change from another source to AUX.
Additional features
For additional information, refer to "iPod® player operation" regarding the iPod® player available with this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to "USB (Universal Serial Bus) connection port" regarding the USB connection port available with this system in this section.
For additional information, refer to "Bluetooth® streaming audio" about the Bluetooth® audio interface available with this system in this section.
Microsoft (WMA) Obligation of Labeling
Additional Obligation of Labeling
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft Corporation and third parties. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft or an authorized Microsoft subsidiary and third parties.
USB (Universal Serial Bus) CONNECTION PORT
LHA4701
Connecting a device to the USB connection port
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
CAUTION
To avoid damage and loss of function when using a USB device, note the following precautions.
Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
The USB port is located on the center console beneath the heater and air conditioner controls. Insert the USB device into the connection port.
4-52 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
When a compatible storage device is plugged into the connection port, compatible audio files on the storage device can be played through the vehicle's audio system. The port is illuminated for better visibility when the headlight switch is in the ON position.
USB connections screen
LHA4711
Press the
MENU button and touch the
"Connections" key or press the "Settings"
key and touch the "Connections" key to
change USB settings.
Auto Change Source Touch ON or OFF to change the audio source settings for USB memory devices or an iPod® connected through a USB cable.
USB screen
LHA4710
1. "USB Menu" key Touch to switch to the USB Menu screen.
2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-53
4. USB operation keys Touch to control USB playback functions
5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
USB operation keys
Touch to control USB playback functions.
Keys
Description
Each time "
" key is touched,
the repeat mode changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of
the current track. Touch again to
select the previous track. Touch and
hold to rewind the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.
Each time "
" key is touched,
the random mode changes.
USB memory device player operation
Activation and playing Connecting the USB memory device into the port will start playing the USB memory.
USB memory device can also be played by touching the "USB" key on the Menu screen or by touching USB on the Launch Bar.
To pause playing the USB memory device touch the " " key. To resume playing, touch the " " key.
Skipping tracks
To skip the tracks, press the
or
buttons on the control panel or touch the
" " or " " keys on the screen repeatedly until the preferred track is selected.
NOTE:
Depending on the condition, skipping to the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice. Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To rewind or fast-forward the track, press
and hold the
or
buttons on the
control panel or touch and hold the " "
or " " keys on the screen.
Changing play mode Repeat mode
Touch the "
" key on the USB screen to
change the repeat mode.
The following modes are available:
All: Repeat all
1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder
1 Track: Repeat track
Random mode
Touch the "
" key on the screen to
change the random mode as follows:
No text displayed: Random off
All: Repeat all
1 Folder: Repeat folder/sub-folder
4-54 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
USB menu
Touch the "USB Menu" key on the USB screen to display the USB Menu screen.
"Now Playing" key "Folder List" key
"Album Artwork"
Touch to display the USB screen. Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder. The subfolder or track list will be displayed. Select a sub-folder or track from the list. Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB screen.
CAUTION
Do not force the USB device into the USB port. Inserting the USB device tilted or up-side-down into the port may damage the port. Make sure that the USB device is connected correctly into the USB port.
Do not grab the USB port cover (if so equipped) when pulling the USB device out of the port. This could damage the port and the cover.
LHA4701
iPod®* PLAYER OPERATION
Do not leave the USB cable in a place where it can be pulled unintentionally. Pulling the cable may damage the port.
Connecting iPod®
WARNING
Do not connect, disconnect, or operate the USB device while driving. Doing so can be a distraction. If distracted you could lose control of your vehicle and cause an accident or serious injury.
For additional information, refer to your device manufacturer's owner information regarding the proper use and care of the device.
To connect an iPod® to the vehicle so that the iPod® can be controlled with the audio system controls and display screen, use the USB connection port located on the center console below the heater and air conditioner controls. Connect the iPod®specific end of the cable to the iPod® and the USB end of the cable to the USB connection port on the vehicle. If your iPod®
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-55
supports charging via a USB connection, its battery will be charged while connected to the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON position. The port is illuminated for better visibility when the headlight switch is in the ON position.
While connected to the vehicle, the iPod® can only be operated by the vehicle audio controls.
To disconnect the iPod® from the vehicle, remove the USB end of the cable from the USB connection port on the vehicle, then remove the cable from the iPod®.
* iPod® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries.
Compatibility
The following models are compatible:
iPod® Classic 5th generation (firmware version 1.3.0 or later)
iPod® Classic 6th generation (firmware version 2.0.1 or later)
iPod® Classic 7th generation (firmware version 2.0.4 or later)
iPod® Touch 2nd generation (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)*
iPod® Touch 3rd generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)
iPod® Touch 4th generation (firmware version 5.1 or later)
iPod® nano - 1st generation (firmware version 1.3.1 or later)
iPod® nano - 2nd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
iPod® nano - 3rd generation (firmware version 1.1.3 or later)
iPod® nano - 4th generation (firmware version 1.0.4 or later)
iPod® nano - 5th generation (firmware version 1.0.2 or later)
iPod® nano - 6th generation (firmware version 1.1 or later)
iPhone® 3G (firmware version 4.2.1 or later)
iPhone® 3GS (firmware version 5.1 or later)
iPhone® 4 (firmware version 5.1 or later)
iPhone® 4S (firmware version 5.1 or later)
* Some features of this iPod® may not be fully functional.
Make sure that your iPod® firmware is updated to the version indicated above.
4-56 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
iPod screen
LHA4724
1. "iPod Menu" key Touch to switch to the iPod Menu screen.
2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.
4. Album artwork An image of the album artwork is displayed when available if the setting is turned on.
5. iPod® operation keys Touch to control iPod® playback functions
6. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
iPod® operation keys
Touch to control iPod® playback functions.
Keys
Description
Each time "
" key is touched,
the repeat mode changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of
the current track. Touch again to
select the previous track. Touch and
hold to rewind the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.
Each time "
" key is touched,
the random mode changes.
iPod® memory device player operation
Activation and playing Connecting the iPod® to the vehicle via USB cable will activate the iPod® mode.
The iPod® can also be played by touching the "iPod" key on the Menu screen or by touching iPod on the Launch Bar.
Skipping tracks
To skip the tracks, press the
or
buttons on the control panel or touch the
" " or " " keys on the screen repeatedly until the preferred track is selected.
NOTE:
Depending on the condition, skipping to the previous track may require pressing the button or touching the key twice. Pressing the button or touching the key once may only restart the current track from the beginning.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding To rewind or fast-forward the track, press
and hold the
or
buttons on the
control panel or touch and hold the " "
or " " keys on the screen,
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-57
Changing play mode Repeat mode
Touch the "
" key on the iPod® screen
to change the repeat mode. The following
modes are available.
No text displayed: Repeat off
All: Repeat all
One: Repeat track
Random mode
Touch the "
" key on the screen to
change the random mode as follows.
"
" is not highlighted: Random off
"
" highlighted: Random on
iPod® Menu
Touch the "iPod Menu" key on the iPod® screen to display the iPod® Menu screen.
"Now Playing" key
"Folder List" key (if so equipped)
"Album Artwork" key
"Playlists" key "Artists" key "Albums" key "Songs" key "Podcasts" key "Genres" key "Composers" key "Audiobooks" key "iTunes Radio" key
Touch to display the USB screen. Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder. The subfolder or track list will be displayed. Select a sub-folder or track from the list. Touch to run on/off the album artwork display on the USB screen. Touch to display the list according to the selected item.
BLUETOOTH® STREAMING AUDIO
If you have a compatible Bluetooth® audio device that is capable of playing audio files, the device can be connected to the vehicle's audio system so that the audio files on the device play through the vehicle's speakers. For additional information, refer to "FM/AM radio" in this section.
NOTE:
For additional information regarding Bluetooth® Streaming Audio, refer to the cellular phone owner's manual.
4-58 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
Menu Item Bluetooth
ON Favorite (Connection first) PIN
Connecting procedure
LHA4726
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System:
Manual Connecting Procedure
1. Press the
MENU button on the
control panel.
2. Touch the "Connections" key on the screen.
3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the "Add New" key to connect a phone.
4. When a compatible phone is found a message with a PIN appears on the screen.
5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the connection.
6. To access the Bluetooth® settings menu touch the " " key on the Connections screen. The following options are available:
Result Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the "ON" key again. The indicator light will go off. Allows user to toggle "Phone" and "Audio" favorite settings on and off. Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-59
Automatic Connecting Procedure
If no phone is connected to the system,
press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.
After the prompt, speak "Add Phone", the
system will announce "transferring to the
add phone settings menu". The system will
start the pairing procedure. When a com-
patible phone is found, a message with a
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the con-
nection process. For additional informa-
tion, refer to "Bluetooth® connections screen" in this section.
Bluetooth® screen
LHA4727
1. "BT Menu" key Depending on the Bluetooth® version supported by the connected device, either the "BT Menu" key or "Connections" key is displayed.
2. Track information Track information such as the song name, artist name and album name are displayed.
3. Audio source indicator Indicates the currently selected audio source.
4-60 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
4. Bluetooth® audio operation keys Touch to control Bluetooth® audio playback functions
5. Play time and progress bar The play time of the track is displayed. The bar indicates the progress in playing a track.
Bluetooth® operation keys
Touch to control Bluetooth® playback functions.
Keys
Description
Each time "
" key is touched,
the repeat mode changes.
Touch to return to the beginning of
the current track. Touch again to
select the previous track. Touch and
hold to rewind the current track.
Touch to play the track.
Touch to pause the track.
Touch to select the next track. Touch and hold to fast-forward the track.
Each time "
" key is touched,
the random mode changes.
Bluetooth® audio operation
The ability to pause, change tracks, fast forward, rewind, randomize and repeat music may be different between devices. Some or all of these functions may not be supported on each device.
NOTE:
Depending on the Bluetooth® audio device that is connected, it may not be possible to perform audio operations or a delay may occur before music is played back.
Activation and playing
A Bluetooth® audio device can be played by touching the "Bluetooth" key on the Menu screen or by touching Bluetooth on the Launch Bar.
To pause playing the Bluetooth® audio,
touch the " " key. Touch the " to resume playing.
" key
Changing folders To change folders, touch the "BT Menu" key.
Fast-forwarding/rewinding
To fast-forward or rewind the track, press
and hold the
or
buttons on the
control panel or touch the " " or " " keys on the screen.
Changing play mode Repeat mode
Touch the "
" key on the screen to
change the repeat mode.
Random mode
Touch the "
" key on the screen to
change the random mode.
NOTE:
Available repeat/random modes change depending on the connected device.
BT Menu
Touch the "BT Menu" key on the Bluetooth® audio screen to display the Bluetooth® audio menu screen.
The following items are available.
"Now Playing" key "Current List" key (if so equipped)* "Connections" key "Folder List" key*
Touch to display the Bluetooth® audio screen. A list of track in the currently selected folder is displayed. Touch to display the connections screen. Touch to display the folder list. Touch an item on the list to select the folder.
*: displayed only when available.
NOTE:
Depending on the connected device, the "BT Menu" key may not be displayed.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-61
LHA4227
STEERING WHEEL SWITCH FOR AUDIO CONTROL
1.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
2. SOURCE switch
3. Volume control switch
SOURCE switch
Push the SOURCE switch to change the mode in the following sequence:
AM FM USB/iPod®* Bluetooth® Audio* AUX* AM.
* These modes are only available when compatible media storage is inserted into the device or connected to the system.
Volume control switch
Push the volume control switch to increase or decrease the volume.
SEEK/TRACK buttons
AM and FM
Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the preset station and show a list of the preset stations.
Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to seek up or down to the next station.
iPod®
Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.
Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
Bluetooth® Streaming Audio
Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to skip ahead or back to the next song.
USB
Press or hold for less than 1.5 seconds to increase or decrease the track number.
Press or hold for more than 1.5 seconds to reverse or fast forward the track being played.
4-62 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4725
USB/iPod® CHARGING PORTS
There are USB/iPod® charging ports located on the center console. These ports will charge compatible devices.
NOTE:
The USB/iPod® charging ports will not operate with the display screen. Only the USB connection port located on the instrument panel, below the temperature controls, will operate USB/iPod® devices through the audio system.
ANTENNA
LHA4236
The rod antenna cannot be shortened, but can be removed. When you need to remove the antenna, turn the antenna rod counter-
clockwise B .
To install the antenna rod, turn the antenna
rod clockwise A and hand tighten.
CAUTION
To avoid damaging or deforming the antenna, be sure to remove the antenna under the following conditions.
The vehicle enters an automatic car wash.
The vehicle enters a garage with a low ceiling.
The vehicle is covered with a car cover.
Always properly tighten the antenna rod during installation or the antenna rod may break during vehicle operation.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-63
SIRI® EYES FREE (if so equipped)
Apple Siri® Eyes Free personal assistant
can be accessed from the vehicle. Siri Eyes
Free can be accessed in Siri Eyes Free
mode to reduce user distraction. In this
mode, Siri Eyes Free is available for interac-
tion by voice control. After connecting a
compatible Apple device by using
Bluetooth®, Siri Eyes Free can be activated
from the
button on the steering
wheel.
Siri® is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
in the U.S. and other countries.
Some Siri Eyes Free functions, such as displaying pictures or opening apps, may not be available while driving.
For getting best results, always update your device to the latest software version.
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Close the windows to eliminate the surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing the voice commands correctly.
For functions that can be used in Siri Eyes Free, please refer to the Apple website.
REQUIREMENTS
Siri® is only available on the iPhone® 4S or later. Devices released before iPhone® 4S are not supported by the Siri® Eyes Free system. Visit www.apple.com/ios/siri for details about device compatibility.
Siri must be enabled on the phone. Please check phone settings.
If the device has a lock screen, Siri must be accessible from the lock screen. Please check phone settings.
For best results, always update your device to the latest software version.
LHA4733
OPERATING SIRI® EYES FREE
1. Press onds.
button for less than 1.5 sec-
2. Speak your command and then listen to the Siri® Eyes Free reply.
After starting Siri Eyes Free, press the button again within 5 seconds of the end of the Siri Eyes Free announcement to extend the session. Example 1 Playing music
1. Press onds.
button for less than 1.5 sec-
4-64 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
2. Say "Play (artist name, song name, etc.)".
3. Your vehicle will automatically change to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode* when the music starts playing. Mode selection is determined by the phone.
* If the iPhone® is also connected with the USB cable.
If the audio track does not start playing automatically after Siri Eyes Free ends, try changing the track or audio source to resume playback.
NOTE:
For best results, use the native music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the iPhone®.
Example 2 Replying to text messages
1. If a compatible iPhone® is connected and "Show Notifications" of the iPhone® settings is enabled, the vehicle will display a notification for new incoming text messages.
2. After reading the message, press or
press and hold the
button to re-
ply using Siri Eyes Free.
3. After a beep sounds, say "Text message" or a similar command to reply using Siri Eyes Free.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-65
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Symptom Cannot access Siri Eyes Free from switch on the steering wheel
Audio Source does not change automatically to iPod® or Bluetooth® Audio mode
Play, pause, next track, previous track or play timer does not work Cannot hear any music/ audio being played back from a connected iPhone® Cannot receive text message notifications on the vehicle audio system Cannot reply to text message notifications by Siri Eyes Free
Cause and Countermeasure Check if a Bluetooth® connection is established between the iPhone® and the system. Check if Siri is enabled on the device. On your phone, go to Siri setting. Check that Siri can be accessed from the device lock screen. This can be set in the settings menu of your phone. For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary. For best results, play media already stored on your device. Streaming music or playback from cloud storage may degrade performance. Switch the source manually by pressing the AUX or MEDIA button on the vehicle audio system or the SOURCE select switch on the steering wheel. For best results, use the native Music app. Performance of music control function while using Podcasts, Audiobook or other 3rd party music apps may vary and is controlled by the device.
Check that the audio source is set to Bluetooth® Audio or iPod® mode. A USB connection is required for iPod® mode.
Check if "Send Notifications" is enabled on your phone. On the phone, go to Bluetooth® settings. Find the device name, like "My Car". Press the INFO button. Turn on "Show Notifications".
After receiving an incoming text message, follow on-screen guidance. Press the for Siri Eyes Free. After Siri Eyes Free starts, say "Text Message".
button for 1.5 seconds on the steering wheel
4-66 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
CAR PHONE OR CB RADIO
BLUETOOTH® HANDS-FREE PHONE SYSTEM
When installing a CB, ham radio or car phone in your vehicle, be sure to observe the following precautions; otherwise, the new equipment may adversely affect the engine control system and other electronic parts.
WARNING
A cellular phone should not be used for any purpose while driving so full attention may be given to vehicle operation. Some jurisdictions prohibit the use of cellular phones while driving.
If you must make a call while your vehicle is in motion, the hands free cellular phone operational mode (if so equipped) is highly recommended. Exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
Keep the antenna as far away as possible from the electronic control modules.
Keep the antenna wire more than 8 in (20 cm) away from the electronic control system harnesses. Do not route the antenna wire next to any harness.
Adjust the antenna standing-wave ratio as recommended by the manufacturer.
Connect the ground wire from the CB radio chassis to the body.
For additional information, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
WARNING
Use a phone after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use a phone while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while talking on the phone, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
CAUTION
To avoid discharging the vehicle battery, use a phone after starting the engine.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-67
LHA4699
Your NISSAN is equipped with the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System. If you have a compatible Bluetooth® enabled cellular phone, you can set up the wireless connection between your cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module. With Bluetooth® wireless technology, you can
make or receive a hands-free telephone call with your cellular phone in the vehicle.
Once your cellular phone is connected to the in-vehicle phone module, no other phone connecting procedure is required. Your phone is automatically connected
4-68 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
with the in-vehicle phone module when the ignition switch is placed in the ACC or ON position with the previously connected cellular phone turned on and carried in the vehicle.
NOTE:
Some devices require the user to accept connections to other Bluetooth® devices. If your phone does not connect automatically to the system, consult the phone's Owner's Manual for details on device operation.
You can connect up to six different Bluetooth® cellular phones to the invehicle phone module. However, you can talk on only one cellular phone at a time.
Before using the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to the following notes.
Set up the wireless connection between a compatible cellular phone and the in-vehicle phone module before using the hands-free phone system.
Some Bluetooth® enabled cellular
phones may not be recognized or work
properly.
Please
visit
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for a recom-
mended phone list and connecting in-
structions.
You will not be able to use a hands-free phone under the following conditions:
Your vehicle is outside of the cellular service area.
Your vehicle is in an area where it is difficult to receive a cellular signal; such as in a tunnel, in an underground parking garage, near a tall building or in a mountainous area.
Your cellular phone is locked to prevent it from being dialed.
When the radio wave condition is not ideal or ambient sound is too loud, it may be difficult to hear the other person's voice during a call.
Do not place the cellular phone in an area surrounded by metal or far away from the in-vehicle phone module to prevent tone quality degradation and wireless connection disruption.
While a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connection, the battery power of the cellular phone may discharge quicker than usual. The Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System cannot charge cellular phones.
Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
For additional information, refer to the cellular phone Owner's Manual regarding the telephone charges, cellular phone antenna and body, etc.
REGULATORY INFORMATION
FCC Regulatory information
CAUTION: To maintain compliance with FCC's RF exposure guidelines, use only the supplied antenna. Unauthorized antenna, modification, or attachments could damage the transmitter and may violate FCC regulations.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference and
2. this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
IC Regulatory information
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations.
BLUETOOTH® is a trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and licensed to Panasonic.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-69
USING THE SYSTEM
The system allows hands-free operation of the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
If the vehicle is in motion, some commands may not be available so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
Initialization
When the ignition switch is placed in the ON position, NISSAN Voice Recognition is initial-
ized, which takes a few seconds. If
the
button is pressed before the ini-
tialization completes, the system will an-
nounce "There is no phone connected" and
will not react to voice commands.
Operating tips
To get the best performance out of the NISSAN Voice Recognition System, observe the following:
Keep the interior of the vehicle as quiet as possible. Keep all vents pointed away from the microphone and close the windows to eliminate surrounding noises (traffic noises, vibration sounds, etc.), which may prevent the system from recognizing voice commands correctly.
Wait until the tone sounds before speaking a command. Otherwise, the command will not be received properly.
Start speaking a command within 5 seconds after the tone sounds.
Speak in a natural voice without pausing between words.
For calling contacts by name, please say both the first and last name of the contact for better recognition.
Giving voice commands
To operate NISSAN Voice Recognition,
press the
button located on the
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.
After the tone sounds, speak a command.
The command given is picked up by the
microphone, and voice feedback is given
when the command is accepted.
If a command is not recognized, the system announces, "Please say or select a command from the displayed list." Make sure the command is said exactly as prompted by the system and repeat the command in a clear voice.
4-70 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
If you want to go back to the previous command, you can say "Go back" or "Correction" any time the system is waiting for a response.
You can cancel a command when the
system is waiting for a response by say-
ing, "Cancel" or "Quit." The system an-
nounces "Exit" and ends the Voice Rec-
ognition session. You can also press
and hold the
button on the steer-
ing wheel for 1.5 seconds at any time to
end the Voice Recognition session.
Whenever the Voice Recognition ses-
sion is canceled, a double beep is
played to indicate you have exited the
system.
If you want to adjust the volume of the voice feedback, push the (+ or -) volume control switches on the steering wheel while being provided with feedback. You can also use the radio volume control knob.
Voice Prompt Interrupt
In most cases you can interrupt the voice
feedback to speak the next command by
pressing the
button on the steering
wheel. After interrupting the system, wait
for a beep before speaking your command.
LHA4723
INDICATORS
When a cellular phone is connected through the Bluetooth® wireless connec-
tion, indicators 1 for the phone and text
messaging are displayed on the top of the screen.
Indicator
Description Indicates there are unread received messages. Indicates the Bluetooth® device that is currently connected. Indicates the strength of the signal the Bluetooth® device is receiving. Indicates the amount of remaining Bluetooth® device battery.
LHA4684
CONTROL BUTTONS
The control buttons for the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System are located on the steering wheel.
VOICE COMMAND BUTTON
Press and hold the
button for
less than 1.5 seconds to initiate
the Voice Recognition session. To
exit the Voice Recognition session
press and hold the
for less
than 1.5 seconds. For additional
information, refer to "Voice prompt
interrupt" in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-71
You can use the
button to
interrupt the system feedback
and give a command at once.
If an iPhone® is connected, Siri® can be accessed by pressing
the
button for more than
two seconds. For additional
information, refer to "Siri® Eyes
Free" in this section.
PHONE BUTTON
To answer an incoming call or to
end a call press the
button.
To reject a call press and hold the button.
LHA4726
CONNECTING PROCEDURE
NOTE:
The connecting procedure must be performed when the vehicle is stationary. If the vehicle starts moving during the procedure, the procedure will be canceled.
To connect a phone to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System: Manual Connecting Procedure
1. Press the
MENU button on the
control panel.
2. Touch the "Connections" key on the screen.
3. In the Bluetooth tab, touch the "Add New" key to connect a phone.
4. When a compatible phone is found a message with a PIN appears on the screen.
5. Verify the PIN is correct and accept the connection.
6. To access the Bluetooth® settings
menu touch the " " key on the Connections screen. The following options are available:
Menu Item Bluetooth
ON Favorite (Connection first) PIN
Result Allows user to switch Bluetooth® on and off. Bluetooth® must be turned on in order to connect a device. Turns Bluetooth® functionality on. To turn off, touch the "ON" key again. The indicator light will go off. Allows user to toggle "Phone" and "Audio" favorite settings on and off. Allows user to customize the PIN to a four digit number.
4-72 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
NOTE:
Some cellular phones may require you to accept certain permissions in order to enable features on your Bluetooth® system. During the Bluetooth® pairing process, please check your cellular phone's display for a pop-up with the request to grant phonebook access. Granting phonebook access permission will allow your contacts to be downloaded to the vehicle's Bluetooth® system. A pop-up may display on your cellular phone stating that the Bluetooth® system would like to access your contacts and call history. Please select "Allow" or Yes" to grant this permission.
Automatic Connecting Procedure
If no phone is connected to the system,
press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for less than 1.5 seconds.
After the prompt, speak "Add Phone", the
system will announce "transferring to the
add phone settings menu". The system will
start the pairing procedure. When a com-
patible phone is found, a message with a
PIN appears on the screen. Operate the
Bluetooth® phone to complete the con-
nection process. For additional informa-
tion, refer to "Bluetooth® connections screen" in this section.
VOICE COMMANDS
Voice commands can be used to operate
the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System.
Press and hold the
button for less
than 1.5 seconds to bring up the phone
command menu. The commands avail-
able are:
Call <name>
Dial <number>
Recent Calls
Read/Send Text (if so equipped)
Call <name> Main
Call <name> Other
Settings
"Call <name>"
Speak this command to make a call to a contact that is stored in the phonebook. Say "Call" followed by a phonebook name to initiate a call. If the system does not recognize the name it will display a list of similar names. After the prompt, speak or touch an item number from the displayed list to place the call.
"Dial <number>"
Siri® (if so equipped) Voice Assistant (if so equipped) Phonebook Quick Dial Redial
Speak this command to make a call with a spoken phone number. After the prompt, say "Dial" followed by a 7 to 10 digit phone number. The system will repeat the number back. Say "Dial" to initiate the call or "Correction" to re-enter the phone number.
Select Phone
Add Phone
Call <name> Mobile
Call <name> Home
Call <name> Office
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-73
"Recent Calls"
The following commands are available under "Recent Calls":
Incoming Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 incoming calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the incoming call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Select the "Next" key to move through the list of incoming calls.
Outgoing Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 outgoing calls from the vehicle. If the call was to an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the outgoing call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Select the "Next" key to move through the list of outgoing calls.
Missed Calls Speak this command to list the last 20 missed calls to the vehicle. If the call is from an entry in the phonebook, the name will be displayed. Otherwise, the phone number of the missed call will be displayed. When prompted, speak or touch the item number on the screen to place the call. Select the "Next" key to move through the list of missed calls.
"Read Text/Send Text" (if so equipped)
Speak this command to access text messaging functions. For additional information, refer to "Text messaging" in this section.
"Phonebook through voice command"
Speak "Phonebook" to view a list of quick steps to access entries stored in the phonebook. Commands are organized by the phone number type selected in the cellular device. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone's owner's manual.
The following commands are available:
<Say a Contact Name>
4-74 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
<Say a Contact Name> Main
<Say a Contact Name> Home
<Say a Contact Name> Mobile
<Say a Contact Name> Office
<Say a Contact Name> Other
For additional information on manually selecting phonebook entries, refer to "Making a call" in this section.
"Quick dial"
Speak this command to access the Quick dial menu. After the prompt, speak or select an item number on the displayed list to place the call. For additional information, refer to "Making a call" in this section.
"Redial"
Speak this command to call the last number dialed. After the prompt, say "Redial" to dial the number of the last outgoing call. The system will display "Redialing <name/number>". The name of the phonebook entry will be displayed if it is available, otherwise the number being redialed will be displayed.
"Select Phone"
Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information, refer to "Bluetooth® connections screen" in this section.
"Add Phone"
Speak this command to access the Connections menu. For additional information, refer to "Bluetooth® connections screen" in this section.
"Settings"
Speak this command to access the System Voice settings menu. The system will exit Voice Recognition mode. Touch one of the following options on the screen to change the settings.
Beep Only for Opening Prompt By touching the "ON" key, the indicator light will illuminate, the system voice will turn off and only a tone will sound when the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System is activated. To turn the system voice back on, touch the "ON" key again, the indicator light will turn off.
Best Match List When the system doesn't recognize a phonebook name or dial number, it will provide a list of similar sounding results. To turn this off, touch the "ON" key, the indicator light will turn off. To turn on, touch the "ON" key again, the indicator light will turn on.
PHONE DISPLAY SCREEN
LHA4705
The Phone screen can be displayed by
pressing the
button on the control
panel.
The following options are displayed:
Quick Dial Displays the Quick Dial screen. For additional information, refer to "Quick dial" in this section.
Phonebook Displays the Phonebook screen. For additional information, refer to "Making a call" in this section.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-75
Call History Displays the Call History screen. For additional information, refer to "Making a call" in this section.
Dial Number Displays the Dial Number screen. For additional information, refer to "Making a call" in this section.
Text Message Displays the received message screen. For additional information, refer to "Text messaging" in this section.
Connections Displays the Connections screen. For additional information, refer to "Bluetooth® connections screen" in this section.
Volume Displays the volume adjustment screen. For additional information, refer to "Volume & beeps" in this section.
MAKING A CALL
To make a call press the
button on
the control panel. Touch an option from
menu screen:
Phonebook Select a person and the phone number you wish to call from the phonebook. Depending on the device, the phonebook will be downloaded from the cellular phone automatically when it is connected. If the automatic download does not take place, the phone number must be transferred to the hands-free phone system from the cellular phone prior to using this method. For additional information, refer to "Phone and text message settings" in this section.
Call History Select a phonebook name or phone number from the recent incoming, outgoing or missed calls tabs. Touch a phonebook name or phone number listed to initiate the call.
4-76
Dial Number Enter the phone number manually using the keypad displayed on the screen. Press the "OK" key on the screen to initiate the call.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
For additional options to make a call, refer to "Voice commands" in this section.
Quick Dial
Quick Dial entries can be used to quickly make a call. The system allows up to 20
entries to be stored. To set up a quick dial
press the
button on the control
panel. Touch the "Quick Dial" key to display a
list of quick dial entries. Touch the "Edit" key
to edit current entries or touch the "Add New" key to make a new entry. Two methods are given to create a quick dial entry:
Touch the "Copy from Call History" key to save a phone number from the Incoming, Outgoing or Missed call history lists. Select the person or phone number from the menu to be added. A registration menu will display the Entry #, phone number, phone number type stored in the cellular phone and Voice Tag. Select the "OK" key.
Touch the "Copy from Phonebook" key to save a number from the phonebook. Use the scroll keys on the side to move up and down through the menu. Select a person to be added. A menu will display the Entry #, phone number, phone number type stored in the cellular phone and Voice Tag. Select the "OK" key.
Voice tag
A voice tag can be recorded for each of the registered Quick Dial numbers and can be used to dial the number by speaking it. On the Quick Dial registration screen, touch the "Voice Tag" key. Select a relationship from the list or create a new voice tag. To record a new voice tag touch the "Customize" key on the screen then touch the "Store" key. Speak a name after the prompt, the new tag will be stored. To edit or create a new voice tag select the "Customize" key again. Touch the "Play" key to play the recorded voice tag, touch the "Restore" key to edit the voice tag or "Delete" to delete the current voice tag.
RECEIVING A CALL
When a call is received by the phone connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System, the call information is displayed on the control panel display.
Press the
button on the steering
wheel or touch the " Answer" key on
the screen to accept the call. To reject the
call touch the " Decline" key on the
screen.
If the user is not able to answer the call right away, touch the "Hold Call" key displayed on the screen. A message will be played for the caller: "I'm not able to take a call right now." The user may then accept the call when available or reject the call.
To reject a call, press and hold the button on the steering wheel.
DURING A CALL
While a call is active the following options will appear on the control panel display:
Mute Touch this key to mute or unmute the system.
Dial Number Touch this key to dial digits during the phone call.
Use Handset Touch this key to transfer the call to the handset. To transfer the call back from the handset to the Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System, press the button on the control panel then select the "Transfer Hands-free" key on the screen.
Switch Call This option will only be available when a second call is active.
If supported by the phone, the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System allows for call waiting functionality. If a call is received while another call is already active, a message will be dis-
played on the screen. Press the button on the steering wheel or touch
the " Answer" key on screen to accept the incoming call. Touch the
" Decline" key on the screen to reject the second call.
While a call is active, press the
button
on the steering wheel to access additional
options. Speak one of the following com-
mands:
"Send Digits" Speak this command followed by the digits to enter digits during the phone call.
"Switch call" Speak this command to hold the second call and switch back to the original call.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-77
ENDING A CALL
NOTE:
To end an active call, press the
button
on the steering wheel or touch the
" Hang up" key on the screen.
TEXT MESSAGING (if so equipped)
WARNING
This feature is automatically disabled if the connected device does not support the Message Access Profile (MAP). For additional information, refer to the phone's Owner's Manual for details and instructions.
Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of "Text-to-Speech". Check local regulations before using this feature.
Laws in some jurisdictions may restrict the use of some of the applications and features, such as social networking and texting. Check local regulations for any requirements.
Use the text messaging feature after stopping your vehicle in a safe location. If you have to use the feature while driving, exercise extreme caution at all times so full attention may be given to vehicle operation.
If you are unable to devote full attention to vehicle operation while using the text messaging feature, pull off the road to a safe location and stop your vehicle.
NOTE:
Many phones may require special per-
mission to enable text messaging. Check
the phone's screen during Bluetooth®
pairing. For some phones, you may need
to enable `Notifications' in the phone's
Bluetooth® menu for text messages to
appear on the headunit. For additional
information, refer to your phone's Own-
er's manual. Text message integration
requires that the phone support MAP
(Message Access Profile) for both receiv-
ing and sending text messages. Some
phones may not support all text mes-
saging features. Please refer to
www.nissanusa.com/bluetooth
or
www.nissan.ca/bluetooth for compat-
ibility information, as well as your de-
vice's Owner's manual.
The system allows for the sending and re-
ceiving of text messages through the ve-
hicle interface.
4-78 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The availability of the text message function may vary depending on the cellular phone.
When the cellular phone connected to the vehicle receives a text message, a notification will appear on the control panel display. To check the message, touch the "Read" key. Touch the "Ignore" key to save the message to be checked later.
Access text messaging through the vehicles Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone or through the vehicles control panel.
Text messaging using Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System (if so equipped)
Sending a text message (if so equipped)
1. Press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for less than 1.5 sec-
onds.
2. Say "Send Text" after the tone.
3. The system will provide a list of available commands in order to determine the recipient of the text message. Choose from the following:
Phonebook
Quick Dial
Incoming Calls Outgoing Calls Missed Calls Dial 4. Once a recipient is chosen, the system prompts for which message to send. Nine predefined messages are available. To choose one of the predefined messages, speak one of the following after the tone: "Driving, can't text" "Call me" "On my way" "Running late" "Okay" "Yes" "No" "Where are you?" "When?"
Reading a received text message
1. Press and hold the
button on the
steering wheel for less than 1.5 sec-
onds.
2. Say "Read Text" after the tone.
The display will show a list of 20 messages
with the sender and delivery time. Touch
the "Next" key on the screen to view all messages. To view a text message press
the
button on the steering wheel and
speak the number item list on the screen.
The following options will be available:
Siri® Eyes Free (if so equipped) If a connected phone is equipped with Siri®, it can also be used to create custom messages that are sent through the phone. For additional information, refer to "Siri® Eyes Free" in this section.
NOTE:
Text messages are only displayed if the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE:
Play Speak this command to have the system say the message.
Reply Speak this command to send a text message response to the sender of the text message.
Call Speak this command to call the sender.
For Apple iPhones®, text messages can only be sent through Siri.
Text messaging using the control panel
Display received message list
1. Press the panel.
button on the control
Previous Speak this command to move to the previous text message (if available).
Next Speak this command to move to the next text message (if available).
2. Touch the "Text Message" key on the screen
3. Touch an item on the list to read or reply to the message.
Up to 100 messages can be stored in the message list.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-79
Received message screen
Touching the "Read" key on the incoming message notification screen or selecting a message from the message list will show the details of the received message on the display.
Available actions:
Prev. Touch this key to read the previous message.
Next Touch this key to read the next message.
Play/Stop Touch the "Play" key to have the handsfree phone system read out the received message. Touch the "Stop" key to stop reading.
Call If the sender of the message is registered in the phonebook, touch the "Call" key to make a call to the sender.
Reply A reply message can be selected from the predefined list.
Sending a text message (if so equipped)
This function may not be supported depending on the cellular phone.
1. Press the panel.
button on the control
2. Touch the "Text Message" key on the screen.
3. Touch the "Create Message" key on the screen.
The following items are available:
Available item To
Select Text Send
Enter Number by Keypad Quick Dial Phonebook Call History
Action Enter the phone number of the recipient using the keypad. Touch the "OK" key to confirm. Select a recipient from the quick dial list. Select a recipient from the phonebook. Select a recipient/phone number from call history. Touch to display a list of predefined text messages. Touch to send the message.
4-80 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
LHA4716
BLUETOOTH® CONNECTIONS SCREEN
1. " " (back) key 2. Bluetooth tab 3. Connections screen 4. "Add New" key 5. " " (settings) key 6. " " (info) key 7. " " (Bluetooth® Audio connec-
tion) key 8. " " (Bluetooth® Hands-Free
Phone System connection) key
Access the Connections screen to change settings and view Bluetooth® information. To access the Connections screen press
the
MENU button on the control
panel. Touch the "Connections" key on the
screen then select the Bluetooth tab.
The paired phone will be added to the list on the Bluetooth® connections screen.
Touching the name of another device on the list will switch the connected device.
" "(back) key
Touch the " " key to go back to the previous screen.
Connecting Bluetooth®
For additional information on connecting a cellular phone or device to the Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System, refer to "Connecting procedure" in this section.
NOTE:
Some cellular phones or other devices may cause interference or a buzzing noise to come from the audio system speakers. Storing the device in a different location may reduce or eliminate the noise.
Bluetooth tab
This tab will display up to 6 Bluetooth® devices. If 6 devices are already connected, one of the devices must be deleted before another device can be connected.
"Add New" key
Touch the this key on the screen to connect a new Bluetooth® device. For additional information, refer to "Connecting procedure" in this section.
" " (Bluetooth® settings) key
Touch the " " key on the screen to display a list of options.
Bluetooth Touch this key to turn the Bluetooth® connection on or off
Favorite (Connection first) Touch this key to change which device will be connected first when multiple devices are connected to the vehicle. Turn the " " key on or off to make the device a favorite connection. Turn the " " key on or off to make the device a favorite connection.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-81
Pin Touch this key to customize the PIN code. Input a four digit number then touch the "OK" key. The new PIN will be set.
" " (info) key
Touch the " " key on the screen to display the information of the cellular phone or to delete the device.
Touch the "Delete" key to remove a paired device then select "Yes" when a message appears.
" " (Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System connection) key
A list of connected devices will be displayed
on the screen. Touch the " " key next to
the name to connect a device to the Hands-Free Phone System. If the phone is listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Select the key again to disconnect the device. The device will not be removed
from the list. For additional information on
removing a device, refer to " in this section.
" (info) key
" " (Bluetooth® Audio
connection) key
A list of connected devices will be displayed
on the screen. Touch the " " key next to the name to connect a device to Bluetooth® Audio. If the device is listed as a favorite, a star will appear on the icon. Select the key again to disconnect the device. The device will not be removed from the list. For additional information on removing
a device, refer to " " (info) key in this section.
LHA4721
PHONE AND TEXT MESSAGE
SETTINGS
Bluetooth® Hands-Free Phone System settings can be changed according to the user's preference. To access the "Phone" set-
tings menu press the
MENU button
on the control panel. Touch the "Settings"
key then select the "Phone" key.
4-82 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
The following options are available:
Quick Dial Phonebook Text Message
Notifications Automatic Hold
Menu Item Edit Delete All Download Entire Phonebook Auto Downloaded Text Message Text Message Ringtone Signature Auto Reply Auto Reply Text Message Driver Only Vehicle Ringtone
Result Entries in the Quick Dial can be edited. For additional information, refer to "Quick dial" in this section. Deletes all of the stored phone numbers in quick dial. All the phone numbers that are stored in a phonebook in the cellular phone that is connected to the vehicle are downloaded at once. For additional information, refer to the cellular phone's owner's manual. Turns on/off automatic downloading of the phonebook when a new phone is connected. Turns the text messaging function on/off. Turn the incoming message sound on/off. Turns the signature setting for the outgoing text message on/off. Turns the automatic text message reply function on/off. Select the text message to be used for the automatic reply. Choose from a list of predefined messages. When this item is turned on, incoming call notification is displayed only on the handset. Turns the vehicle ringtone on/off. When this item turns on, an incoming call will be put on hold automatically.
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-83
Volume & beeps
There are several methods to customize the volume settings.
Volume & Beeps
The Volume & Beeps screen can be found
by pressing the
MENU button on the
control panel, touching the "Settings" key on the screen and selecting "Volume &
Beeps". To adjust the volume of the following options, touch the "-" and "+" keys on the screen.
The available settings are:
Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.
Volume Settings
The Volume settings screen can be found
by pressing the
button on the control
panel then touching the "Volume" key on
the screen. To adjust the volume of the
following options, touch the "-" and "+" keys
on the screen.
The available settings are:
Ringtone Adjust the volume level of the ringtone of incoming calls.
Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.
Outgoing Call Adjust the volume level of the outgoing calls.
Voice Prompt Vol. Adjust the volume level of the system voice.
Text-to-speech Vol. Adjust the volume of the replay voice for text messaging.
Button Beeps Turns on/off the button beep sounds and alarm for prohibited operations.
4-84 Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems
MEMO
Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems 4-85
5 Starting and driving
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Avoiding collision and rollover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Off-road recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7 Rapid air pressure loss . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8 Drinking alcohol/drugs and driving . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9 Operating range. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10 Push-button ignition switch positions . . . . . . . .5-11 Emergency engine shut off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-12 NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-13
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-14
Remote Engine Start (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . 5-15
Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-15
Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-21 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 5-22
BSW system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23 How to enable/disable the BSW system . . . . . 5-24 BSW system limitations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-25 BSW driving situations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-26 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-29 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) (if so equipped) . . 5-31 RCTA system operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-32 How to enable/disable the RCTA system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-34 RCTA system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-35 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-37 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-38 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Precautions on cruise control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39 Cruise control operations. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-40 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-41 AEB system operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-43
Turning the AEB system on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 AEB system limitations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-45 System temporarily unavailable . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-47 System malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 System maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-48 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-49 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-50 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-51 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-52 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-53 Brake system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 Brake precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-54 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-55 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . . . . . . . . . 5-56
Brake force distribution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-57 Chassis Control (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59
Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-59 Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60 Hill start assist system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-60 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Freeing a frozen door lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Antifreeze . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Draining of coolant water. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Tire equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-61 Special winter equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62 Driving on snow or ice . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62 Parking brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-62
PRECAUTIONS WHEN STARTING AND DRIVING
WARNING
Do not leave children or adults who would normally require the assistance of others alone in your vehicle. Pets should also not be left alone. They could accidentally injure themselves or others through inadvertent operation of the vehicle. Also, on hot, sunny days, temperatures in a closed vehicle could quickly become high enough to cause severe or possibly fatal injuries to people or animals.
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
To avoid raising the center of gravity excessively, do not exceed the rated capacity of the roof rack (if so equipped) and evenly distribute the load.
EXHAUST GAS (carbon monoxide)
WARNING
Do not breathe exhaust gases; they contain colorless and odorless carbon monoxide. Carbon monoxide is dangerous. It can cause unconsciousness or death.
If you suspect that exhaust fumes are entering the vehicle, drive with all windows fully open, and have the vehicle inspected immediately.
Do not run the engine in closed spaces such as a garage.
Do not park the vehicle with the engine running for any extended length of time.
Keep the rear vent windows, liftgates, doors and trunk lids (if so equipped) closed while driving, otherwise exhaust gases could be drawn into the passenger compartment. If you must drive with one of these open, follow these precautions:
1. Open all the windows.
2. Set the
air recirculation but-
ton to off and the fan control dial to
high to circulate the air.
If electrical wiring or other cable connections must pass to a trailer through the seal on the trunk lid or the body, follow the manufacturer's recommendation to prevent carbon monoxide entry into the vehicle.
The exhaust system and body should be inspected by a qualified mechanic whenever:
a. The vehicle is raised for service.
b. You suspect that exhaust fumes are entering into the passenger compartment.
c. You notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system.
d. You have had an accident involving damage to the exhaust system, underbody, or rear of the vehicle.
5-2 Starting and driving
THREE-WAY CATALYST
The three-way catalyst is an emission control device installed in the exhaust system. Exhaust gases in the three-way catalyst are burned at high temperatures to help reduce pollutants.
WARNING
The exhaust gas and the exhaust system are very hot. Keep people, animals or flammable materials away from the exhaust system components.
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
CAUTION
Do not use leaded gasoline. Deposits from leaded gasoline will seriously reduce the three-way catalyst's ability to help reduce exhaust pollutants.
Keep your engine tuned up. Malfunctions in the ignition, fuel injection, or electrical systems can cause overrich fuel flow into the three-way catalyst, causing it to overheat. Do not keep driving if the engine misfires, or if noticeable loss of performance or other unusual operating conditions are detected. Have the vehicle inspected promptly. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Avoid driving with an extremely low fuel level. Running out of fuel could cause the engine to misfire, damaging the three-way catalyst.
Do not race the engine while warming it up.
Do not push or tow your vehicle to start the engine.
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly underinflated. Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale.
Starting and driving 5-3
When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists. When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
Additional information:
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as a spare tire, the TPMS does not monitor the tire pressure of the spare tire.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example, a flat tire while driving).
5-4 Starting and driving
The low tire pressure warning light does not automatically turn off when the tire pressure is adjusted. After the tire is inflated to the recommended pressure, the vehicle must be driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h) to activate the TPMS and turn off the low tire pressure warning light. Use a tire pressure gauge to check the tire pressure.
The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning appears each time the ignition switch is placed in the ON position as long as the low tire pressure warning light remains illuminated.
The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display when the low tire pressure warning light is illuminated and low tire pressure is detected. The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning turns off when the low tire pressure warning light turns off.
The "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning does not appear if the low tire pressure warning light illuminates to indicate a TPMS malfunction.
Tire pressure rises and falls depending on the heat caused by the vehicle's operation and the outside temperature. Do not reduce the tire pressure after driving because the tire pressure rises after driving. Low outside temperature can lower the temperature of the air inside the tire which can cause a lower tire inflation pressure. This may cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate. If the warning light illuminates, check the tire pressure for all four tires.
The Tire and Loading Information label is located in the driver's door opening.
You can also check the pressure of all tires (except the spare tire) on the vehicle information display screen. The order of the tire pressure figures displayed on the screen corresponds with the actual order of the tire position.
For additional information, refer to "Low tire pressure warning light" in the "Instruments and controls" section and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light off. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. (For additional information, refer to "Flat tire" in the "In case of emergency" section for changing a flat tire.)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, when a spare tire is mounted or a wheel is replaced, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
CAUTION
The TPMS may not function properly when the wheels are equipped with tire chains or the wheels are buried in snow.
Do not place metalized film or any metal parts (antenna, etc.) on the windows. This may cause poor reception of the signals from the tire pressure sensors, and the TPMS will not function properly.
Some devices and transmitters may temporarily interfere with the operation of the TPMS and cause the low tire pressure warning light to illuminate.
Some examples are:
Facilities or electric devices using similar radio frequencies are near the vehicle.
If a transmitter set to similar frequencies is being used in or near the vehicle.
If a computer (or similar equipment) or a DC/AC converter is being used in or near the vehicle.
Starting and driving 5-5
The low tire pressure warning light may illuminate in the following cases:
If the vehicle is equipped with a wheel and tire without TPMS.
If the TPMS has been replaced and the ID has not been registered.
If the wheel is not originally specified by NISSAN.
FCC Notice: For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
5-6 Starting and driving
For Canada:
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert
When adding air to an under-inflated tire, the TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle to help you inflate the tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure.
Vehicle set-up
1. Park the vehicle in a safe and level place.
2. Apply the parking brake and place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
3. Place the ignition switch in the ON position. Do not start the engine.
Operation
1. Add air to the tire.
2. After a few seconds, the hazard indicators will start flashing.
3. When the designated pressure is reached, the horn beeps once and the hazard indicators stop flashing.
4. Perform the above steps for each tire.
If the tire is over-inflated more than approximately 4 psi (30 kPa), the horn beeps and the hazard indicators flash three times. To correct the pressure, push the core of the valve stem on the tire briefly to release pressure. When the pressure reaches the designated pressure, the horn beeps once.
If the hazard indicator does not flash within approximately 15 seconds after starting to inflate the tire, it indicates that the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not operating.
The TPMS will not activate the EasyFill Tire Alert under the following conditions:
If there is interference from an external device or transmitter.
The air pressure from the inflation device is not sufficient to inflate the tire.
There is a malfunction in the TPMS.
There is a malfunction in the horn or hazard indicators.
The identification code of the tire pressure sensor is not registered to the system.
The battery of the tire pressure sensor is low.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert does not operate due to TPMS interference, move the vehicle about 3 ft (1 m) backward or forward and try again.
If the Easy-Fill Tire Alert is not working, use a tire pressure gauge.
ON-PAVEMENT AND OFF-ROAD DRIVING PRECAUTIONS
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
They have higher ground clearance than passenger cars to make them capable of performing in a variety of on-pavement and off-road applications. This gives them
a higher center of gravity than ordinary vehicles. An advantage of higher ground clearance is a better view of the road, allowing you to anticipate problems. However, they are not designed for cornering at the same speeds as conventional 2-wheel drive vehicles any more than low-slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off-road conditions. If at all possible, avoid sharp turns at high speeds. As with other vehicles of this type, failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result in loss of control or vehicle rollover. In a rollover crash, an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
AVOIDING COLLISION AND ROLLOVER
WARNING
Failure to operate this vehicle in a safe and prudent manner may result in loss of control or an accident.
Be alert and drive defensively at all times. Obey all traffic regulations. Avoid excessive speed, high speed cornering, or sudden steering maneuvers, because these driving practices could cause you to lose control of your vehicle.
As with any vehicle, loss of control could result in a collision with other vehicles or objects or cause the vehicle to roll over, particularly if the loss of control causes the vehicle to slide sideways.
Be attentive at all times, and avoid driving when tired. Never drive when under the influence of alcohol or drugs (including prescription or over-the-counter drugs which may cause drowsiness). Always wear your seat belt as outlined in the "Safety Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual, and also instruct your passengers to do so.
Seat belts help reduce the risk of injury in collisions and rollovers. In a rollover crash, an unbelted or improperly belted person is significantly more likely to be injured or killed than a person properly wearing a seat belt.
OFF-ROAD RECOVERY
While driving, the right side or left side wheels may unintentionally leave the road surface. If this occurs, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
Starting and driving 5-7
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Do not apply the brakes.
3. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
4. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
5. If there is nothing in the way, steer the vehicle to follow the road while vehicle speed is reduced. Do not attempt to drive the vehicle back onto the road surface until vehicle speed is reduced.
6. When it is safe to do so, gradually turn the steering wheel until both tires return to the road surface. When all tires are on the road surface, steer the vehicle to stay in the appropriate driving lane.
If you decide that it is not safe to return the vehicle to the road surface based on vehicle, road or traffic conditions, gradually slow the vehicle to a stop in a safe place off the road.
RAPID AIR PRESSURE LOSS
Rapid air pressure loss or a "blow-out" can occur if the tire is punctured or is damaged due to hitting a curb or pothole. Rapid air pressure loss can also be caused by driving on under-inflated tires.
Rapid air pressure loss can affect the handling and stability of the vehicle, especially at highway speeds.
Help prevent rapid air pressure loss by maintaining the correct air pressure and visually inspecting the tires for wear and damage. For additional information, refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual. If a tire rapidly loses air pressure or "blows-out" while driving, maintain control of the vehicle by following the procedure below. Please note that this procedure is only a general guide. The vehicle must be driven as appropriate based on the conditions of the vehicle, road and traffic.
WARNING
If there is a sudden loss of tire air pressure, the vehicle will generally move or pull in the direction of the flat tire. In this situation, losing control of the vehicle may cause a collision and result in personal injury. To help avoid loss of control:
Do not rapidly apply the brakes.
Do not rapidly release the accelerator pedal.
Do not rapidly turn the steering wheel.
1. Remain calm and do not overreact.
2. Maintain a firm grip on the steering wheel with both hands and try to hold a straight course.
3. When appropriate, slowly release the accelerator pedal to gradually slow the vehicle.
4. Gradually steer the vehicle to a safe location off the road and away from traffic if possible.
5. Lightly apply the brake pedal to gradually stop the vehicle.
5-8 Starting and driving
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH
6. Turn on the hazard warning flashers and contact a roadside emergency service to change the tire. For additional information, refer to "Changing a flat tire" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
DRINKING ALCOHOL/DRUGS AND DRIVING
WARNING
Never drive under the influence of alcohol or drugs. Alcohol in the bloodstream reduces coordination, delays reaction time and impairs judgement. Driving after drinking alcohol increases the likelihood of being involved in an accident injuring yourself and others. Additionally, if you are injured in an accident, alcohol can increase the severity of the injury.
NISSAN is committed to safe driving. However, you must choose not to drive under the influence of alcohol. Every year thousands of people are injured or killed in alcohol-related collisions. Although the local laws vary on what is considered to be legally intoxicated, the fact is that alcohol affects all people differently and most people underestimate the effects of alcohol.
Remember, drinking and driving don't mix! That is true for drugs (over-the-counter, prescription) and illegal drugs, too. Don't drive if your ability to operate your vehicle is impaired by alcohol, drugs, or some other physical condition.
WARNING
Do not operate the push-button ignition switch while driving the vehicle except in an emergency. (The engine will stop when the ignition switch is pushed three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds or the ignition switch is pushed and held for more than 2 seconds.) If the engine stops while the vehicle is being driven, this could lead to a crash and serious injury.
Starting and driving 5-9
If the battery of the vehicle is discharged, the ignition switch cannot be moved from the LOCK position.
Some indicators and warnings for operation are displayed on the vehicle information display (if so equipped). For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
LSD2645
When the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch will illuminate. If the ignition switch is in the LOCK or OFF position, push the ignition switch center:
Once to change to ON. Two times to change to OFF. The shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position if the ignition switch is in the ON position and the brake pedal is depressed.
5-10 Starting and driving
OPERATING RANGE
LSD2020
The Intelligent Key functions can only be used when the Intelligent Key is within the specified operating range.
When the Intelligent Key battery is almost discharged or strong radio waves are present near the operating location, the Intelligent Key system's operating range becomes narrower and may not function properly.
If the Intelligent Key is within the operating range, it is possible for anyone, even someone who does not carry the Intelligent Key, to push the ignition switch to start the engine.
The operating range of the engine start
function is inside of the vehicle 1 .
The luggage area is not included in the operating range, but the Intelligent Key may function.
If the Intelligent Key is placed on the instrument panel, inside the glove box, storage bin or door pocket, the Intelligent Key may not function.
If the Intelligent Key is placed near the door or window outside the vehicle, the Intelligent Key may function.
PUSH-BUTTON IGNITION SWITCH POSITIONS
LOCK (Normal parking position)
The ignition switch can only be locked in this position.
The ignition switch will be unlocked when it is pushed to the ON position while carrying the Intelligent Key.
The ignition switch will lock when any door is opened or closed with the ignition switched off.
ON (Normal operating position)
This position turns on the ignition system and electrical accessories.
ON has a battery saver feature that will place the ignition switch in the OFF position, if the vehicle is not running, after some time under the following conditions:
The shift lever is in P (Park).
The hazard lamps are off.
The turn signals are off.
The battery saver feature will be canceled if any of the following occur:
The shift lever is moved out of the P (Park) position.
The ignition switch changes position.
The hazard lamps are turned on.
The turn signals are turned on.
CAUTION
Do not leave the vehicle with the ignition switch in the ON or AUTO ACC position when the engine is not running for an extended period. This can discharge the battery.
OFF
The ignition switch is in the OFF position when the engine is turned off using the ignition switch.
AUTO ACC:
With the vehicle in the P (Park) position, the Intelligent Key with you, and the ignition switch placed from the ON to the OFF position, the radio can still be used for a period of time, or until the driver's door is opened.
After a period of time, functions such as radio, navigation, and Bluetooth® HandsFree Phone System may be restarted by pressing the "POWER button/VOLUME control knob" or the key fob unlock button. For additional information, refer to "Monitor, climate, audio, phone and voice recognition systems" in this manual.
Starting and driving 5-11
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
Rapidly push the ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
Push and hold the ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.
5-12 Starting and driving
SSD0860
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY® BATTERY DISCHARGE
If the battery of the NISSAN Intelligent Key® is discharged or environmental conditions interfere with the Intelligent Key operation, start the engine according to the following procedure:
1. Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
2. Firmly apply the foot brake.
3. Touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key as illustrated. (A chime will sound.)
(After step 3 is performed, when the ignition switch is pushed without depressing the brake pedal, the ignition switch position will change to ON.)
4. Push the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal within 10 seconds after the chime sounds. The engine will start.
NOTE:
When the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position or the engine is started by the above procedure, the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears in the vehicle information display (if so equipped) even when the Intelligent Key is inside the vehicle. This is not a malfunction. To turn off the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator, touch the ignition switch with the Intelligent Key again.
If the Intelligent Key battery discharge indicator appears, replace the battery as soon as possible. For additional information, refer to "Battery replacement" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
NISSAN ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM (NATS) (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Anti-Theft System (NATS) will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered NATS key.
If the engine does not start by using the registered NATS key, it may be due to interference caused by:
Another NATS key.
An automated toll road device.
An automated payment device.
Other devices that transmit similar signals.
Start the engine using the following procedure:
1. Remove any items that may be causing the interference away from the NATS key.
2. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
3. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.
4. Repeat steps 2 and 3.
5. Start the engine.
6. Repeat the steps above until all possible interferences are eliminated.
If this procedure allows the engine to start, NISSAN recommends placing the registered NATS key separate from other devices to avoid interference.
NISSAN VEHICLE IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM (if so equipped)
The NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System will not allow the engine to start without the use of the registered key.
If the engine fails to start using a registered key (for example, when interference is caused by another registered key, an automated toll road device or automatic payment device on the key ring), restart the engine using the following procedures:
1. Leave the ignition switch in the ON position for approximately 5 seconds.
2. Place the ignition switch in the OFF or LOCK position, and wait approximately 10 seconds.
3. Repeat steps 1 and 2.
4. Restart the engine while holding the device (which may have caused the interference) separate from the registered key.
If the no start condition re-occurs, NISSAN recommends placing the registered key on a separate key ring to avoid interference from other devices.
Starting and driving 5-13
BEFORE STARTING THE ENGINE
STARTING THE ENGINE
Make sure the area around the vehicle is clear.
Check fluid levels such as engine oil, coolant, brake fluid, and windshieldwasher fluid as frequently as possible, or at least whenever you refuel.
Check that all windows and lights are clean.
Visually inspect tires for their appearance and condition. Also check tires for proper inflation.
Lock all doors.
Position
seat
and
headrests/head restraints.
adjust
Adjust inside and outside mirrors.
Fasten seat belts and ask all passengers to do likewise.
Check the operation of warning lights when the ignition switch is pushed to the ON position. For additional information, refer to "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
1. Apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever to P (Park) or N (Neutral). P (Park) is recommended.
The shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park) and into any of the other gear positions if the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position.
The starter is designed not to operate if the shift lever is in any of the driving positions.
3. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Depress the brake pedal and push the ignition switch to start the engine.
To start the engine immediately, push and release the ignition switch while depressing the brake pedal with the ignition switch in any position.
If the engine is very hard to start in extremely cold weather or when restarting, depress the accelerator pedal a little (approximately 1/3 to the floor) and while holding, crank the engine. Release the accelerator pedal when the engine starts.
If the engine is very hard to start because it is flooded, depress the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it. Push the ignition switch to the ON position to start cranking the engine. After 5 or 6 seconds, stop cranking by pushing the ignition switch to LOCK. After cranking the engine, release the accelerator pedal. Crank the engine with your foot off the accelerator pedal by depressing the brake pedal and pushing the ignition switch to start the engine. If the engine starts, but fails to run, repeat the above procedure.
CAUTION
Do not operate the starter for more than 15 seconds at a time. If the engine does not start, push the ignition switch to the OFF position and wait 10 seconds before cranking again, otherwise the starter could be damaged.
5-14 Starting and driving
DRIVING THE VEHICLE
4. Warm-up:
Allow the engine to idle for at least 30 seconds after starting. Do not race the engine while warming it up. Drive at a moderate speed for a short distance first, especially in cold weather. In cold weather, keep the engine running for a minimum of 2 - 3 minutes before shutting it off. Starting and stopping the engine over a short period of time may make the vehicle more difficult to start.
5. To stop the engine, move the shift lever to the P (Park) position and push the ignition switch to the OFF position.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. The vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
REMOTE ENGINE START (if so equipped)
Vehicles started with the Remote Engine Start require the ignition switch to be placed in the ON position before the shift lever can be moved from the P (Park) position. To place the ignition switch in the ON position, follow these steps:
1. Make sure that the Intelligent Key is on you.
2. Apply the brake.
3. Push the ignition switch once to the ON position.
For additional information, refer to "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" in the "Pre-driving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT)
WARNING Do not depress the accelerator pedal
while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low). Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident. Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up. Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control. Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.
Starting and driving 5-15
CAUTION
Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
The CVT in your vehicle is electronically controlled to produce maximum power and smooth operation.
The recommended operating procedures for this transmission are shown on the following pages. Follow these procedures for maximum vehicle performance and driving enjoyment.
NOTE:
Engine power may be automatically reduced to protect the CVT if the engine speed increases quickly when driving on slippery roads or while being tested on some dynamometers.
Starting the vehicle
1. After starting the engine, fully depress the foot brake pedal before moving the shift lever out of the P (Park) position. This Continuously Variable Transmission is designed so that the foot brake pedal must be depressed before shifting from P (Park) to any driving position while the ignition switch is in the ON position. The shift lever cannot be moved out of the P (Park) position and into any of the other positions if the ignition switch is placed in the LOCK or OFF position.
2. Keep the foot brake pedal depressed and move the shift lever to a driving position.
3. Release the parking brake and foot brake pedal, and then gradually start the vehicle in motion.
WARNING
Do not depress the accelerator pedal while shifting from P (Park) or N (Neutral) to R (Reverse), D (Drive) or L (Low) position. Always depress the brake pedal until shifting is completed. Failure to do so could cause you to lose control and have an accident.
Cold engine idle speed is high, so use caution when shifting into a forward or reverse gear before the engine has warmed up.
Do not downshift abruptly on slippery roads. This may cause a loss of control.
Never shift to either the P (Park) or R (Reverse) position while the vehicle is moving forward and P (Park) or D (Drive) position while the vehicle is reversing. This could cause an accident or damage the transmission.
5-16 Starting and driving
CAUTION
To avoid possible damage to your vehicle, when stopping the vehicle on an uphill grade, do not hold the vehicle by depressing the accelerator pedal. The foot brake should be used for this purpose.
Except in an emergency, do not shift to the N (Neutral) position while driving. Coasting with the transmission in the N (Neutral) position may cause serious damage to the transmission.
WARNING
Apply the parking brake if the shift lever is in any position while the engine is not running. Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in serious personal injury or property damage.
P (Park)
LSD2643
To move the shift lever:
Press the button A while depressing
the brake pedal
Press the button A to shift
Shift without pressing the button A
Shifting
After starting the engine, fully depress the brake pedal and move the shift lever from P (Park) to any of the desired shift positions.
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the P (Park) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the P (Park) shift lever position when the vehicle is parked or when starting the engine. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped.
The brake pedal should be depressed to move the shift lever from N (Neutral) or any drive position to P (Park).
Apply the parking brake. When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake first, then move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
Starting and driving 5-17
R (Reverse)
CAUTION
To prevent transmission damage, use the R (Reverse) position only when the vehicle is completely stopped.
Use the R (Reverse) position to back up. Make sure the vehicle is completely stopped before selecting the R (Reverse) position. The brake pedal must be depressed in to move the shift lever from P (Park) or the shift lever button pressed in from N (Neutral) or any drive position to R (Reverse).
N (Neutral)
Neither forward nor reverse gear is engaged. The engine can be started in this position. You may shift to N (Neutral) and restart a stalled engine while the vehicle is moving.
D (Drive)
Use this position for all normal forward driving.
L (Low)
Use this position for engine braking on steep downhill gradients/climbing steep slopes and whenever approaching sharp bends. Do not use the L (Low) position in any other circumstances.
5-18 Starting and driving
Shift lock release
LSD2644
If the battery charge is low or discharged, the shift lever may not be moved from the P (Park) position even with the brake pedal depressed and the shift lever button pressed.
It will be necessary to jump start or have your battery charged. For additional information, refer to "Jump starting" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer or a professional towing service.
To move the shift lever, complete the following procedure:
1. Push the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Using a protective cloth on the tip of a small (1/8 inch or 3 mm) flat-head screwdriver, remove the shift lock release cover.
If available, a plastic trim tool can also be used.
4. Insert the rod from the spare tire tool kit into the shift lock release slot and push in at an angle (about 45°). A small screwdriver or small trim tool may also be used.
For additional information, refer to "NISSAN Intelligent Key®" in the "Predriving checks and adjustments" section of this manual.
5. Move the shift lever to the N (Neutral) position while holding down the shift lock release.
6. Push the ignition switch to the ON position. Now the vehicle may be moved to the desired location.
If the shift lever cannot be moved out of P (Park), have the transmission checked as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Make sure to take extra care during the removal of the shift lock cap as this part is easily damaged.
WARNING
If the shift lever cannot be moved from the P (Park) position while the engine is running and the brake pedal is depressed, the stop lights may not work. Malfunctioning stop lights could cause an accident injuring yourself and others.
LSD2647
Drive sport mode switch (if so equipped)
To select the drive sport mode, push the drive sport mode switch with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position.
The drive sport mode indicator in the vehicle information display illuminates next to the Transmission Shift Position indicator. To turn off the drive sport mode, push the drive sport mode switch again. The drive sport mode indicator will turn off. When the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D (Drive), the drive sport mode will be automatically turned off.
OFF position: For normal driving and fuel economy, use the OFF position. ON position: For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking is necessary, or for powerful acceleration, use the ON position. The transmission will automatically select a different gear ratio, allowing the engine to provide high output. Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the drive sport mode in the ON position. This reduces fuel economy.
Starting and driving 5-19
LSD2647
Overdrive (O/D) OFF mode switch (if so equipped)
To select the overdrive OFF mode, push the O/D OFF switch with the shift lever in the D (Drive) position.
The overdrive OFF indicator light in the meter panel illuminates. To turn off the overdrive OFF mode, push the O/D OFF switch again. The overdrive OFF indicator light will turn off. When the shift lever is shifted to any position other than D (Drive), the overdrive OFF mode will be automatically turned off.
5-20 Starting and driving
OFF position:
For normal driving and fuel economy, use the OFF position.
ON position:
For driving up or down long slopes where engine braking is necessary, or for powerful acceleration, use the ON position. The transmission will automatically select a different gear ratio, allowing the engine to provide high output.
Remember not to drive at high speeds for extended periods of time with the overdrive OFF mode in the ON position. This reduces fuel economy.
Accelerator downshift -- in D (Drive) position --
For passing or hill climbing, depress the accelerator pedal to the floor. This shifts the transmission down into a lower gear, depending on the vehicle speed.
High fluid temperature protection mode
This transmission has a high fluid temperature protection mode. If the fluid temperature becomes too high (for example, when climbing steep grades in high temperatures with heavy loads, such as when towing a trailer), engine power and, under some conditions, vehicle speed will be decreased automatically to reduce the chance of transmission damage. Vehicle speed can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, but the engine and vehicle speed may be limited.
Fail-safe
If the vehicle is driven under extreme conditions, such as excessive wheel spinning and subsequent hard braking, the fail-safe system may be activated. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may come on to indicate the fail-safe mode is activated. For additional information, refer to "Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual. This will occur even if all electrical circuits are functioning properly. In this case, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait for 10 seconds. Then push the
PARKING BRAKE
switch back to the ON position. The vehicle should return to its normal operating condition. If it does not return to its normal operating condition, have the transmission checked and repaired, if necessary. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
WARNING
When the high fluid temperature protection mode or fail-safe operation occurs, vehicle speed may be gradually reduced. The reduced speed may be lower than other traffic, which could increase the chance of a collision. Be especially careful when driving. If necessary, pull to the side of the road at a safe place and allow the transmission to return to normal operation, or have it repaired if necessary.
WARNING
Be sure the parking brake is fully released before driving. Failure to do so can cause brake failure and lead to an accident.
Do not release the parking brake from outside the vehicle.
Do not use the shift lever in place of the parking brake. When parking, be sure the parking brake is fully engaged.
To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
WSD0169
To engage: Pull the lever up A .
To release:
1. Firmly apply the foot brake.
2. Move the shift lever to the P (Park) position.
3. While pulling up on the parking brake lever slightly, press the button and
lower completely B .
4. Before driving, be sure the brake warning light goes out.
Starting and driving 5-21
BLIND SPOT WARNING (BSW) (if so equipped)
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the BSW system could result in serious injury or death.
The BSW system is not a replacement for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When changing lanes, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move to ensure it is safe to change lanes. Never rely solely on the BSW system.
The BSW system helps alert the driver of other vehicles in adjacent lanes when changing lanes.
LSD3090
The BSW system uses radar sensors 1
installed near the rear bumper to detect other vehicles in an adjacent lane.
SSD1030
Detection zone
The radar sensors can detect vehicles on either side of your vehicle within the detection zone shown as illustrated. This detection zone starts from the outside mirror of your vehicle and extends approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) behind the rear bumper, and approximately 10 ft (3.0 m) sideways.
5-22 Starting and driving
LSD3204
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
2. BSW Indicator
BSW SYSTEM OPERATION
The BSW system operates above approximately 20 mph (32 km/h).
If the radar sensors detect a vehicle in the detection zone, the side BSW/RCTA indicator light (1) illuminates. If the turn signal is then activated, the system chimes (twice) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes. The side BSW/RCTA indicator light continues to flash until the detected vehicle leaves the detection zone.
The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates for a few seconds when the ignition switch is placed in the ON position.
The brightness of the side BSW/RCTA indicator light is adjusted automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
If a vehicle comes into the detection zone after the driver activates the turn signal, then only the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes and no chime sounds. For additional information, refer to "BSW driving situations" in this section.
Starting and driving 5-23
5-24 Starting and driving
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE BSW SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the BSW system.
1. Press the
button until "Settings"
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the
button to select
"Driver Assistance." Then press the OK
button.
2. Select "Blind Spot" and press the OK button.
3. Select "Blind Spot Warning" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
When enabling/disabling the system, the system will retain current settings even if the engine is restarted.
When the BSW system is turned on, the BSW indicator (white) in the vehicle information display illuminates.
LSD3149
BSW SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the BSW system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
The BSW system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
The radar sensors may not be able to detect and activate BSW when certain objects are present such as:
Pedestrian, bicycles, animals.
Vehicles such as motorcycles, low height vehicles, or high ground clearance vehicles.
Oncoming vehicles.
Vehicles remaining in the detection zone when you accelerate from a stop.
A vehicle merging into an adjacent lane at a speed approximately the same as your vehicle.
A vehicle approaching rapidly from behind.
A vehicle which your vehicle overtakes rapidly.
A vehicle that passes through the detection zone quickly.
When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
The radar sensors' detection zone is designed based on a standard lane width. When driving in a wider lane, the radar sensors may not detect vehicles in an adjacent lane. When driving in a narrow lane, the radar sensors may detect vehicles driving two lanes away.
The radar sensors are designed to ignore most stationary objects, however objects such as guardrails, walls, foliage and parked vehicles may occasionally be detected. This is a normal operation condition.
The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
Severe weather
Road spray
Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
Excessive noise (for example, audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
Starting and driving 5-25
Another vehicle approaching from behind
Illustration 1: The side BSW/RCTA indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from behind in an adjacent lane.
LSD2299
Illustration 1 Approaching from behind
BSW DRIVING SITUATIONS
Indicator on Indicator off Indicator flashing
5-26 Starting and driving
LSD2300
Illustration 2 Approaching from behind Illustration 2: If the driver activates the turn signal when another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE: The radar sensors may not detect vehicles which are approaching rapidly from behind.
If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.
If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.
LSD2302
Illustration 3 Overtaking another vehicle
Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 3: The side indicator light illuminates if you overtake a vehicle and that vehicle stays in the detection zone for approximately 2 seconds.
LSD2303
Illustration 4 Overtaking another vehicle
Illustration 4: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
When overtaking several vehicles in a row, the vehicles after the first vehicle may not be detected if they are traveling close together.
The radar sensors may not detect slower moving vehicles if they are passed quickly.
Starting and driving 5-27
The radar sensors may not detect a vehicle which is traveling at about the same speed as your vehicle when it enters the detection zone.
LSD2305
Illustration 5 Entering from the side
Entering from the side
Illustration 5: The side indicator light illuminates if a vehicle enters the detection zone from either side.
LSD2308
Illustration 6 Entering from the side Illustration 6: If the driver activates the turn signal while another vehicle is in the detection zone, then the system chimes (twice) and the side indicator light flashes.
NOTE:
If the driver activates the turn signal before a vehicle enters the detection zone, the side indicator light will flash but no chime will sound when the other vehicle is detected.
5-28 Starting and driving
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
The system is not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog. The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Action to take:
When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
If the BSW system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message with the BSW indicator (orange) will appear in the vehicle information display.
LSD3205
Starting and driving 5-29
Action to take: Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-30 Starting and driving
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
LSD3090
The two radar sensors 1 for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Droit applicable: Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts
REAR CROSS TRAFFIC ALERT (RCTA) (if so equipped)
WARNING Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the RCTA could result in serious injury or death. The RCTA system is not a replacement
for proper driving procedures and is not designed to prevent contact with vehicles or objects. When backing out of a parking space, always use the side and rear mirrors and turn and look in the direction your vehicle will move. Never rely solely on the RCTA system. The RCTA system will assist you when backing out from a parking space. When the vehicle is in reverse, the system is designed to detect other vehicles approaching from the right or left of the vehicle. If the system detects cross traffic, it will alert you.
Starting and driving 5-31
5-32 Starting and driving
1. Side BSW/RCTA Indicator Light
RCTA SYSTEM OPERATION
The RCTA system can help alert the driver of an approaching vehicle when the driver is backing out of a parking space. When the shift position is in R (Reverse) and the vehicle speed is less than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h), the RCTA system is operational. If the radar detects an approaching vehicle from either side, the system chimes (once) and the side BSW/RCTA indicator light flashes on the side the vehicle is approaching from.
LSD3206
LSD2216
The RCTA system uses radar sensors 1
installed on both sides near the rear bumper to detect an approaching vehicle.
The radar sensors 1 can detect an ap-
proaching vehicle from up to approximately 66 ft. (20 m) away.
LSD3090
Starting and driving 5-33
5-34 Starting and driving
HOW TO ENABLE/DISABLE THE RCTA SYSTEM
Perform the following steps to enable or disable the RCTA system.
1. Press the
button until "Settings"
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the
button to select
"Driver Assistance." Then press the OK
button.
2. Select "Parking Aids" and press the OK button.
3. Select "Rear Cross Traffic Alert" and press the OK button to turn the system on or off.
NOTE:
When enabling/disabling the system, the system setting will be retained even if the engine is restarted.
LSD3152
RCTA SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
LSD3195
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the RCTA system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
Always check surroundings and turn to check what is behind you before backing up. The radar sensors detect approaching (moving) vehicles. The radar sensors cannot detect every object such as:
Pedestrians, bicycles, motorcycles, animals or child-operated toy vehicles
A vehicle that is passing at speeds greater than approximately 19 mph (30 km/h)
A vehicle that is passing at speeds lower than approximately 5 mph (8 km/h)
The radar sensors may not detect approaching vehicles in certain situations:
Illustration A : When a vehicle
parked next to you obstructs the beam of the radar sensor.
Starting and driving 5-35
Illustration B : When the vehicle is
parked in an angled parking space.
Illustration C : When the vehicle is
parked on inclined ground.
Illustration D : When an approach-
ing vehicle turns into your vehicle's parking lot aisle.
Illustration E : When the angle
formed by your vehicle and approaching vehicle is small.
The following conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles:
Severe weather
Road spray
Ice/frost/snow/dirt build-up on the vehicle
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors. These conditions may reduce the ability of the radar to detect other vehicles.
Excessive noise (e.g., audio system volume, open vehicle window) will interfere with the chime sound, and it may not be heard.
NOTE:
Illustration 1
LSD2043
In the case of several vehicles approaching in a row (Illustration 1) or in the opposite direction (Illustration 2), a chime may not be sounded by the RCTA system after the first vehicle passes the sensors.
5-36 Starting and driving
Illustration 2
LSD2044
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
When radar blockage is detected, the system will be deactivated automatically. The "Side Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
The systems are not available until the conditions no longer exist.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the system will resume automatically.
Malfunction
When the RCTA system malfunctions, it will turn off automatically. The system malfunction warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
LSD3205
Starting and driving 5-37
Action to take Stop the vehicle in a safe location, place the vehicle in the P (Park) position, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the message continues to appear, have the system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-38 Starting and driving
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
LSD3090
The two radar sensors 1 for the BSW and
RCTA systems are located near the rear bumper. Always keep the area near the radar sensors clean.
The radar sensors may be blocked by temporary ambient conditions such as splashing water, mist or fog.
The blocked condition may also be caused by objects such as ice, frost or dirt obstructing the radar sensors.
Check for and remove objects obstructing the area around the radar sensors.
Do not attach stickers (including transparent material), install accessories or apply additional paint near the radar sensors.
Do not strike or damage the area around the radar sensors. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if the area around the radar sensors is damaged due to a collision.
Radio frequency statement
For USA
FCC ID: OAYSRR2B or OAYSRR3B
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
CRUISE CONTROL
For Canada
Applicable law: Canada 310
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
Frequency bands: 24.05 24.25GHz
Output power: less than 20 milliwatts
Droit applicable: Canada 310
Le présent appareil est conforme aux CNR d'Industrie Canada applicables aux appareils radio exempts de licence. L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. L'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage, et
2. L'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnement.
Bandes de fréquences: 24.05 - 24.25GHz Puissance émise: Moins de 20 milliwatts
1 RES+ switch 2 CANCEL switch 3 SET- switch 4 CRUISE ON/OFF switch
PRECAUTIONS ON CRUISE CONTROL
LSD3131
If the cruise control system malfunctions, it cancels automatically.
To properly set the cruise control system, use the following procedures.
Starting and driving 5-39
WARNING
Do not use the cruise control when driving under the following conditions:
When it is not possible to keep the vehicle at a set speed.
In heavy traffic or in traffic that varies in speed.
On winding or hilly roads.
On slippery roads (rain, snow, ice, etc.).
In very windy areas.
Doing so could cause a loss of vehicle control and result in an accident.
CRUISE CONTROL OPERATIONS
The cruise control allows driving at a speed between 25 - 89 mph (40 - 144 km/h) without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal.
To turn on the cruise control, push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The CRUISE indica-
tor light or
indicator in the instrument
panel comes on.
To set cruising speed, accelerate the vehicle to the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it. The SET indicator
light or
indicator in the instrument
5-40 Starting and driving
panel comes on. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal. Your vehicle maintains the set speed.
To pass another vehicle, depress the accelerator pedal. When you release the pedal, the vehicle returns to the previously set speed.
The vehicle may not maintain the set speed when going up or down steep hills. If this happens, drive without the cruise control.
To cancel the preset speed, use one of the following three methods:
Push the CANCEL switch; the CRUISE
indicator light or
indicator in the
instrument panel goes out.
Tap the brake pedal; the CRUISE indica-
tor light or
indicator goes out.
Push the CRUISE ON/OFF switch. The
CRUISE indicator light or
indicator
in the instrument panel goes out.
The cruise control is automatically can-
celed and the CRUISE indicator light
or
indicator in the instrument panel
goes out if:
You depress the brake pedal while pushing the RES+ or SET switch. The preset speed is deleted from memory.
The vehicle slows down more than 8 mph (13 km/h) below the set speed.
You move the shift lever to N (Neutral).
To reset at a faster cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
Depress the accelerator pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push and release the SET switch.
Push and hold the RES+ switch. When the vehicle attains the speed you desire, release the switch.
Push and release the RES+ switch. Each time you do this, the set speed increases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To reset at a slower cruising speed, use one of the following three methods:
Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle attains the desired speed, push the SET switch and release it.
Push and hold the SET switch. Release the switch when the vehicle slows to the desired speed.
AUTOMATIC EMERGENCY BRAKING (AEB) (if so equipped)
Push and release the SET switch. Each time you do this, the set speed decreases by about 1 mph (1.6 km/h).
To resume the preset speed, push and release the RES+ switch. The vehicle returns to the last set cruising speed when the vehicle speed is over 25 mph (40 km/h).
WARNING
Failure to follow the warnings and instructions for proper use of the AEB system could result in serious injury or death.
The AEB system is a supplemental aid to the driver. It is not a replacement for the driver's attention to traffic conditions or responsibility to drive safely. It cannot prevent accidents due to carelessness or dangerous driving techniques.
The AEB system does not function in all driving, traffic, weather and road conditions.
The AEB system can assist the driver when there is a risk of a forward collision with the vehicle ahead in the traveling lane.
LSD2710
The AEB system uses a radar sensor A
located on the front of the vehicle to measure the distance to the vehicle ahead in the same lane.
Starting and driving 5-41
5-42 Starting and driving
LSD3155
LSD3154
1. Vehicle ahead detection indicator (if so equipped)
2. AEB emergency warning indicator (if so equipped)
3. AEB system warning light
AEB SYSTEM OPERATION
The AEB system will function when your vehicle is driven at speeds above approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).
If a risk of a forward collision is detected, the AEB system will provide an initial warning to the driver by both a visual (if so equipped) and audible alert.
If the driver applies the brakes quickly and forcefully after the warning, and the AEB system detects that there is still the possibility of a forward collision, the system will automatically increase the braking force. If the driver does not take action, the AEB system issues the second visual warning (red) (if so equipped) and audible warning and also applies partial braking.
If the risk of a collision becomes imminent, the AEB system applies harder braking automatically.
NOTE:
The vehicle's brake lights come on when braking is performed by the AEB system.
Depending on vehicle speed and distance to the vehicle ahead, as well as driving and roadway conditions, the system may help the driver avoid a forward collision or may help mitigate the consequences of a collision, should one be unavoidable. If the driver is handling the steering wheel, accelerating or braking, the AEB system will function later or will not function.
The automatic braking will cease under the following conditions:
When the steering wheel is turned as far as necessary to avoid a collision.
When the accelerator pedal is depressed.
When there is no longer a vehicle detected ahead.
If the AEB system has stopped the vehicle, the vehicle will remain at a standstill for approximately 2 seconds before the brakes are released.
Starting and driving 5-43
5-44 Starting and driving
LSD3146
LSD3147
TURNING THE AEB SYSTEM ON/OFF
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB system on or off in the vehicle information display (if so equipped).
1. Press the
button until "Settings"
displays in the vehicle information dis-
play. Use the
button to select
"Driver Assistance." Then press the OK
button.
2. Select "Emergency Brake" and press the OK button.
3. Select "System" and press the OK button.
Perform the following steps to turn the AEB system on or off using the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB) switch (if so equipped) for models with a trip computer.
1. Push the AEB switch to turn the AEB system on and the switch illuminates.
2. Push the AEB switch again to turn the AEB system off.
When the AEB system is turned off, the AEB system warning light illuminates.
NOTE:
The AEB system will be automatically turned on when the engine is restarted.
AEB SYSTEM LIMITATIONS
WARNING
Listed below are the system limitations for the AEB system. Failure to operate the vehicle in accordance with these system limitations could result in serious injury or death.
The AEB system cannot detect all vehicles under all conditions.
The radar sensor does not detect the following objects:
Pedestrians, animals or obstacles in the roadway.
Oncoming vehicles.
Crossing vehicles.
The radar sensor has some performance limitations. If a stationary vehicle is in the vehicle's path, the AEB system will not function when the vehicle is driven at speeds over approximately 50 mph (80 km/h).
The radar sensor may not detect a vehicle ahead in the following conditions:
Dirt, ice, snow or other material covering the radar sensor.
Interference by other radar sources.
Snow or road spray from traveling vehicles.
If the vehicle ahead is narrow (e.g., motorcycle).
When driving on a steep downhill slope or roads with sharp curves.
In some road or traffic conditions, the AEB system may unexpectedly apply partial braking. When acceleration is necessary, continue to depress the accelerator pedal to override the system.
Braking distances increase on slippery surfaces.
Starting and driving 5-45
The system is designed to automatically check the sensor's functionality, within certain limitations. The system may not detect some forms of obstructions of the sensor area such as ice, snow, stickers, etc. In these cases, the system may not be able to warn the driver properly. Be sure that you check, clean and clear the sensor area regularly.
Excessive noise will interfere with the warning chime sound, and the chime may not be heard.
5-46 Starting and driving
LSD3148
LSD3153
SYSTEM TEMPORARILY UNAVAILABLE
Condition A When the radar sensor picks up interference from another radar source, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate. Action to take When the above conditions no longer exist, the AEB system will resume automatically. Condition B When the sensor area of the front bumper is covered with dirt or is obstructed, making it impossible to detect a vehicle ahead, the AEB system is automatically turned off. The AEB system warning light (orange) will illuminate and the "Front Radar Obstruction" warning message will appear in the vehicle information display.
Starting and driving 5-47
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place, place the shift lever in the P (Park) position and turn the engine off. Clean the radar cover on the lower grille with a soft cloth, and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
SYSTEM MALFUNCTION
If the AEB system malfunctions, it will be turned off automatically, a chime will sound, the AEB warning light (orange) will illuminate and the warning message [Malfunction] will appear in the vehicle information display.
Action to take
If the warning light (orange) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe location, turn the engine off and restart the engine. If the warning light continues to illuminate, have the AEB system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
5-48 Starting and driving
SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
LSD2710
The sensor A is located on the front of the
vehicle.
To keep the system operating properly, be sure to observe the following:
Always keep the sensor area of the front bumper clean.
Do not strike or damage the areas around the sensor.
Do not cover or attach stickers or similar objects on the front bumper near the sensor area. This could cause failure or malfunction.
Do not attach metallic objects near the sensor area (brush guard, etc.). This could cause failure or malfunction.
Do not alter, remove or paint the front bumper. Before customizing or restoring the front bumper, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
FCC Notice
For USA
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and
2. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
FCC Warning
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
BREAK-IN SCHEDULE
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
Radio Frequency Radiation Exposure Information:
This equipment complies with FCC radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This equipment should be installed and operated with minimum distance of 20 cm between the radiator and your body.
The transmitter must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
For Canada
This device complies with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
1. This device must not cause interference,
2. This device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
L'exploitation est autorisée aux deux conditions suivantes:
1. l'appareil ne doit pas produire de brouillage,
et
2. l'utilisateur de l'appareil doit accepter tout brouillage radioélectrique subi, même si le brouillage est susceptible d'en compromettre le fonctionnnement.
CAUTION
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km), follow these recommendations to obtain maximum engine performance and ensure the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in shortened engine life and reduced engine performance.
Avoid driving for long periods at constant speed, either fast or slow, and do not run the engine over 4,000 rpm.
Do not accelerate at full throttle in any gear.
Avoid quick starts.
Avoid hard braking as much as possible.
Starting and driving 5-49
FUEL EFFICIENT DRIVING TIPS
Follow these easy-to-use Fuel Efficient Driving Tips to help you achieve the most fuel economy from your vehicle.
1. Use Smooth Accelerator and Brake Pedal Application Avoid rapid starts and stops. Use smooth, gentle accelerator and brake application whenever possible. Maintain constant speed while commuting and coast whenever possible.
2. Maintain Constant Speed Look ahead to try and anticipate and minimize stops. Synchronizing your speed with traffic lights allows you to reduce your number of stops. Maintaining a steady speed can minimize red light stops and improve fuel efficiency.
5-50 Starting and driving
3. Use Air Conditioning (A/C) at Higher Vehicle Speeds
Below 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to open windows to cool the vehicle due to reduced engine load.
Above 40 mph (64 km/h), it is more efficient to use A/C to cool the vehicle due to increased aerodynamic drag.
Recirculating the cool air in the cabin when the A/C is on reduces cooling load.
4. Drive at Economical Speeds and Distances
Observing the speed limit and not exceeding 60 mph (97 km/h) (where legally allowed) can improve fuel efficiency due to reduced aerodynamic drag.
Maintaining a safe following distance behind other vehicles reduces unnecessary braking.
Safely monitoring traffic to anticipate changes in speed permits reduced braking and smooth acceleration changes.
Select a gear range suitable to road conditions.
5. Use Cruise Control
Using cruise control during highway driving helps maintain a steady speed.
Cruise control is particularly effective in providing fuel savings when driving on flat terrains.
6. Plan for the Shortest Route
Utilize a map or navigation system to determine the best route to save time.
7. Avoid Idling
Shutting off your engine when safe for stops exceeding 3060 seconds saves fuel and reduces emissions.
8. Buy an Automated Pass for Toll Roads
Automated passes permit drivers to use special lanes to maintain cruising speed through the toll and avoid stopping and starting.
INCREASING FUEL ECONOMY
9. Winter Warm Up
Limit idling time to minimize impact to fuel economy.
Vehicles typically need no more than 30 seconds of idling at start-up to effectively circulate the engine oil before driving.
Your vehicle will reach its ideal operating temperature more quickly while driving versus idling.
10. Keeping your Vehicle Cool
Park your vehicle in a covered parking area or in the shade whenever possible.
When entering a hot vehicle, opening the windows will help to reduce the inside temperature faster, resulting in reduced demand on your A/C system.
Keep your engine tuned up.
Follow the recommended scheduled maintenance.
Keep the tires inflated to the correct pressure. Low tire pressure increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
Keep the wheels in correct alignment. Improper alignment increases tire wear and lowers fuel economy.
Use the recommended viscosity engine oil. For additional information, refer to "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
Starting and driving 5-51
PARKING/PARKING ON HILLS
WARNING
Do not stop or park the vehicle over flammable materials such as dry grass, waste paper or rags. They may ignite and cause a fire.
SSD0488
Safe parking procedures require that both the parking brake be set and the transmission placed in P (Park). Failure to do so could cause the vehicle to move unexpectedly or roll away and result in an accident. Make sure the shift lever has been pushed as far forward as it can go and cannot be moved without depressing the foot brake pedal.
Never leave the engine running while the vehicle is unattended.
Do not leave children unattended inside the vehicle. They could unknowingly activate switches or controls or move the vehicle. Unattended children could become involved in serious accidents.
To help avoid risk of injury or death through unintended operation of the vehicle and/or its systems, do not leave children, people who require the assistance of others or pets unattended in your vehicle. Additionally, the temperature inside a closed vehicle on a warm day can quickly become high enough to cause a significant risk of injury or death to people and pets.
1. Firmly apply the parking brake.
2. Move the shift lever into the P (Park) position.
3. To help prevent the vehicle from rolling into traffic when parked on an incline, it is a good practice to turn the wheels as illustrated.
5-52 Starting and driving
POWER STEERING
HEADED DOWNHILL WITH CURB 1 :
Turn the wheels into the curb and move the vehicle forward until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
HEADED UPHILL WITH CURB 2 :
Turn the wheels away from the curb and move the vehicle back until the curb side wheel gently touches the curb.
HEADED UPHILL OR DOWNHILL, NO
CURB 3 :
Turn the wheels toward the side of the road so the vehicle will move away from the center of the road if it moves.
4. Place the ignition switch in the LOCK position and remove the key.
WARNING
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the steering will not work. Steering will be harder to operate.
When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering. You will still have control of the vehicle but the steering will be harder to operate. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
The power steering system is designed to provide power assist while driving to operate the steering wheel with light force.
When the steering wheel is operated repeatedly or continuously while parking or driving at a very low speed, the power assist for the steering wheel will be reduced. This is to prevent overheating of the power steering system and protect it from getting damaged. While the power assist is reduced, steering wheel operation will become heavy. When the temperature of the power steering system goes down, the power assist level will return to normal. Avoid repeating such steering wheel op-
erations that could cause the power steering system to overheat. You may hear a sound when the steering wheel is operated quickly. However, this is not a malfunction. If the power steering warning light illuminates while the engine is running, it may indicate the power steering system is not functioning properly and may need servicing. Have the power steering system checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. When the power steering warning light illuminates with the engine running, there will be no power assist for the steering but you will still have control of the vehicle. At this time, greater steering effort is required to operate the steering wheel, especially in sharp turns and at low speeds. For additional information, refer to "Power steering warning light" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
Starting and driving 5-53
BRAKE SYSTEM
The brake system has two separate hydraulic circuits. If one circuit malfunctions, you will still have braking at two wheels.
BRAKE PRECAUTIONS
Vacuum assisted brakes
The brake booster aids braking by using engine vacuum. If the engine stops, you can stop the vehicle by depressing the brake pedal. However, greater foot pressure on the brake pedal will be required to stop the vehicle and stopping distance will be longer.
Using the brakes
Avoid resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving. This will overheat the brakes, wear out the brake pads faster, and reduce gas mileage.
To help reduce brake wear and to prevent the brakes from overheating, reduce speed and downshift to a lower gear before going down a slope or long grade. Overheated brakes may reduce braking performance and could result in loss of vehicle control.
5-54 Starting and driving
WARNING
While driving on a slippery surface, be careful when braking, accelerating or downshifting. Abrupt braking or accelerating could cause the wheels to skid and result in an accident.
If the engine is not running or is turned off while driving, the power assist for the brakes will not work. Braking will be harder.
Wet brakes
When the vehicle is washed or driven through water, the brakes may get wet. As a result, your braking distance will be longer and the vehicle may pull to one side during braking.
To dry the brakes, drive the vehicle at a safe speed while lightly pressing the brake pedal to heat up the brakes. Do this until the brakes return to normal. Avoid driving the vehicle at high speeds until the brakes function correctly.
Parking brake break-in
Break in the parking brake shoes whenever the stopping effect of the parking brake is weakened or whenever the parking brake
shoes and/or drums/rotors are replaced, in order to assure the best braking performance.
This procedure is described in the vehicle service manual. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
ANTI-LOCK BRAKING SYSTEM (ABS)
WARNING
The ABS is a sophisticated device, but it cannot prevent accidents resulting from careless or dangerous driving techniques. It can help maintain vehicle control during braking on slippery surfaces. Remember that stopping distances on slippery surfaces will be longer than on normal surfaces even with ABS. Stopping distances may also be longer on rough, gravel or snow covered roads, or if you are using tire chains. Always maintain a safe distance from the vehicle in front of you. Ultimately, the driver is responsible for safety.
Tire type and condition may also affect braking effectiveness.
When replacing tires, install the specified size of tires on all four wheels.
When installing a spare tire, make sure that it is the proper size and type as specified on the Tire and Loading Information label. For additional information, refer to "Tire and Loading Information label" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
For additional information, refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "Do-ityourself " section of this manual.
The ABS controls the brakes so the wheels do not lock during hard braking or when braking on slippery surfaces. The system detects the rotation speed at each wheel and varies the brake fluid pressure to prevent each wheel from locking and sliding. By preventing each wheel from locking, the system helps the driver maintain steering control and helps to minimize swerving and spinning on slippery surfaces.
Using the system
Depress the brake pedal and hold it down. Depress the brake pedal with firm steady pressure, but do not pump the brakes. The
Anti-lock Braking System will operate to prevent the wheels from locking up. Steer the vehicle to avoid obstacles.
WARNING
Do not pump the brake pedal. Doing so may result in increased stopping distances.
Self-test feature
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) includes electronic sensors, electric pumps, hydraulic solenoids and a computer. The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle at a low speed in forward or reverse. When the selftest occurs, you may hear a "clunk" noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction. If the computer senses a malfunction, it switches the ABS off and illuminates the ABS warning light on the instrument panel. The brake system then operates normally but without anti-lock assistance.
If the ABS warning light illuminates during the self-test or while driving, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Normal operation
The Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) operates at speeds above 3 - 6 mph (5 10 km/h). The speed varies according to road conditions.
When the ABS senses that one or more wheels are close to locking up, the actuator rapidly applies and releases hydraulic pressure. This action is similar to pumping the brakes very quickly. You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise from under the hood or feel a vibration from the actuator when it is operating. This is normal and indicates that the ABS is operating properly. However, the pulsation may indicate that road conditions are hazardous and extra care is required while driving.
BRAKE ASSIST
When the force applied to the brake pedal exceeds a certain level, the Brake Assist is activated generating greater braking force than a conventional brake booster even with light pedal force.
Starting and driving 5-55
VEHICLE DYNAMIC CONTROL (VDC) SYSTEM
WARNING The Brake Assist is only an aid to assist braking operation and is not a collision warning or avoidance device. It is the driver's responsibility to stay alert, drive safely and be in control of the vehicle at all times.
5-56 Starting and driving
The VDC system uses various sensors to monitor driver inputs and vehicle motion. Under certain driving conditions, the VDC system helps to perform the following functions:
Controls brake pressure to reduce wheel slip on one slipping drive wheel so power is transferred to a nonslipping drive wheel on the same axle.
Controls brake pressure and engine output to reduce drive wheel slip based on vehicle speed (traction control function).
Controls brake pressure at individual wheels and engine output to help the driver maintain control of the vehicle in the following conditions:
Understeer (vehicle tends to not follow the steered path despite increased steering input)
Oversteer (vehicle tends to spin due to certain road or driving conditions)
The VDC system can help the driver to maintain control of the vehicle, but it cannot prevent loss of vehicle control in all driving situations.
When the VDC system operates, the indicator light in the instrument panel flashes so note the following:
The road may be slippery or the system may determine some action is required to help keep the vehicle on the steered path.
You may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise or vibration from under the hood. This is normal and indicates that the VDC system is working properly.
Adjust your speed and driving to the road conditions.
For additional information, refer to "Slip indicator light" and "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF indicator light" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
If a malfunction occurs in the system,
the
indicator light comes on in the
instrument panel. The VDC system auto-
matically turns off when these indicator
lights are on.
The VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the
VDC system. The
indicator light and
the Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB)
system warning light illuminate to indicate
the VDC system is off.
When the VDC switch is used to turn off the
system, the VDC system still operates to prevent one drive wheel from slipping by
transferring power to a non-slipping drive
wheel. The
indicator light flashes if
this occurs. All other VDC functions are off
and the
indicator light will not flash.
The VDC system is automatically reset to
on when the ignition switch is placed in the OFF position then back to the ON position.
The computer has a built-in diagnostic feature that tests the system each time you start the engine and move the vehicle forward or in reverse at a slow speed. When the self-test occurs, you may hear a clunk noise and/or feel a pulsation in the brake pedal. This is normal and is not an indication of a malfunction.
WARNING
The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
Do not modify the vehicle's suspension. If suspension parts such as shock absorbers, struts, springs, stabilizer bars, bushings and wheels are not NISSAN recommended for your vehicle or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator light may flash or
illuminate.
If brake related parts such as brake
pads, rotors and calipers are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the VDC system
may not operate properly and
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the
indi-
cator light may illuminate.
When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads.
When driving on an unstable surface
such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator light may
flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-
function. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.
If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate.
The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
BRAKE FORCE DISTRIBUTION
During braking while driving through turns, the system optimizes the distribution of force to each of the front and rear wheels depending on the radius of the turn.
Starting and driving 5-57
WARNING
The VDC system is designed to help the driver maintain stability but does not prevent accidents due to abrupt steering operation at high speeds or by careless or dangerous driving techniques. Reduce vehicle speed and be especially careful when driving and cornering on slippery surfaces and always drive carefully.
Do not modify the vehicle's suspen-
sion. If suspension parts such as
shock absorbers, struts, springs, sta-
bilizer bars, bushings and wheels are
not NISSAN recommended for your
vehicle or are extremely deteriorated,
the VDC system may not operate
properly. This could adversely affect
vehicle handling performance, and
the
indicator light may flash or
illuminate.
If brake related parts such as brake pads, rotors and calipers are not NISSAN recommended or are extremely deteriorated, the VDC system may not operate properly and
the
indicator light may
illuminate.
If engine control related parts are not
NISSAN recommended or are ex-
tremely deteriorated, the
indi-
cator light may illuminate.
When driving on extremely inclined surfaces such as higher banked corners, the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate. Do not drive
on these types of roads.
When driving on an unstable surface such as a turntable, ferry, elevator or
ramp, the
indicator light may
flash or illuminate. This is not a mal-
function. Restart the engine after
driving onto a stable surface.
If wheels or tires other than the
NISSAN recommended ones are used,
the VDC system may not operate
properly and the
indicator light
may flash or illuminate.
The VDC system is not a substitute for winter tires or tire chains on a snow covered road.
5-58 Starting and driving
CHASSIS CONTROL (if so equipped)
information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
The chassis control is an electric control module that includes the following functions:
Intelligent Trace Control
Intelligent Engine Brake
Active Ride Control
INTELLIGENT TRACE CONTROL (I-TC)
This system senses driving based on the driver's steering and acceleration/braking patterns, and controls brake pressure at individual wheels to aid tracing at corners and help smooth vehicle response.
LSD2185
The ITC can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle information display "Chassis Control" page. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system, the ITC is also turned off.
When the ITC is operated and the Chassis Control mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the ITC graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle
WARNING
The ITC may not be effective depending on the driving condition. Always drive carefully and attentively.
When the ITC is operating, you may feel a pulsation in the brake pedal and hear a noise. This is normal and indicates that the ITC is operating properly.
Even if the ITC is set to OFF, some functions will remain on to assist the driver (for example, avoidance scenes).
INTELLIGENT ENGINE BRAKE (I-EB)
The I-EB function adds subtle deceleration by controlling the Continuously Variable Transmission gear ratio, depending on the cornering condition calculated from driver's steering input and plural sensors. This benefit is for easier traceability and less workload of adjusting speed with braking at corners.
The I-EB also adds subtle deceleration with gear ratio control according to driver's brake pedal operation.
Starting and driving 5-59
HILL START ASSIST SYSTEM
The I-EB can be set to ON (enabled) or OFF (disabled) through the vehicle information display "Chassis Control" page. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
When the I-EB is operated at corners and the Chassis Control mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the I-EB graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
WARNING
The I-EB may not be effective depending on driving conditions. Always drive carefully and attentively.
When the I-EB is operating, the needle of the tachometer will rise up and you may hear an engine noise. This is normal and indicates that the I-EB is operating properly.
ACTIVE RIDE CONTROL (ARC)
This system senses upper body motion based on wheel speed information and controls four wheel brake pressure to enhance ride comfort in effort to restrain uncomfortable upper body movement. This system comes into effect above 25 mph (40 km/h). When the VDC OFF switch is used to turn off the VDC system, the ARC is also turned off.
When the brake control of the ARC is operated and the Chassis Control mode is selected in the vehicle information display, the ARC graphics are shown in the vehicle information display. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle information display" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
When the ARC is operating, you may hear noise and sense slight deceleration. This is normal and indicates that the ARC is operating properly.
5-60 Starting and driving
WARNING
Never rely solely on the hill start assist system to prevent the vehicle from moving backward on a hill. Always drive carefully and attentively. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Be especially careful when stopped on a hill on frozen or muddy roads. Failure to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards may result in a loss of control of the vehicle and possible serious injury or death.
The hill start assist system is not designed to hold the vehicle at a standstill on a hill. Depress the brake pedal when the vehicle is stopped on a steep hill. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll backwards and may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
The hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards on a hill under all load or road conditions. Always be prepared to depress the brake pedal to prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards. Failure to do so may result in a collision or serious personal injury.
COLD WEATHER DRIVING
The hill start assist system automatically keeps the brakes applied to help prevent the vehicle from rolling backwards in the time it takes the driver to release the brake pedal and apply the accelerator when the vehicle is stopped on a hill.
The hill start assist system will operate automatically under the following conditions:
The transmission is shifted to a forward or reverse gear.
The vehicle is stopped completely on a hill by applying the brake.
The maximum holding time is 2 seconds. After 2 seconds the vehicle will begin to roll back and the hill start assist system will stop operating completely.
The hill start assist system will not operate when the transmission is shifted to the N (Neutral) or P (Park) position or on a flat and level road.
When the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) indicator light illuminates in the meter, the hill start assist system will not operate. For additional information, refer to "Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) indicator light" in the "Instruments and controls" section of this manual.
FREEING A FROZEN DOOR LOCK
To prevent a door lock from freezing, apply de-icer through the key hole. If the lock becomes frozen, heat the key before inserting it into the key hole or use the remote keyless entry function on the Intelligent Key.
ANTIFREEZE
In the winter when it is anticipated that the temperature will drop below 32°F (0°C), check the antifreeze to assure proper winter protection. For additional information, refer to "Engine cooling system" in the "Doit-yourself " section of this manual.
BATTERY
If the battery is not fully charged during extremely cold weather conditions, the battery fluid may freeze and damage the battery. To maintain maximum efficiency, the battery should be checked regularly. This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.
DRAINING OF COOLANT WATER
If the vehicle is to be left outside without antifreeze, drain the cooling system, including the engine block. Refill before operating the vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Changing engine coolant" in the "Do-ityourself" section of this manual.
TIRE EQUIPMENT
1. SUMMER tires have a tread designed to provide superior performance on dry pavement. However, the performance of these tires will be substantially reduced in snowy and icy conditions. If you operate your vehicle on snowy or icy roads, NISSAN recommends the use of MUD & SNOW or ALL SEASON TIRES on all four wheels. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for the tire type, size, speed rating and availability information.
2. For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some states, provinces and territories prohibit their use. Check local laws before installing studded tires.
Starting and driving 5-61
Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of non-studded snow tires.
SPECIAL WINTER EQUIPMENT
It is recommended that the following items be carried in the vehicle during winter:
A scraper and stiff-bristled brush to remove ice and snow from the windows and wiper blades.
A sturdy, flat board to be placed under the jack to give it firm support.
A shovel to dig the vehicle out of snowdrifts.
Extra washer fluid to refill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir.
DRIVING ON SNOW OR ICE
WARNING
Wet ice (32°F, 0°C and freezing rain), very cold snow or ice can be slick and very hard to drive on. The vehicle will have much less traction or "grip" under these conditions. Try to avoid driving on wet ice until the road is salted or sanded.
5-62 Starting and driving
Whatever the condition, drive with caution. Accelerate and slow down with care. If accelerating or downshifting too fast, the drive wheels will lose even more traction.
Allow more stopping distance under these conditions. Braking should be started sooner than on dry pavement.
Allow greater following distances on slippery roads.
Watch for slippery spots (glare ice). These may appear on an otherwise clear road in shaded areas. If a patch of ice is seen ahead, brake before reaching it. Try not to brake while on the ice, and avoid any sudden steering maneuvers.
Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads.
Snow can trap dangerous exhaust gases under your vehicle. Keep snow clear of the exhaust pipe and from around your vehicle.
PARKING BRAKE
When parking in an area where the outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C), do not apply the parking brake to prevent it from freezing. For safe parking:
Place the shift lever in the P (Park) position.
Securely block the wheels.
6 In case of emergency
Hazard warning flasher switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Emergency engine shut off (push-button ignition models only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Changing a flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-12
Towing recommended by NISSAN . . . . . . . . . . . 6-13 Vehicle recovery (freeing a stuck vehicle). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-14
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER SWITCH
EMERGENCY ENGINE SHUT OFF (push-button ignition models only)
LIC0394
Push the switch on to warn other drivers when you must stop or park under emergency conditions. All turn signal lights flash.
WARNING
If stopping for an emergency, be sure to move the vehicle well off the road.
Do not use the hazard warning flashers while moving on the highway unless unusual circumstances force you to drive so slowly that your vehicle might become a hazard to other traffic.
Turn signals do not work when the hazard warning flasher lights are on.
The flashers will operate with the ignition switch placed in any position.
Some jurisdictions may prohibit the use of the hazard warning flasher switch while driving.
To shut off the engine in an emergency situation while driving, perform the following procedure:
Rapidly push the push-button ignition switch three consecutive times in less than 1.5 seconds, or
Push and hold the push-button ignition switch for more than 2 seconds.
6-2 In case of emergency
FLAT TIRE
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
This vehicle is equipped with the TPMS. It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the "Tire Pressure Low -- Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If the vehicle is being driven with low tire pressure, the TPMS will activate and warn you of it by the low tire pressure warning light. This system will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). For additional information, refer to "Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders" in the "Instruments and controls" section, and "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use.
If the low tire pressure warning light illuminates while driving, avoid sudden steering maneuvers or abrupt braking, reduce vehicle speed, pull off the road to a safe location and stop the vehicle as soon as possible. Driving with underinflated tires may permanently damage the tires and increase the likelihood of tire failure. Serious vehicle damage could occur and may lead to an accident and could result in serious personal injury. Check the tire pressure for all four tires. Adjust the tire pressure to the recommended COLD tire pressure shown on the Tire and Loading Information label to turn the low tire pressure warning light OFF. If the light still illuminates while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If not tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, have the vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these services.
Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
Do not inject any tire liquid or aerosol tire sealant into the tires, as this may cause a malfunction of the tire pressure sensors.
If the light still comes on while driving after adjusting the tire pressure, a tire may be flat or the TPMS may be malfunctioning. If you have a flat tire, replace it with a spare tire as soon as possible. If no tire is flat and all tires are properly inflated, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
In case of emergency 6-3
CHANGING A FLAT TIRE
If you have a flat tire, follow the instructions below:
Stopping the vehicle
1. Safely move the vehicle off the road and away from traffic.
2. Turn on the hazard warning flashers.
3. Park on a level surface and apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
4. Turn off the engine.
5. Raise the hood to warn other traffic and to signal professional road assistance personnel that you need assistance.
6. Have all passengers get out of the vehicle and stand in a safe place, away from traffic and clear of the vehicle.
WARNING
Make sure the parking brake is securely applied and the Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) is shifted into P (Park).
Never change tires when the vehicle is on a slope, ice or slippery areas. This is hazardous.
Never change tires if oncoming traffic is close to your vehicle. Wait for professional road assistance.
LCE2142
A. Blocks B. Flat tire
Blocking wheels
Place suitable blocks at both the front and back of the wheel diagonally opposite the flat tire to prevent the vehicle from moving when it is jacked up.
WARNING Be sure to block the wheel as the vehicle may move and result in personal injury.
6-4 In case of emergency
LCE2428
Getting the spare tire and tools
1. Open the liftgate.
2. Lift the flaps on the wheel cover to access the spare tire.
LCE2429
3. Carefully remove the wheel cover to avoid potential damage to the side trim.
LCE2430
4. Remove the jacking rod A , the jack B , and wheel nut wrench C from the storage cover D .
5. Remove the storage cover D to ac-
cess the spare tire.
In case of emergency 6-5
To remove the wheel cover, use the jack rod
1 as illustrated. Apply cloth 2 between the wheel and jack
rod to prevent damaging the wheel and wheel cover.
Use caution not to scratch the wheel cover or wheel surface.
SCE0913
6. To loosen the bolt, turn counterclockwise.
7. Once loosened remove the bolt, and remove the spare tire.
SCE0630
Removing wheel cover (if so equipped)
CAUTION
Do not use your hands to pry off wheel caps or wheel covers. Doing so could result in personal injury.
6-6 In case of emergency
LPD2451
Jacking up vehicle and removing the damaged tire
WARNING
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by the jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
Use only the jack provided with your vehicle to lift the vehicle. Do not use the jack provided with your vehicle on other vehicles. The jack is designed for lifting only your vehicle during a tire change.
Use the correct jack-up points. Never use any other part of the vehicle for jack support.
Never jack up the vehicle more than necessary.
Never use blocks on or under the jack.
Do not start or run the engine while vehicle is on the jack. It may cause the vehicle to move. This is especially true for vehicles with limited slip differentials.
Do not allow passengers to stay in the vehicle while it is on the jack.
Never run the engine with a wheel(s) off the ground. It may cause the vehicle to move.
In case of emergency 6-7
Always refer to the proper illustrations for the correct placement and jack-up points for your specific vehicle model and jack type.
Carefully read the caution label attached to the jack body and the following instructions.
1. Loosen each wheel nut 1 or 2 turns by turning counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench. Do not remove the wheel nuts until the tire is off the ground.
6-8 In case of emergency
LCE2059
2. Place the jack directly under the jack-up point as illustrated so the top of the jack contacts the vehicle at the jack-up point. Align the jack head between the 2 notches in the front or the rear as shown. Also fit the groove of the jack head between the notches as shown.
The jack should be used on firm and level ground.
3. To lift the vehicle, securely hold the jack lever and rod with both hands. Carefully raise the vehicle until the tire clears the ground. Remove the wheel nuts, and then remove the tire.
Installing the spare tire
WCE0048
1. Clean any mud or dirt from the surface between the wheel and hub.
2. Carefully put the spare tire on and tighten the wheel nuts finger tight.
3. With the wheel nut wrench, tighten wheel nuts alternately and evenly in the
sequence illustrated (A , B , C , D ) until
they are tight.
JUMP STARTING
4. Lower the vehicle slowly until the tire touches the ground. Then, with the wheel nut wrench, tighten the wheel nuts securely in the sequence illus-
trated (A , B , C , D ). Lower the vehicle
completely.
WARNING
Incorrect wheel nuts or improperly tightened wheel nuts can cause the wheel to become loose or come off. This could cause an accident.
Do not use oil or grease on the wheel studs or nuts. This could cause the nuts to become loose.
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire,etc.).
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
Wheel nut tightening torque: 83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specification at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each lubrication interval.
Adjust tire pressure to the COLD pressure.
COLD pressure: After vehicle has been parked for 3 hours or more or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km).
COLD tire pressures are shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Securely store the jack and the tool kit in its storage area.
6. Place the spare tire cover and liftgate floor carpeting over the jack and tool kit.
7. Securely store the damaged tire in the vehicle.
8. Close the liftgate.
WARNING
Always make sure that the spare tire and jacking equipment are properly secured after use. Such items can become dangerous projectiles in an accident or sudden stop.
The spare tire is designed for emergency use. For additional information, refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "Doit-yourself " section of this manual.
To start your engine with a booster battery, the instructions and precautions below must be followed.
WARNING
If done incorrectly, jump starting can lead to a battery explosion, resulting in severe injury or death. It could also damage your vehicle.
Explosive hydrogen gas is always present in the vicinity of the battery. Keep all sparks and flames away from the battery.
Do not allow battery fluid to come into contact with eyes, skin, clothing or painted surfaces. Battery fluid is a corrosive sulfuric acid solution which can cause severe burns. If the fluid should come into contact with anything, immediately flush the contacted area with water.
Keep battery out of the reach of children.
The booster battery must be rated at 12 volts. Use of an improperly rated battery can damage your vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-9
Whenever working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protectors (for example, goggles or industrial safety spectacles) and remove rings, metal bands, or any other jewelry. Do not lean over the battery when jump starting.
Do not attempt to jump start a frozen battery. It could explode and cause serious injury.
The automatic engine cooling fan (if so equipped) may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, keep hands and other objects away from it.
WARNING
Always follow the instructions below. Failure to do so could result in damage to the charging system and cause personal injury.
1. If the booster battery is in another vehicle, position the 2 vehicles to bring their batteries near each other.
Do not allow the two vehicles to touch.
LCE2223
2. Apply the parking brake. Move the shift lever to P (Park). Switch off all unnecessary electrical systems (lights, heater, air conditioner, etc.).
3. Connect the jumper cables in the se-
quence illustrated (A , B , C , D ).
6-10 In case of emergency
PUSH STARTING
IF YOUR VEHICLE OVERHEATS
CAUTION
Always connect positive () to positive () and negative () to body ground (for example, strut mounting bolt, engine lift bracket, etc.) -- not to the battery.
Make sure the jumper cables do not touch moving parts in the engine compartment and that the cable clamps do not contact any other metal.
4. Start the engine of the booster vehicle and let it run for a few minutes.
5. Keep the engine speed of the booster vehicle at about 2,000 rpm and start the engine of the vehicle being jump started.
CAUTION
Do not keep the starter motor engaged for more than 10 seconds. If the engine does not start right away, place the ignition switch in the OFF position and wait 3 to 4 seconds before trying again.
6. After starting the engine, carefully disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable.
CAUTION
Do not push start this vehicle. The three-way catalyst may be damaged.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) models cannot be push-started or tow-started. Attempting to do so may cause transmission damage.
If your vehicle is overheating (indicated by a
red high temperature warning light
),
or if you feel a lack of engine power, detect abnormal noise, etc., take the following
steps.
WARNING
Do not continue to drive if your vehicle overheats. Doing so could cause engine damage or a vehicle fire.
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never remove the radiator cap while the engine is still hot. When the radiator cap is removed, pressurized hot water will spurt out, possibly causing serious injury.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
1. Move the vehicle safely off the road, apply the parking brake and move the shift lever to P (Park).
Do not stop the engine.
2. Turn off the air conditioner.. Open all the windows, move the heater or air conditioner temperature control to maximum hot and fan control to high speed.
In case of emergency 6-11
TOWING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Get out of the vehicle. Look and listen for steam or coolant escaping from the radiator before opening the hood. (If steam or coolant is escaping, turn off the engine.) Do not open the hood further until no steam or coolant can be seen.
4. Open the engine hood.
WARNING
If steam or water is coming from the engine, stand clear to prevent getting burned.
5. Visually check drive belts for damage or looseness. Also check if the cooling fan is running. The radiator hoses and radiator should not leak water. If coolant is leaking, the water pump belt is missing or loose, or the cooling fan does not run, stop the engine.
WARNING
Be careful not to allow your hands, hair, jewelry or clothing to come into contact with, or get caught in, engine belts or the engine cooling fan. The engine cooling fan can start at any time.
6. After the engine cools down, check the coolant level in the engine coolant reservoir with the engine running. Add coolant to the engine coolant reservoir, if necessary. Have your vehicle repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
When towing your vehicle, all State (Provincial in Canada) and local regulations for towing must be followed. Incorrect towing equipment could damage your vehicle. Towing instructions are available from a NISSAN dealer. Local service operators are generally familiar with the applicable laws and procedures for towing. To assure proper towing and to prevent accidental damage to your vehicle, NISSAN recommends having a service operator tow your vehicle. It is advisable to have the service operator carefully read the following precautions:
WARNING
Never ride in a vehicle that is being towed.
Never get under your vehicle after it has been lifted by a tow truck.
6-12 In case of emergency
CAUTION
When towing, make sure that the transmission, axles, steering system and powertrain are in working condition. If any of these conditions apply, dollies or a flatbed tow truck must be used.
Always attach safety chains before towing.
For additional information, refer to "Flat towing" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
TOWING RECOMMENDED BY NISSAN
NISSAN recommends towing your vehicle based upon the type of drivetrain. For additional information, refer to the diagrams in this section to ensure that your vehicle is properly towed.
Front-Wheel Drive models with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT)
NISSAN recommends that your vehicle be towed with the driving (front) wheels off the ground or place the vehicle on a flatbed truck as illustrated.
LCE2343
In case of emergency 6-13
CAUTION
Never tow CVT models with the front wheels on the ground or four wheels on the ground (forward or backward), as this may cause serious and expensive damage to the transmission. If it is necessary to tow the vehicle with the rear wheels raised always use towing dollies under the front wheels.
When towing CVT models with the rear wheels on the ground or on towing dollies:
Place the ignition switch in the OFF position, and secure the steering wheel in a straight-ahead position with a rope or similar device. Never secure the steering wheel by placing the ignition switch in the LOCK position. This may damage the steering lock mechanism (for models with a steering lock mechanism).
VEHICLE RECOVERY (freeing a stuck vehicle)
WARNING
To avoid vehicle damage, serious personal injury or death when recovering a stuck vehicle:
Contact a professional towing service to recover the vehicle if you have any questions regarding the recovery procedure.
Tow chains or cables must be attached only to main structural members of the vehicle.
Do not use the vehicle tie-downs to tow or free a stuck vehicle.
Only use devices specifically designed for vehicle recovery and follow the manufacturer's instructions.
Always pull the recovery device straight out from the front of the vehicle. Never pull at an angle.
Route recovery devices so they do not touch any part of the vehicle except the attachment point.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use a tow strap or other device designed specifically for vehicle recovery. Always follow the manufacturer's instructions for the recovery device.
Rocking a stuck vehicle
WARNING
Stand clear of a stuck vehicle.
Do not spin your tires at high speed. This could cause them to explode and result in serious injury. Parts of your vehicle could also overheat and be damaged.
If your vehicle is stuck in sand, snow, mud, etc., use the following procedure:
1. Turn off the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system .
2. Make sure the area in front and behind the vehicle is clear of obstructions.
3. Turn the steering wheel right and left to clear an area around the front tires.
6-14 In case of emergency
4. Slowly rock the vehicle forward and backward.
Shift back and forth between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).
Apply the accelerator as little as possible to maintain the rocking motion.
Release the accelerator pedal before shifting between R (Reverse) and D (Drive).
Do not spin the tires above 34 mph (55 km/h).
5. If the vehicle cannot be freed after a few tries, contact a professional towing service to remove the vehicle.
In case of emergency 6-15
MEMO
6-16 In case of emergency
7 Appearance and care
Cleaning exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Waxing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2 Removing spots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Underbody . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Glass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Aluminum alloy wheels (if so equipped) . . . . . . . 7-3 Chrome parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 Tire dressings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3
Cleaning interior. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-4
Air fresheners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Floor mats (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-5 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-6 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Most common factors contributing to vehicle corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Environmental factors influence the rate of corrosion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7 Protect your vehicle from corrosion . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
CLEANING EXTERIOR
In order to maintain the appearance of your vehicle, it is important to take proper care of it. To protect the paint surfaces, wash your vehicle as soon as you can:
After a rainfall to prevent possible damage from acid rain.
After driving on coastal roads. When contaminants such as soot, bird
droppings, tree sap, metal particles or bugs get on the paint surface. When dust or mud builds up on the surface. Whenever possible, store or park your vehicle inside a garage or in a covered area. When it is necessary to park outside, park in a shady area or protect the vehicle with a body cover. Be careful not to scratch the paint surface when putting on or removing the body cover.
7-2 Appearance and care
WASHING
Wash dirt off with a wet sponge and plenty of water. Clean the vehicle thoroughly using a mild soap, a special vehicle soap or general purpose dishwashing liquid mixed with clean, lukewarm (never hot) water.
CAUTION
Do not use car washes that use acid in the detergent. Some car washes, especially brushless ones, use some acid for cleaning. The acid may react with some plastic vehicle components, causing them to crack. This could affect their appearance, and also could cause them not to function properly. Always check with your car wash to confirm that acid is not used.
Do not wash the vehicle with strong household soap, strong chemical detergents, gasoline or solvents.
Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight or while the vehicle body is hot, as the surface may become water-spotted.
Avoid using tight-napped or rough cloths, such as washing mitts. Care must be taken when removing caked-on dirt or other foreign substances so the paint surface is not scratched or damaged.
Rinse the vehicle thoroughly with plenty of clean water.
Inside edges, seams and folds on the doors, hatches and hood are particularly vulnerable to the effects of road salt. Therefore, these areas must be cleaned regularly. Take care that the drain holes in the lower edge of the door are open. Spray water under the body and in the wheel wells to loosen the dirt and wash away road salt.
A damp chamois can be used to dry the vehicle to avoid water spots.
WAXING
Regular waxing protects the paint surface and helps retain new vehicle appearance. Polishing is recommended to remove built-up wax residue and to avoid a weathered appearance before re-applying wax.
A NISSAN dealer can assist you in choosing the proper product.
Wax your vehicle only after a thorough washing. Follow the instructions supplied with the wax.
Do not use a wax containing any abrasives, cutting compounds or cleaners that may damage the vehicle finish.
Machine compounding or aggressive polishing on a base coat/clear coat paint finish may dull the finish or leave swirl marks.
REMOVING SPOTS
Remove tar and oil spots, industrial dust, insects, and tree sap as quickly as possible from the surface of the paint to avoid lasting damage or staining. Special cleaning products are available at a NISSAN dealer or any automotive accessory store. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for these products.
UNDERBODY
In areas where road salt is used in winter, it is necessary to clean the underbody regularly in order to prevent dirt and salt from building up and causing the acceleration of corrosion on the underbody and suspension. Before the winter period and again in the spring, the underseal must be checked and, if necessary, re-treated.
GLASS
Use glass cleaner to remove smoke and dust film from the glass surfaces. It is normal for glass to become coated with a film after the vehicle is parked in the hot sun. Glass cleaner and a soft cloth will easily remove this film.
CAUTION
When cleaning the inside of the windows, do not use sharp-edged tools, abrasive cleaners or chlorine-based disinfectant cleaners. They could damage the electrical conductors, radio antenna elements or rear window defroster elements.
ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEELS (if so equipped)
Wash the wheels regularly with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution, especially during winter months in areas where road salt is used. If not removed, road salt can discolor the wheels.
CAUTION
Follow the directions below to avoid staining or discoloring the wheels:
Do not use a cleaner that uses strong acid or alkali contents to clean the wheels.
Do not apply wheel cleaners to the wheels when they are hot. The wheel temperature should be the same as ambient temperature.
Rinse the wheel to completely remove the cleaner within 15 minutes after the cleaner is applied.
CHROME PARTS
Clean all chrome parts regularly with a non-abrasive chrome polish to maintain the finish.
TIRE DRESSINGS
NISSAN does not recommend the use of tire dressings. Tire manufacturers apply a coating to the tires to help reduce discoloration of the rubber. If a tire dressing is applied to the tires, it may react with the coating and form a compound. This compound may come off the tire while driving and stain the vehicle paint.
Appearance and care 7-3
CLEANING INTERIOR
If you choose to use a tire dressing, take the following precautions:
Use a water-based tire dressing. The coating on the tire dissolves more easily than with an oil-based tire dressing.
Apply a light coat of tire dressing to help prevent it from entering the tire tread/grooves (where it would be difficult to remove).
Wipe off excess tire dressing using a dry towel. Make sure the tire dressing is completely removed from the tire tread/grooves.
Allow the tire dressing to dry as recommended by the tire dressing manufacturer.
Occasionally remove loose dust from the interior trim, plastic parts and seats using a vacuum cleaner or soft bristled brush. Wipe the vinyl and leather (if so equipped) surfaces with a clean, soft cloth dampened in mild soap solution, then wipe clean with a dry, soft cloth.
Regular care and cleaning is required in order to maintain the appearance of the leather (if so equipped).
Before using any fabric protector, read the manufacturer's recommendations. Some fabric protectors contain chemicals that may stain or bleach the seat material.
Use a cloth dampened only with water to clean the meter and gauge lens.
WARNING
Do not use water or acidic cleaners (hot steam cleaners) on the seat. This can damage the seat or occupant classification sensor. This can also affect the operation of the air bag system and result in serious personal injury.
CAUTION
Never use benzine, thinner or any similar material.
Small dirt particles can be abrasive and damaging to leather (if so equipped) surfaces and should be removed promptly. Do not use saddle soap, car waxes, polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents or ammonia-based cleaners as they may damage the leather's natural finish.
Never use fabric protectors unless recommended by the manufacturer.
Do not use glass or plastic cleaner on meter or gauge lens covers. It may damage the lens cover.
7-4 Appearance and care
AIR FRESHENERS
Most air fresheners use a solvent that could affect the vehicle interior. If you use an air freshener, take the following precautions:
Hanging-type air fresheners can cause permanent discoloration when they contact vehicle interior surfaces. Place the air freshener in a location that allows it to hang free and not contact an interior surface.
Liquid-type air fresheners typically clip on the vents. These products can cause immediate damage and discoloration when spilled on interior surfaces.
Carefully read and follow the manufacturer's instructions before using the air fresheners.
LAI2105
FLOOR MATS (if so equipped)
WARNING
To avoid potential pedal interference that may result in a collision, injury or death:
NEVER place a floor mat on top of another floor mat in the driver front position or install them upside down or backwards.
Use only Genuine NISSAN floor mats, or equivalent floor mats, that are specifically designed for use in your vehicle model and model year.
Properly position the mats in the floorwell using the floor mat positioning hook. For additional information, refer to "Floor mat installation" in this section.
Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation.
Periodically check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
After cleaning the vehicle interior, check the floor mats to make sure they are properly installed.
The use of Genuine NISSAN floor mats can extend the life of your vehicle carpet and make it easier to clean the interior. Mats should be maintained with regular cleaning and replaced if they become excessively worn.
Floor mat installation
Your vehicle is equipped with floor mat positioning hook(s). The number and shape of the floor mat positioning hooks for each seating position varies depending on the vehicle.
Appearance and care 7-5
When installing Genuine NISSAN floor mats, follow the installation instructions provided with the mat and the following:
1. With the ignition in the OFF position, the shift lever in P (Park) position and with the parking brake fully applied, position the floor mat in the floorwell so that the floor mat grommet holes are aligned with the hook(s).
2. Secure the grommet holes into the hook(s) and ensure that the floor mat is properly positioned.
3. Make sure the floor mat does not interfere with pedal operation. With the ignition still in the OFF position, the shift lever in the P (Park) position and with the parking brake applied, fully apply and release all pedals. The floor mat must not interfere with pedal operation or prevent the pedal from returning to its normal position.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for details about installing the floor mats in your vehicle.
LAI2106
Positioning hooks The illustration shows the location of the floor mat positioning hooks.
SEAT BELTS
The seat belts can be cleaned by wiping them with a sponge dampened in a mild soap solution. Allow the belts to dry completely in the shade before using them. For additional information, refer to "Seat belt maintenance" in the "Safety--Seats, seat belts and supplemental restraint system" section of this manual.
WARNING
Do not allow wet seat belts to roll up in the retractor. NEVER use bleach, dye or chemical solvents to clean the seat belts, since these materials may severely weaken the seat belt webbing.
7-6 Appearance and care
CORROSION PROTECTION
MOST COMMON FACTORS CONTRIBUTING TO VEHICLE CORROSION
Most vehicle corrosion is caused by:
The accumulation of moistureretaining dirt and debris in body panel sections, cavities, and other areas.
Damage to paint and other protective coatings caused by gravel and stone chips or minor traffic collisions.
ENVIRONMENTAL FACTORS INFLUENCE THE RATE OF CORROSION
Moisture
Accumulation of sand, dirt and water on the vehicle body underside can accelerate corrosion. Wet floor coverings will not dry completely inside the vehicle and should be removed for drying to avoid floor panel corrosion.
Relative humidity
Corrosion will be accelerated in areas of high relative humidity, especially those areas where the temperatures stay above freezing and where atmospheric pollution exists and road salt is used.
Temperature
High temperatures accelerate the rate of corrosion to those parts which are not well ventilated.
Air pollution
Industrial pollution, the presence of salt in the air in coastal areas, or heavy road salt use accelerates the corrosion process. Road salt also accelerates the disintegration of paint surfaces.
PROTECT YOUR VEHICLE FROM CORROSION
Wash and wax your vehicle often to keep the vehicle clean.
Always check for minor damage to the paint and repair it as soon as possible.
Keep drain holes at the bottom of the doors open to avoid water accumulation.
Check the underbody for accumulation of sand, dirt or salt. If present, wash with water as soon as possible.
CAUTION
NEVER remove dirt, sand or other debris from the passenger compartment by washing it out with a hose. Remove dirt with a vacuum cleaner or broom.
Never allow water or other liquids to come in contact with electronic components inside the vehicle as this may damage them.
Chemicals used for road surface de-icing are extremely corrosive. They accelerate corrosion and deterioration of underbody components such as the exhaust system, fuel and brake lines, brake cables, floor pan and fenders.
In winter, the underbody must be cleaned periodically.
For additional protection against rust and corrosion, which may be required in some areas, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer.
Appearance and care 7-7
MEMO
7-8 Appearance and care
8 Do-it-yourself
Maintenance precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Checking engine coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Changing engine coolant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Engine oil. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-6 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-8 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-9 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Windshield-washer fluid reservoir. . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10 Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-12 Variable voltage control system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Drive belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-13 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Replacing spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-14 Air cleaner. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15
In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-15 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16 Brakes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-17 Fuses. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Engine compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18 Passenger compartment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20 Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Headlights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Fog lights (if so equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23 Exterior and interior lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27 Tire labeling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-30 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-33 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-34 Changing wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-35
MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS
When performing any inspection or maintenance work on your vehicle, always take care to prevent serious accidental injury to yourself or damage to the vehicle. The following are general precautions which should be closely observed.
WARNING
Park the vehicle on a level surface, apply the parking brake securely and block the wheels to prevent the vehicle from moving. Move the shift lever to P (Park).
Be sure the ignition switch is in the OFF or LOCK position when performing any parts replacement or repairs.
If you must work with the engine running, keep your hands, clothing, hair and tools away from moving fans, belts and any other moving parts.
It is advisable to secure or remove any loose clothing and remove any jewelry, such as rings, watches, etc. before working on your vehicle.
Always wear eye protection whenever you work on your vehicle.
8-2 Do-it-yourself
Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic engine cooling fan. It may come on at any time without warning, even if the ignition switch is in the OFF position and the engine is not running. To avoid injury, always disconnect the negative battery cable before working near the fan.
If you must run the engine in an enclosed space such as a garage, be sure there is proper ventilation for exhaust gases to escape.
Never get under the vehicle while it is supported only by a jack. If it is necessary to work under the vehicle, support it with safety stands.
Keep smoking materials, flame and sparks away from the fuel tank and battery.
Because the fuel lines on gasoline engine models are under high pressure even when the engine is off, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service of the fuel filter or fuel lines.
CAUTION
Do not work under the hood while the engine is hot. Turn the engine off and wait until it cools down.
Avoid contact with used engine oil and coolant. Improperly disposed engine oil, engine coolant and/or other vehicle fluids can damage the environment. Always conform to local regulations for disposal of vehicle fluid.
Never leave the engine or Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) related component harnesses disconnected while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
Never connect or disconnect the battery or any transistorized component while the ignition switch is in the ON position.
This "Do-it-yourself " section gives instructions regarding only those items which are relatively easy for an owner to perform.
A Genuine NISSAN service manual is also available. For additional information, refer to "Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
You should be aware that incomplete or improper servicing may result in operating difficulties or excessive emissions, and could affect warranty coverage. If in doubt about any servicing, it is recommended that you have it done by a NISSAN dealer.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT CHECK LOCATIONS
HR16DE engine
1. Engine coolant reservoir 2. Windshield-washer fluid reservoir 3. Engine oil filler cap 4. Engine oil dipstick 5. Brake fluid reservoir 6. Fuse box 7. Battery 8. Air cleaner 9. Engine drive belt location
LDI3247
Do-it-yourself 8-3
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM
The engine cooling system is filled at the
factory with a pre-diluted mixture of 50%
Genuine
NISSAN
Long
Life
Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) and 50% water to
provide year-round antifreeze and coolant
protection. The antifreeze solution con-
tains rust and corrosion inhibitors. Addi-
tional engine cooling system additives are
not necessary.
WARNING
Never remove the radiator or coolant reservoir cap when the engine is hot. Wait until the engine and radiator cool down. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator. For additional information on precautions, refer to "If your vehicle overheats" found in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
The radiator is equipped with a pressure type radiator cap. To prevent engine damage, use only a Genuine NISSAN radiator cap.
CAUTION
Never use any cooling system additives such as radiator sealer. Additives may clog the cooling system and cause damage to the engine, transmission and/or cooling system.
When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent. Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is prediluted to provide antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). If additional freeze protection is needed due to weather where you operate your vehicle, add Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) concentrate following the directions on the container. If an equivalent coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) is used, follow the coolant manufacturer's instructions to maintain minimum antifreeze protection to -34° F (-37° C). The use of other types of coolant solutions other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent may damage the engine cooling system.
8-4 Do-it-yourself
The life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 7 years. Mixing any other type of coolant other than Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue), including Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (green), or the use of non-distilled water will reduce the life expectancy of the factory-fill coolant. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
ENGINE OIL
CHANGING ENGINE COOLANT
A NISSAN dealer can change the engine coolant. The service procedure can be found in the NISSAN Service Manual.
Improper servicing can result in reduced heater performance and engine overheating.
LDI3221
CHECKING ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL
Check the coolant level in the reservoir when the engine is cold. If the coolant
level is below the MIN level B , add coolant up to the MAX level A .
If the cooling system frequently requires coolant, have it checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information on the location of the engine coolant reservoir, refer to "Engine compartment check locations" in this section.
WARNING
To avoid the danger of being scalded, never change the coolant when the engine is hot.
Never remove the radiator cap when the engine is hot. Serious burns could be caused by high pressure fluid escaping from the radiator.
Avoid direct skin contact with used coolant. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
Keep coolant out of the reach of children and pets.
Engine coolant must be disposed of properly. Check your local regulations.
LDI3222
CHECKING ENGINE OIL LEVEL
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Start the engine and warm it up until the engine temperature reaches the normal operating temperature (approximately 5 minutes).
3. Stop the engine.
4. Wait at least 10 minutes for the engine oil to drain back to the oil pan.
5. Remove the dipstick and wipe it clean.
6. Reinsert the dipstick all the way.
Do-it-yourself 8-5
It is normal to add some oil between oil maintenance intervals or during the break-in period, depending on the severity of operating conditions or depending on the property of the engine oil used. More engine oil is consumed by frequent acceleration/deceleration especially when engine rpm is high. Consumption is likely to be higher when the engine is new. if the rate of oil consumption, after driving for 3,000 miles (5,000 km), is more than 0.5 liter per 600 miles (1,000 km), consult a NISSAN dealer.
LDI0371
7. Remove the dipstick and check the oil
level. It should be within the range B . 8. If the oil level is below A , remove the oil
filler cap and pour recommended oil
into the opening. Do not overfill C .
When filling the engine oil, do not remove the dipstick.
9. Recheck the oil level with the dipstick.
CAUTION
Oil level should be checked regularly. Operating the engine with an insufficient amount of oil can damage the engine, and such damage is not covered by warranty.
CHANGING ENGINE OIL
LDI3339
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
8-6 Do-it-yourself
2. Start the engine and let it idle until it reaches operating temperature, then turn it off.
3. Remove the oil filler cap A by turning it
counterclockwise.
4. Place a large drain pan under the drain
plug B . 5. Remove the drain plug B with a
wrench by turning it counterclockwise and completely drain the oil.
If the oil filter is to be changed, remove and replace it at this time. For additional information, refer to "Changing engine oil filter" in this section.
WARNING
Prolonged and repeated contact with used engine oil may cause skin cancer.
Try to avoid direct skin contact with used oil. If skin contact is made, wash thoroughly with soap or hand cleaner as soon as possible.
Keep used engine oil out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
Waste oil must be disposed of properly.
Check your local regulations.
6. Clean and reinstall the drain plug B
and a new washer. Securely tighten the
drain plug B with a wrench. Do not use
excessive force.
Drain plug tightening torque: 25 ft-lb (34 N·m)
7. Refill engine with recommended oil through the oil filler opening, then install
the oil filler cap A securely.
For additional information on drain and refill capacity, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
The drain and refill capacity depends on the oil temperature and drain time. Use these specifications for reference only. Always use the dipstick to determine when the proper amount of oil is in the engine.
8. Start the engine. Check for leakage
around the drain plug B and oil filter.
Correct as required. 9. Turn the engine off and wait more than
10 minutes. Check the oil level with the dipstick. Add engine oil if necessary.
Do-it-yourself 8-7
LDI3027
CHANGING ENGINE OIL FILTER
1. Park the vehicle on a level surface and apply the parking brake.
2. Turn the engine off.
3. Place a large drain pan under the oil
filter B .
4. Loosen the oil filter with an oil filter wrench by turning it counterclockwise. Then remove the oil filter by turning it by hand.
CAUTION
Be careful not to burn yourself. The engine oil may be hot.
5. Wipe the engine oil filter sealing surface with a clean rag.
CAUTION
Be sure to remove any old gasket material remaining on the sealing surface of the engine. Failure to do so could lead to engine damage.
6. Coat the gasket on the new filter with clean engine oil .
7. Screw on the oil filter until a slight resistance is felt, then tighten an additional 2/3 turn.
Oil filter tightening torque: 13 ft-lbs (18 N·m)
8. Start the engine and check for leakage around the oil filter. Correct as required.
9. Turn the engine off and wait more than 10 minutes. Check the oil level. Add en-
gine oil by removing the oil filler cap A
if necessary.
8-8 Do-it-yourself
CONTINUOUSLY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION (CVT) FLUID
BRAKE FLUID
CAUTION
NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids.
Do not use Automatic Transmission Fluid (ATF) or manual transmission fluid in a NISSAN CVT, as it may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may also damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
When checking or replacement of CVT fluid is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI2790
For additional information on brake fluid specification, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
WARNING
Use only new fluid from a sealed container. Old, inferior or contaminated fluid may damage the brake system. The use of improper fluids can damage the brake system and affect the vehicle's stopping ability.
Clean the filler cap before removing.
Brake fluid is poisonous and should be stored carefully in marked containers out of reach of children.
CAUTION
Do not spill the fluid on any painted surfaces. This will damage the paint. If fluid is spilled, immediately wash the surface with water.
Check the fluid level in the reservoir. If the
brake fluid is below the MIN line B , the
brake warning light will illuminate. Add
brake fluid up to the MAX line A . For addi-
tional information on recommended type of brake fluid, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the " Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
If the brake fluid must be added frequently, the brake system should be thoroughly checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Do-it-yourself 8-9
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID
Add a washer solvent to the washer for better cleaning. In the winter season, add a windshield-washer antifreeze. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the mixture ratio.
Refill the reservoir more frequently when driving conditions require an increased amount of windshield-washer fluid.
Recommended fluid is Genuine NISSAN Windshield-Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent.
LDI3223
WINDSHIELD-WASHER FLUID RESERVOIR
Fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir periodically. Add windshield-washer fluid when the low windshield-washer fluid warning light (if so equipped) comes on.
To fill the windshield-washer fluid reservoir, lift the cap off the reservoir and pour the windshield-washer fluid into the reservoir opening.
CAUTION
Do not substitute engine antifreeze coolant for windshield-washer solution. This may result in damage to the paint.
Do not fill the windshield-washer reservoir with washer fluid concentrates at full strength. Some methyl alcohol based washer fluid concentrates may permanently stain the grille if spilled while filling the windshield-washer reservoir.
Pre-mix washer fluid concentrates with water to the manufacturer's recommended levels before pouring the fluid into the windshield-washer reservoir. Do not use the windshieldwasher reservoir to mix the washer fluid concentrate and water.
8-10 Do-it-yourself
BATTERY
Caution symbols for battery
WARNING
1
No smoking, No exposed flames, No Do not expose the battery to electrical sparks, flames or smoking. Hydrogen gas generated by the
Sparks
battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
2
Shield eyes
Handle the battery cautiously. Always wear eye protection glasses to protect against explosion or battery acid.
3
Keep away from children
Never allow children to handle the battery. Keep the battery out of the reach of children.
Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics, or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can
cause blindness or severe burns. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your
4
Battery acid
eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately
flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Battery fluid is acid. If the bat-
tery fluid gets into your eyes or onto your skin, it could cause loss of your eyesight or burns.
5
Note operating instructions
Before handling the battery, read this instruction carefully to ensure correct and safe handling.
6
Explosive gas
Hydrogen gas generated by battery fluid is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury.
Keep the battery surface clean and dry. Clean the battery with a solution of baking soda and water. Make certain the terminal connections are clean and securely tightened. If the vehicle is not to be used for 30 days or longer, disconnect the negative (-) battery terminal cable to prevent discharge.
Do-it-yourself 8-11
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.)
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
WARNING
Do not expose the battery to flames, an electrical spark or a cigarette. Hydrogen gas generated by the battery is explosive. Explosive gases can cause blindness or injury. Do not allow battery fluid to contact your skin, eyes, fabrics or painted surfaces. Sulfuric acid can cause blindness or injury. After touching a battery or battery cap, do not touch or rub your eyes. Thoroughly wash your hands. If the acid contacts your eyes, skin or clothing, immediately flush with water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.
When working on or near a battery, always wear suitable eye protection and remove all jewelry.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after handling.
Keep battery out of the reach of children.
Do not tip the battery.
NOTE:
LDI3302
Do not try to open the top of the battery.
This battery is not equipped with removable vent caps.
JUMP STARTING
If jump starting is necessary, refer to "Jump starting" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual. If the engine does not start by jump starting, the battery may have to be replaced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
8-12 Do-it-yourself
VARIABLE VOLTAGE CONTROL SYSTEM
DRIVE BELT
The current sensor A is located near the
battery along the negative battery cable. If you add electrical accessories to your vehicle, be sure to ground them to a suitable body ground such as the frame or engine block area.
LDI3246
CAUTION
Do not ground accessories directly to the battery terminal. Doing so will bypass the variable voltage control system and the vehicle battery may not charge completely.
Use electrical accessories with the engine running to avoid discharging the vehicle battery.
Your vehicle is equipped with a variable voltage control system. This system measures the amount of electrical discharge from the battery and controls voltage generated by the generator.
LDI3028
1. Automatic tensioner pulley 2. Generator pulley 3. Water pump pulley 4. Air conditioner compressor pulley 5. Crankshaft pulley
WARNING Be sure the ignition switch is placed in the OFF or LOCK position before servicing drive belt. The engine could rotate unexpectedly.
Do-it-yourself 8-13
SPARK PLUGS
1. Visually inspect the belt for signs of unusual wear, cuts, or fraying. If the belt is in poor condition, have it replaced or adjusted. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
2. Have the belt checked regularly for condition.
SDI1895
REPLACING SPARK PLUGS
Iridium-tipped spark plugs
It is not necessary to replace iridium-
tipped A spark plugs as frequently as con-
ventional type spark plugs because they last much longer. Follow the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual. Do not service iridium-tipped spark plugs by cleaning or regapping.
Always replace spark plugs with recommended or equivalent ones.
WARNING
Be sure the engine and ignition switch are off and that the parking brake is engaged securely.
CAUTION
Be sure to use the correct socket to remove the spark plugs. An incorrect socket can damage the spark plugs.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
8-14 Do-it-yourself
AIR CLEANER
LDI2991
WARNING
Operating the engine with the air cleaner filter off can cause you or others to be burned. The air cleaner filter not only cleans the intake air, it also stops the flame if the engine backfires. If the air cleaner is not installed and the engine backfires, you could be burned. Never drive with the air cleaner filter off. Be cautious working on the engine when the air cleaner is off.
Never pour fuel into the throttle body or attempt to start the engine with the air cleaner removed. Doing so could result in serious injury.
To remove the filter from the air cleaner,
release the retaining clips A , then release
the holders at the back of the unit. Pull the
unit upward B .
The viscous paper type filter element should not be cleaned and reused. Replace the air filter according to the maintenance log shown in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
When replacing the air filter, wipe the inside of the air cleaner housing and the cover with a damp cloth.
NOTE:
After installing a new air cleaner filter, make sure the air cleaner cover is seated
in the housing and latch the clips A .
IN-CABIN MICROFILTER
The in-cabin microfilter restricts the entry of airborne dust and pollen particles and reduces some objectionable outside odors. The filter is located behind the glove box. For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual for change intervals.
If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Do-it-yourself 8-15
WINDSHIELD WIPER BLADES
CLEANING
If your windshield is not clear after using the windshieldwasher or if a wiper blade chatters when running, wax or other material may be on the blade or windshield. Clean the outside of the windshield with a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Your windshield is clean if beads do not form when rinsing with clear water. Clean each blade by wiping it with a cloth soaked in a washer fluid or a mild detergent. Then rinse the blades with clear water. If your windshield is still not clear after cleaning the blades and using the wiper, install new windshield wiper blades.
CAUTION Worn windshield wiper blades can damage the windshield and impair driver vision.
8-16 Do-it-yourself
REPLACING
LDI2584
Replace the wiper blades if they are worn.
To replace the windshield wiper blades, follow the procedure below:
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the windshield.
2. Lift the release tab A . 3. Move the wiper blade B down and re-
move.
4. Insert the new wiper blade onto the wiper arm.
5. Push the release tab down until it clicks.
6. Push wiper on to windshield.
CAUTION
After wiper blade replacement, return the wiper arm to its original position; otherwise it may be damaged when the hood is opened.
Make sure the wiper blades contact the glass; otherwise the arms may be damaged from wind pressure.
BRAKES
Rear window wiper blade
If checking or replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
If the brakes do not operate properly, have the brakes checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Self-adjusting brakes
Your vehicle is equipped with self-adjusting brakes.
The front disc-type brakes self-adjust every time the brake pedal is applied. The rear drum-type brakes self-adjust every time the parking brake is applied.
LDI2710
If you wax the surface of the hood, be careful not to let wax get into the washer nozzle
D . This may cause clogging or improper
windshield-washer operation. If wax gets into the nozzle, remove it with a needle or
small pin C .
WARNING
Have your brake system checked if the brake pedal height does not return to normal. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Brake pad wear indicators
The disc brake pads on your vehicle have audible wear indicators. When a brake pad requires replacement, a high pitched scraping or screeching sound will be heard when the vehicle is in motion. The noise will be heard whether or not the brake pedal is depressed. Have the brakes checked as soon as possible if the wear indicator sound is heard.
Do-it-yourself 8-17
FUSES
Under some driving or climate conditions, occasional brake squeak, squeal or other noise may be heard. Occasional brake noise during light to moderate stops is normal and does not affect the function or performance of the brake system.
Proper brake inspection intervals should be followed. For additional information regarding brake inspections, refer to the appropriate maintenance schedule information in the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
LDI2997
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
Fuses are used in the passenger compartment and engine compartment. Spare fuses are provided and can be found in the passenger compartment fuse box.
When installing a fuse make sure the fuse is installed in the fuse box securely.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.
ENGINE COMPARTMENT
LDI3242
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
8-18 Do-it-yourself
If any electrical equipment does not come on, check for an open fuse.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Open the engine hood.
3. Remove the fuse box cover by pushing the tab and lifting the cover up.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller. The fuse puller is located in the center of the fuse block in the passenger compartment.
Fusible links
If any electrical equipment does not operate and the fuses are in good condition, check the fusible links in the holder. If any of the fusible links are melted, replace only with Genuine NISSAN parts. For checking and replacing the fusible links, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
LDI3232
5. If the fuse is open A , replace it with a new fuse B .
6. If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Do-it-yourself 8-19
PASSENGER COMPARTMENT
CAUTION
Never use a fuse of a higher or lower amperage rating than that specified on the fuse box cover. This could damage the electrical system or electronic control units or cause a fire.
If any electrical equipment does not operate, check for an open fuse.
NOTE:
LDI3087
The fuse box is located on the driver's side of the instrument panel.
1. Be sure the ignition switch and the headlight switch are OFF.
2. Remove the fuse box cover A with a
suitable tool. Use a cloth to avoid damaging the trim.
3. Locate the fuse that needs to be replaced.
4. Remove the fuse with the fuse puller
B .
LDI2998
5. If the fuse is open C , replace it with an equivalent good fuse D .
6. Push the fuse box cover to install.
If a new fuse also opens, have the electrical system checked and repaired. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NOTE:
Your vehicle may not be equipped with all fuses listed on the fuse label.
8-20 Do-it-yourself
BATTERY REPLACEMENT
CAUTION Be careful not to allow children to swallow the battery or removed parts. An improperly disposed battery can
harm the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal. When changing batteries, do not let dust or oil get on the components. There is danger of explosion if the lithium battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type.
NISSAN INTELLIGENT KEY®
Replace the battery in the Intelligent Key as follows:
1. Remove the mechanical key from the Intelligent Key.
2. Insert a small flathead screwdriver A into the slit B of the corner and twist it
to separate the upper part from the lower part. Place a cloth over the screwdriver to protect the casing.
CAUTION
To prevent damage of the Intelligent Key, do not compress the screwdriver too hard when you insert the screwdriver into the slit.
LDI2001
Do-it-yourself 8-21
3. Replace the battery with a new one.
Recommended battery: CR2032 or equivalent.
Do not touch the internal circuit and electric terminals as doing so could cause a malfunction.
Hold the battery by the edges. Holding the battery across the contact points will seriously deplete the storage capacity.
Make sure that the + side faces the bottom of the lower part.
4. Close the lid securely as illustrated with
C and D .
5. Operate the buttons to check the operation.
If you need assistance for replacement, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
FCC Notice:
For USA: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Note:
Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
For Canada: This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
8-22 Do-it-yourself
LDI2637
LIGHTS
HEADLIGHTS
For additional information on headlight bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Replacing the halogen headlight bulb (if so equipped)
The headlight is a semi-sealed beam type which uses a replaceable headlight (halogen) bulb. They can be replaced from inside the engine compartment without removing the headlight assembly.
If headlight bulb replacement is required, It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
CAUTION
Aiming is not necessary after replacing the bulb. When aiming adjustment is necessary, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Do not leave the headlight assembly open without a bulb installed for a long period of time. Dust, moisture, smoke, etc. entering the headlight body may affect bulb performance. Remove the bulb from the headlight assembly just before a replacement bulb is installed.
Only touch the base when handling the bulb. Never touch the glass envelope. Touching the glass could significantly affect bulb life and/or headlight performance.
High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
Use the same number and wattage as shown in the chart.
Fog may temporarily form inside the lens of the exterior lights in the rain or in a car wash. A temperature difference between the inside and the outside of the lens causes the fog. This is not a malfunction. If large drops of water collect inside the lens, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Replacing the LED headlight bulb (if so equipped)
If LED headlight bulb replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
FOG LIGHTS (if so equipped)
For additional information on fog light bulb replacement, refer to the instructions outlined in this section.
Do-it-yourself 8-23
8-24 Do-it-yourself
Replacing the fog light bulb (if so equipped)
LDI3036
CAUTION
High pressure halogen gas is sealed inside the halogen bulb. The bulb may break if the glass envelope is scratched or the bulb is dropped.
When handling the bulb, do not touch the glass envelope.
Use the same number and wattage as originally installed as shown in the chart.
Do not leave the bulb out of the fog light for a long period of time as dust, moisture and smoke may enter the fog light body and affect the performance of the fog light.
1. Disconnect the negative (-) battery cable.
2. Access to the fog light is in front of and behind the front tire and the fascia.
3. Remove the fasteners; carefully pull back the front fender protector.
4. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise and pull out to remove.
5. Remove by pulling straight off the fog light. Do not shake or rotate the bulb when removing it. Do not touch the glass envelope.
6. Install the new bulb in the reverse order of removal.
EXTERIOR AND INTERIOR LIGHTS
Item
Headlight assembly (Type A) (if so equipped)* High Low Turn/Park Side marker
Headlight assembly (Type B) (if so equipped)* High Low Turn signal Park Side marker
Fog light (Type A) (if so equipped) Daytime Running Light (DRL)
Fog light (Type B) (if so equipped) Door mirror turn signal light (if so equipped)* Map light* Room light* Glove box light* Cargo light* High-mounted stop light* Rear combination light*
Turn signal Stop/Tail Tail Backup (reversing) License plate light
Wattage (W)
65 55 27/7 5
65 -- 27/7 -- 5 35 21 35 -- 10 8 1.4 5 --
21 21/5
5 16 5
Bulb No.*1
H9 H11 3457NAK W5W
H9 -- 3457NAK -- W5W H8 W21W H8 -- -- -- -- W5W --
WY21W W21/5W
W5W W16W W5W
Always check with the Parts Department at a NISSAN dealer for the latest parts information.
* If replacement is required, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Do-it-yourself 8-25
1. Map light 2. Room light 3. Door mirror turn signal light (if so
equipped) 4. Headlight assembly 5. Fog light (if so equipped) 6. Daytime Running Light (DRL) (if so
equipped) 7. License plate light 8. High-mounted stop light 9. Rear combination light
LDI3233
8-26 Do-it-yourself
SDI1805
Replacement procedures
All other lights are either type A, B, C or D. When replacing a bulb, first remove the lens, lamp and/or cover.
Indicates bulb removal Indicates bulb installation
WHEELS AND TIRES
JVC0014X
License plate light
If you have a flat tire, refer to "Flat tire" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
TIRE PRESSURE
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
WARNING
Radio waves could adversely affect electric medical equipment. Those who use a pacemaker should contact the electric medical equipment manufacturer for the possible influences before use. This vehicle is equipped with the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS). It monitors tire pressure of all tires except the spare. When the low tire pressure warning light is lit and the "Tire Pressure Low Add Air" warning appears in the vehicle information display, one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated. If equipped, the system also displays pressure of all tires (except the spare
tire) on the display screen by sending a signal from a sensor that is installed in each wheel.
The TPMS will activate only when the vehicle is driven at speeds above 16 mph (25 km/h). Also, this system may not detect a sudden drop in tire pressure (for example a flat tire while driving).
For additional information, refer to "Low tire pressure warning light" in the "Instruments and controls" section, "Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)" in the "Starting and driving" section and "Flat tire" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
Tire inflation pressure
Check the tire pressures (including the spare) often and always prior to long distance trips. The recommended tire pressure specifications are shown on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label or the Tire and Loading Information label under the
Do-it-yourself 8-27
"Cold Tire Pressure" heading. The Tire and Loading Information label is affixed to the driver side center pillar. Tire pressures should be checked regularly because:
Most tires naturally lose air over time.
Tires can lose air suddenly when driven over potholes or other objects or if the vehicle strikes a curb while parking.
The tire pressures should be checked when the tires are cold. The tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds.
The TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert provides visual and audible signals outside the vehicle for inflating tires to the recommended COLD tire pressure. For additional information, refer to "TPMS with Easy-Fill Tire Alert" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
8-28 Do-it-yourself
Incorrect tire pressure, including under inflation, may adversely affect tire life and vehicle handling.
WARNING
Improperly inflated tires can fail suddenly and cause an accident.
The Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) is located on the F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label. The vehicle weight capacity is indicated on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not load your vehicle beyond this capacity. Overloading your vehicle may result in reduced tire life, unsafe operating conditions due to premature tire failure, or unfavorable handling characteristics and could also lead to a serious accident. Loading beyond the specified capacity may also result in failure of other vehicle components.
Before taking a long trip, or whenever you heavily load your vehicle, use a tire pressure gauge to ensure that the tire pressures are at the specified level.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Tire and Loading Information label
1 Seating capacity: The maximum
number of occupants that can be seated in the vehicle.
2 Vehicle load limit: For additional
information, refer to "Vehicle loading information" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
LDI2007
3 Original tire size: The size of the
tires originally installed on the
vehicle at the factory.
4 Cold tire pressure: Inflate the
tires to this pressure when the tires are cold. Tires are considered COLD after the vehicle has been parked for 3 or more hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) at moderate speeds. The recommended cold tire inflation is set by the manufacturer to provide the best balance of tire wear, vehicle handling, driveability, tire noise, etc., up to the vehicle's GVWR.
5 Tire size - For additional infor-
mation, refer to "Tire labeling" in this section.
6 Spare tire size.
Do-it-yourself 8-29
Checking tire pressure
LDI0393
1. Remove the valve stem cap from the tire.
2. Press the pressure gauge squarely onto the valve stem. Do not press too hard or force the valve stem sideways, or air will escape. If the hissing sound of air escaping from the tire is heard while checking the pressure, reposition the gauge to eliminate this leakage.
8-30 Do-it-yourself
3. Remove the gauge.
4. Read the tire pressure on the gauge stem and compare to the specification shown on the Tire and Loading Information label.
5. Add air to the tire as needed. If too much air is added, press the core of the valve stem briefly with the tip of the gauge stem to release pressure. Recheck the pressure and add or release air as needed.
6. Install the valve stem cap.
7. Check the pressure of all other tires, including the spare.
Size
Cold Tire Inflation
Pressure
Front and Rear Original Tire: P205/55R17 91V P205/60R16 92H
32 PSI, 220 kPa
Spare Tire: (Temporary) T125/90D15
60 PSI, 420 kPa
Example
TIRE LABELING
WDI0394
Federal law requires tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires. This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides the Tire Identification Number (TIN) for safety standard certification. The TIN can be used to identify the tire in case of a recall.
6. Two- or three-digit number (95): This number is the tire's load index. It is a measurement of how much weight each tire can support. You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by law.
7. H: Tire speed rating. You should not drive the vehicle faster than the tire speed rating.
WDI0395
Example
1 Tire size (example: P215/65R15 3. Two-digit number (65): This
95H)
number, known as the aspect
1. P: The "P" indicates the tire is designed for passenger vehicles (not all tires have this informa-
ratio, gives the tire's ratio of height to width.
4. R: The "R" stands for radial.
tion).
5. Two-digit number (15): This num-
2. Three-digit number (215): This number gives the width in milli-
ber is the wheel or rim diameter in inches.
meters of the tire from sidewall
edge to sidewall edge.
Do-it-yourself 8-31
LDI2786
Example
2 TIN (Tire Identification Number) 3. Two-digit code: Tire size.
for a new tire (example: DOT XX XX XXX XXXX)
4. Three-digit code: Tire type code (Optional).
1. DOT: Abbreviation for the "Department Of Transportation". The symbol can be placed above, below or to the left or right of the Tire Identification Number.
5. Four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built. For example, the numbers 3103 means the 31st week of 2003. If these numbers are missing then look on the other sidewall of the
2. Two-digit code: Manufacturer's
tire.
identification mark.
3 Tire ply composition and material
The number of layers or plies of rubber-coated fabric in the tire. Tire manufacturers also must indicate the materials in the tire, which include steel, nylon, polyester and others.
4 Maximum permissible inflation
pressure
This number is the greatest amount of air pressure that should be put in the tire. Do not exceed the maximum permissible inflation pressure.
5 Maximum load rating
This number indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire. When replacing the tires on the vehicle, always use a tire that has the same load rating as the factory installed tire.
8-32 Do-it-yourself
6 Term of "tubeless" or "tube type"
Indicates whether the tire requires an inner tube ("tube type") or not ("tubeless").
7 The word "radial"
The word "radial" is shown if the tire has radial structure.
8 Manufacturer or brand name
Manufacturer or brand name is shown.
Other Tire-related Terminology
In addition to the many terms that are defined throughout this section, Intended Outboard Sidewall is (1) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or (2) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle.
TYPES OF TIRES
WARNING
When changing or replacing tires, be sure all four tires are of the same type (i.e., Summer, All Season or Snow) and construction. A NISSAN dealer may be able to help you with information about tire type, size, speed rating and availability.
Replacement tires may have a lower speed rating than the factory equipped tires, and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the low tire pressure warning system.
Always use tires of the same type, size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels. Failure to do so may result in a circumference difference between tires on the front and rear axles which can cause the Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system to malfunction resulting in personal injury or death, excessive tire wear and may damage the transmission and differential gears.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
All season tires
NISSAN specifies All Season tires on some models to provide good performance all year, including snowy and icy road conditions. All Season tires are identified by ALL SEASON and/or M&S on the tire sidewall. Snow tires have better snow traction than All Season tires and may be more appropriate in some areas.
Do-it-yourself 8-33
Summer tires
NISSAN specifies summer tires on some models to provide superior performance on dry roads. Summer tire performance is substantially reduced in snow and ice. Summer tires do not have the tire traction rating "M&S" on the tire sidewall.
If you plan to operate your vehicle in snowy or icy conditions, NISSAN recommends the use of SNOW tires or ALL SEASON tires on all four wheels.
Snow tires
If snow tires are needed, it is necessary to select tires equivalent in size and load rating to the original equipment tires. If you do not, it can adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.
Generally, snow tires have lower speed ratings than factory equipped tires and may not match the potential maximum vehicle speed. Never exceed the maximum speed rating of the tire.
If you install snow tires, they must be the same size, brand, construction and tread pattern on all four wheels.
For additional traction on icy roads, studded tires may be used. However, some
8-34 Do-it-yourself
states, provinces and territories prohibit their use. Check local laws before installing studded tires. Skid and traction capabilities of studded snow tires on wet or dry surfaces may be poorer than that of nonstudded snow tires.
TIRE CHAINS
Use of tire chains may be prohibited according to location. Check the local laws before installing tire chains. When installing tire chains, make sure they are the proper size for the tires on your vehicle and are installed according to the chain manufacturer's suggestions. Use only SAE class "S" chains. Class "S" chains are used on vehicles with restricted tire to vehicle clearance. Vehicles that can use Class "S" chains are designed to meet the minimum clearances between the tire and the closest vehicle suspension or body component required to accommodate the use of a winter traction device (tire chains or cables). The minimum clearances are determined using the factory equipped tires. Other types may damage your vehicle. Use chain tensioners when recommended by the tire chain manufacturer to ensure a tight fit. Loose end links of the tire chain must be secured or removed to prevent the possibility of whipping action damage
to the fenders or underbody. If possible, avoid fully loading your vehicle when using tire chains. In addition, drive at a reduced speed. Otherwise, your vehicle may be damaged and/or vehicle handling and performance may be adversely affected.
Tire chains must be installed only on the front wheels and not on the rear wheels.
Never install tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire.
Do not use tire chains on dry roads. Driving with chains in such conditions can cause damage to the various mechanisms of the vehicle due to some overstress.
Wheel nut tightening torque:
83 ft-lb (113 N·m)
The wheel nuts must be kept tightened to specifications at all times. It is recommended that wheel nuts be tightened to specification at each tire rotation interval.
WDI0258
CHANGING WHEELS AND TIRES
Tire rotation
NISSAN recommends rotating the tires every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
For additional information on the tire replacing procedures, refer to "Flat tire" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
As soon as possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the specified torque with a torque wrench.
WARNING
After rotating the tires, check and adjust the tire pressure.
Retighten the wheel nuts when the vehicle has been driven for 600 miles (1,000 km) (also in cases of a flat tire, etc.).
Do not include the spare tire in the tire rotation.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Tire wear and damage 1. Wear indicator 2. Location mark
WDI0259
WARNING
Tires should be periodically inspected for wear, cracking, bulging or objects caught in the tread. If excessive wear, cracks, bulging or deep cuts are found, the tire(s) should be replaced.
Do-it-yourself 8-35
The original tires have built-in tread wear indicators. When the wear indicators are visible, the tire(s) should be replaced.
Tires degrade with age and use. Have tires, including the spare, over 6 years old checked by a qualified technician because some tire damage may not be obvious. Replace the tires as necessary to prevent tire failure and possible personal injury.
Improper service of the spare tire may result in serious personal injury. If it is necessary to repair the spare tire, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Replacing wheels and tires
When replacing a tire, use the same size, tread design, speed rating and load carrying capacity as originally equipped. For additional information, refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
WARNING
The use of tires other than those recommended or the mixed use of tires of different brands, construction (bias, bias-belted or radial), or tread patterns can adversely affect the ride, braking, handling, Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system, ground clearance, body-to-tire clearance, tire chain clearance, speedometer calibration, headlight aim and bumper height. Some of these effects may lead to accidents and could result in serious personal injury.
If your vehicle was originally equipped with four tires that were the same size and you are only replacing two of the four tires, install the new tires on the rear axle. Placing new tires on the front axle may cause loss of vehicle control in some driving conditions and cause an accident and personal injury.
If the wheels are changed for any reason, always replace with wheels which have the same off-set dimension. Wheels of a different off-set could cause premature tire wear, degrade vehicle handling characteristics, affect the VDC system and/or interference with the brake discs/drums. Such interference can lead to decreased braking efficiency and/or early brake pad wear. For additional information on wheel off-set dimensions, refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
8-36 Do-it-yourself
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function and the low tire pressure warning light will flash for approximately 1 minute. The light will remain on after 1 minute. Have your tires replaced and/or TPMS system reset as soon as possible. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Replacing tires with those not originally specified by NISSAN could affect the proper operation of the TPMS.
The TPMS sensor may be damaged if it is not handled correctly. Be careful when handling the TPMS sensor.
When replacing the TPMS sensor, the ID registration may be required. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for ID registration.
Do not use a valve stem cap that is not specified by NISSAN. The valve stem cap may become stuck.
Be sure that the valve stem caps are correctly fitted. Otherwise the valve may be clogged up with dirt and cause a malfunction or loss of pressure.
Do not install a damaged or deformed wheel or tire even if it has been repaired. Such wheels or tires could have structural damage and could fail without warning.
The use of retread tires is not recommended.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Wheel balance
Unbalanced wheels may affect vehicle handling and tire life. Even with regular use, wheels can get out of balance. Therefore, they should be balanced as required.
Wheel balance service should be performed with the wheels off the vehicle. Spin balancing the wheels on the vehicle could lead to mechanical damage.
Care of wheels
Wash the wheels when washing the vehicle to maintain their appearance.
Clean the inner side of the wheels when the wheel is changed or the underside of the vehicle is washed.
Do not use abrasive cleaners when washing the wheels.
Inspect wheel rims regularly for dents or corrosion. Such damage may cause loss of pressure or poor seal at the tire bead.
NISSAN recommends waxing the road wheels to protect against road salt in areas where it is used during winter.
Do-it-yourself 8-37
Spare tire (TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire)
When replacing a wheel without the TPMS such as the spare tire, the TPMS will not function.
Observe the following precautions if the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire must be used. Otherwise, your vehicle could be damaged or involved in an accident:
WARNING
The spare tire should be used for emergency use only. It should be replaced with the standard tire at the first opportunity to avoid possible tire or differential damage.
Drive carefully while the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed. Avoid sharp turns and abrupt braking while driving.
Periodically check spare tire inflation pressure. Always keep the pressure of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire at 420 kPa, 4.2 bar (60 psi).
With the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire installed do not drive the vehicle at speeds faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
When driving on roads covered with snow or ice, the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire should be used on the rear wheels and the original tire used on the front wheels (drive wheels).
Tire tread of the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire will wear at a faster rate than the standard tire. Replace the spare tire as soon as the tread wear indicators appear.
Do not use the spare tire on other vehicles.
Do not use more than one spare tire at the same time.
Do not tow a trailer when the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is installed.
CAUTION
Do not use tire chains on a TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire. Tire chains will not fit properly and may cause damage to the vehicle.
Because the TEMPORARY USE ONLY spare tire is smaller than the original tire, ground clearance is reduced. To avoid damage to the vehicle, do not drive over obstacles. Also, do not drive the vehicle through an automatic car wash since it may get caught.
8-38 Do-it-yourself
9 Maintenance and schedules
Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Scheduled maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Where to go for service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2 Explanation of general maintenance items. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . 9-5 Emission control system maintenance:. . . . . . . 9-5 Chassis and body maintenance:. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-6
Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7 Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8 Emission control system maintenance . . . . . . . 9-8 Chassis & body maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-10
Maintenance under severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12
Severe driving conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-12 Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-13
MAINTENANCE REQUIREMENTS
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
Some day-to-day and regular maintenance is essential to maintain your vehicle good mechanical condition, as well as its emissions and engine performance.
It is the owner's responsibility to make sure that the scheduled maintenance, as well as general maintenance, is performed.
As the vehicle owner, you are the only one who can ensure that your vehicle receives proper maintenance. You are a vital link in the maintenance chain.
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General maintenance includes those items which should be checked during normal day-to-day operation. They are essential for proper vehicle operation. It is your responsibility to perform these procedures regularly as prescribed.
Performing general maintenance checks requires minimal mechanical skill and only a few general automotive tools.
These checks or inspections can be done by yourself, a qualified technician or, if you prefer, a NISSAN dealer.
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
The maintenance items listed in this section are required to be serviced at regular intervals. However under severe driving conditions, additional or more frequent maintenance will be required.
WHERE TO GO FOR SERVICE
If maintenance service is required or your vehicle appears to malfunction, have the systems checked and serviced. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
NISSAN technicians are well-trained specialists and are kept up-to-date with the latest service information through technical bulletins, service tips and training programs. They are completely qualified to work on NISSAN vehicles before work begins.
You can be confident that a NISSAN dealer's service department can perform the service needed to meet the maintenance requirements on your vehicle.
During the normal day-to-day operation of the vehicle, general maintenance should be performed regularly as prescribed in this section. If you detect any unusual sounds, vibrations or smells, be sure to check for the cause or have it checked promptly. In addition, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer if you think that repairs are required.
When performing any checks or maintenance work, closely observe the "Maintenance precautions" in the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.
EXPLANATION OF GENERAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Additional information on the following items with " * " is found in the "Do-ityourself " section of this manual.
Outside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be performed from time to time, unless otherwise specified.
9-2 Maintenance and schedules
Doors and engine hood: Check that the doors and engine hood operate properly. Also ensure that all latches lock securely. Lubricate hinges, latches, latch pins, rollers and links if necessary. Make sure that the secondary latch keeps the hood from opening when the primary latch is released.
When driving in areas using road salt or other corrosive materials, check lubrication frequently.
Lights*: Clean the headlights on a regular basis. Make sure that the headlights, stop lights, tail lights, turn signal lights, and other lights are all operating properly and installed securely. Also check headlight aim.
Road wheel nuts (lug nuts)*: When checking the tires, make sure no wheel nuts are missing, and check for any loose wheel nuts. Tighten if necessary.
Tire rotation*: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km).
Tires*: Check the pressure with a gauge often and always prior to long distance trips. If necessary, adjust the pressure in all tires, including the spare, to the pressure specified. Check carefully for damage, cuts or excessive wear.
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) transmitter components: Replace the TPMS transmitter grommet seal, valve core and cap when the tires are replaced due to wear or age.
Wheel alignment and balance: If the vehicle should pull to either side while driving on a straight and level road, or if you detect uneven or abnormal tire wear, there may be a need for wheel alignment. If the steering wheel or seat vibrates at normal highway speeds, wheel balancing may be needed.
For additional information regarding tires, refer to "Important Tire Safety Information" (US) or "Tire Safety Information" (Canada) in the Warranty Information Booklet.
Windshield: Clean the windshield on a regular basis. Check the windshield at least every six months for cracks or other damage. Have a damaged windshield repaired by a qualified repair facility.
Windshield wiper blades*: Check for cracks or wear if they do not wipe properly.
Inside the vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked on a regular basis, such as
when performing scheduled maintenance, cleaning the vehicle, etc.
Accelerator pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation and make sure the pedal does not catch or require uneven effort. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brake pedal: Check the pedal for smooth operation. If the brake pedal suddenly goes down further than normal, the pedal feels spongy or the vehicle seems to take longer to stop, have your vehicle checked immediately. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. Keep the floor mat away from the pedal.
Brakes: Check that the brakes do not pull the vehicle to one side when applied.
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) P (Park) position mechanism: On a fairly steep hill check that the vehicle is held securely with the shift lever in the P (Park) position without applying any brakes.
Parking brake: Check the parking brake operation regularly. The vehicle should be securely held on a fairly steep hill with only the parking brake applied. If the parking
Maintenance and schedules 9-3
brake needs adjustment, it is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service.
Seats: Check seat position controls such as seat adjusters, seatback recliner, etc., to ensure they operate smoothly and all latches lock securely in every position. Check that the head restraints/headrests move up and down smoothly and the locks (if so equipped) hold securely in all latched positions.
Seat belts: Check that all parts of the seat belt system (for example, buckles, anchors, adjusters and retractors) operate properly and smoothly, and are installed securely. Check the belt webbing for cuts, fraying, wear or damage.
Steering wheel: Check for changes in the steering system, such as excessive free play, hard steering or strange noises.
Warning lights and chimes: Make sure all warning lights and chimes are operating properly.
Windshield defroster: Check that the air comes out of the defroster outlets properly and in sufficient quantity when operating the heater or air conditioner.
9-4 Maintenance and schedules
Windshield wiper and washer*: Check that the wipers and washer operate properly and that the wipers do not streak.
Under the hood and vehicle
The maintenance items listed here should be checked periodically (for example, each time you check the engine oil or refuel).
Battery*:This vehicle is equipped with a sealed maintenance free battery. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for service.
NOTE:
Care should be taken to avoid situations that can lead to potential battery discharge and potential no-start conditions such as:
1. Installation or extended use of electronic accessories that consume battery power when the engine is not running (Phone chargers, GPS, DVD players, etc.).
2. Vehicle is not driven regularly and/or only driven short distances.
In these cases, the battery may need to be charged to maintain battery health.
Brake fluid level*: Make sure that the brake fluid level is between the MIN and MAX lines on the reservoir.
Engine coolant level*: Check the coolant level when the engine is cold.
Engine drive belt*: Make sure the drive belt is not frayed, worn, cracked or oily.
Engine oil level*: Check the level after parking the vehicle on a level surface with the engine off. Wait more than 15 minutes for the oil to drain back into the oil pan.
Exhaust system: Make sure there are no loose supports, cracks or holes. If the sound of the exhaust seems unusual or there is a smell of exhaust fumes, immediately have the exhaust system inspected. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for this service. For additional information, refer to "Exhaust gas (carbon monoxide)" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual.
Fluid leaks: Check under the vehicle for fuel, oil, water or other fluid leaks after the vehicle has been parked for a while. Water dripping from the air conditioner after use is normal. If you should notice any leaks or if fuel fumes are evident, check for the cause and have it corrected immediately.
EXPLANATION OF SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE ITEMS
Radiator and hoses: Check the front of the radiator and clean off any dirt, insects, leaves, etc., that may have accumulated. Make sure the hoses have no cracks, deformation, rot or loose connections.
Underbody: The underbody is frequently exposed to corrosive substances such as those used on icy roads or to control dust. It is very important to remove these substances from the underbody, otherwise rust may form on the floor pan, frame, fuel lines and exhaust system. At the end of winter, the underbody should be thoroughly flushed with plain water, in those areas where mud and dirt may have accumulated. For additional information, refer to the "Appearance and care" section of this manual.
Windshield-washer fluid*: Check that there is adequate fluid in the reservoir.
The following descriptions are provided to give you a better understanding of the scheduled maintenance items that should be regularly checked or replaced. The maintenance schedule indicates at which mileage/time intervals each item requires service.
In addition to scheduled maintenance, your vehicle requires that some items be checked during normal day-to-day operation. For additional information, refer to "General maintenance" in this section.
Items marked with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. You are not required to perform maintenance on these items in order to maintain the warranties which come with your NISSAN. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
When applicable, additional information can be found in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
NOTE:
NISSAN does not advocate the use of non-OEM approved aftermarket flushing systems and strongly advises against performing these services on a NISSAN product. Many of the aftermarket flushing systems use non-OEM approved chemicals or solvents, the use of which has not been validated by NISSAN.
For recommended fuel, lubricants, fluids, grease, and refrigerant, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE:
Drive belt*: Check engine drive belt for wear, fraying or cracking and for proper tension. Replace any damaged drive belt.
Engine air filter: Replace at specified intervals. When driving for prolonged periods in dusty conditions, check/replace the filter more frequently.
Engine coolant*: Replace coolant at the specified interval. When adding or replacing coolant, be sure to use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue)
Maintenance and schedules 9-5
or equivalent with the proper mixture. (For additional information on the proper mixture for your area, refer to "Engine cooling system" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.)
NOTE: Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the recommended service interval of the coolant.
Engine oil and oil filter: Replace engine oil and oil filter at the specified intervals. For recommended oil grade and viscosity refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
Fuel lines*: Check the fuel hoses, piping and connections for leaks, looseness, or deterioration. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Spark plugs: Replace at specified intervals. Install new plugs of the type as originally equipped.
CHASSIS AND BODY MAINTENANCE:
Brake lines and cables: Visually inspect for proper installation. Check for chafing, cracks, deterioration, and signs of leaking. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings: Check for wear, deterioration and fluid leaks. Replace any deteriorated or damaged parts immediately.
Exhaust system: Visually inspect the exhaust pipes, muffler and hangers for leaks, cracks, deterioration, and damage. Tighten connections or replace parts as necessary.
Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts, drive shaft boots: Check for damage, looseness, and leakage of oil or grease. Under severe driving conditions, inspect more frequently.
Tire rotation: Tires should be rotated every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) according to the instructions under "General maintenance" in this section. When rotating tires, check for damage and uneven wear. Replace if necessary.
Transmission fluid/oil: Visually inspect for signs of leakage at specified intervals.
If using a car-top carrier, or driving on rough or muddy roads, replace the CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km) or request the dealer to inspect the fluid deterioration data using a CONSULT. If the deterioration data is more than 210000, replace the CVT fluid.
9-6 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
To help ensure smooth, safe and economical driving, NISSAN provides two maintenance schedules that may be used, depending upon the conditions in which you usually drive. These schedules contain both distance and time intervals, up to 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months. For most people, the odometer reading will indicate when service is needed. However, if you drive very little, your vehicle should be serviced at the regular time intervals shown in the schedule.
After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/ 144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time intervals.
ADDITIONAL MAINTENANCE ITEMS FOR SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS
Additional maintenance items for severe operating conditions should be performed on vehicles that are driven under especially demanding conditions. Additional maintenance items should be performed if you primarily operate your vehicle under the following conditions:
Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
Operating in hot weather in stopand-go "rush hour" traffic.
Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distances, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.
Using a car-top carrier.
NOTE:
For vehicles operated in Canada, both standard and severe maintenance items should be performed at every interval.
Maintenance and schedules 9-7
STANDARD MAINTENANCE
The following tables show the standard maintenance schedule. Depending upon weather and atmospheric conditions, varying road surfaces, individual driving habits and vehicle usage, additional or more frequent maintenance may be required. After 120,000 miles (192,000 km)/144 months, continue maintenance at the same mileage/time interval.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000)
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
10
15
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
55
60
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
Months
6
12
18
24
30
36
42
48
54
60
66
72
Drive belt
See NOTE (1)
I*
I*
I*
Air cleaner filter
See NOTE (2)
R
R
EVAP vapor lines
I*
I*
I*
Fuel lines
I*
I*
I*
Fuel filter
See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant*
See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Spark plugs
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*
See NOTE (6)
9-8 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or
months, whichever comes first.
miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000)
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
65
70
75
80
85
90
95 100 105 110 115 120
(104) (112) (120) (128) (136) (144) (152) (160) (168) (176) (184) (192)
Months
78
84
90
96 102 108 114 120 126 132 138 144
Drive belt
See NOTE (1)
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
I*
Air cleaner filter
See NOTE (2)
R
R
EVAP vapor lines
I*
I*
I*
Fuel lines
I*
I*
I*
Fuel filter
See NOTE (3)
Engine coolant*
See NOTE (4)(5)
Engine oil
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Engine oil filter
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Spark plugs
See NOTE (6)
Replace every 105,000 miles (168,000 km)
Intake and exhaust valve clearances*
See NOTE (7)
NOTE:
(1) After 40,000 miles (64,000 km) or 48 months, inspect every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months. Replace the drive belt if found damaged. (2) If operating mainly in dusty conditions, more frequent maintenance may be required. (3) Maintenance-free item. (4) First replacement interval is 105,000 miles (168,000 km) or 84 months. After first replacement, replace every 75,000 miles (120,000 km) or 60 months. (5) Use only Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent with proper mixture ratio of 50% antifreeze and 50% demineralized or distilled water. Mixing any other type of coolant or the use of non-distilled water may reduce the life expectancy of the factory fill coolant. (6) Replace spark plug when the plug exceeds 1.35 mm (0.053 in) even if within specified periodic replacement mileage. (7) Periodic maintenance is not required. However, if valve noise increased, inspect valve clearance.
*: Maintenance items and intervals with "*" are recommended by NISSAN for reliable vehicle operation. The owner need not perform such maintenance in order to maintain the emission warranty or manufacturer recall liability. Other maintenance items and intervals are required.
Maintenance and schedules 9-9
CHASSIS & BODY MAINTENANCE
Abbreviations: I = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary, R = Replace,
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines & cables Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings Brake fluid CVT fluid Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts Tire rotation Drive shaft boots Exhaust system In-cabin microfilter NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
5
10 15 20 25
30
35 40 45 50 55 60
(8) (16) (24) (32) (40) (48) (56) (64) (72) (80) (88) (96)
6
12 18 24 30
36
42 48 54 60 66 72
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
I
R
R
R
9-10 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE OPERATION Perform at number of miles, kilometers or months,
whichever comes first.
Brake lines & cables Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings Brake fluid CVT fluid Steering gear and linkage, axle and suspension parts Tire rotation Drive shaft boots Exhaust system In-cabin microfilter NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery
miles x 1,000 (km x 1,000)
Months
See NOTE (1)
See NOTE (2)
65 (104)
78
70 75 80
(112) (120) (128)
84 90 96
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
MAINTENANCE INTERVAL
85
90
95 100
(136) (144) (152) (160)
102 108 114 120
I
I
I
I
R
I
I
I
105 (168) 126
110 (176) 132
I I
I
115 (184) 138
120 (192) 144
I I R I I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
NOTE:
Maintenance items with "" should be performed more frequently according to "Maintenance under severe driving conditions". (1) If using a car-top carrier or driving on rough or muddy roads, inspect CVT fluid deterioration every 60,000 miles (96,000 km), then change CVT fluid if necessary. And if the inspection is not performed, change (not just inspect) CVT fluid every 60,000 miles (96,000 km). It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to perform this service. (2) For additional information on tire rotation, refer to "General maintenance" in this section.
Maintenance and schedules 9-11
MAINTENANCE UNDER SEVERE OPERATING CONDITIONS
The maintenance intervals shown on the preceding pages are for normal operating conditions. If the vehicle is mainly operated under severe driving conditions as shown below, more frequent maintenance must be performed on the following items as shown in the table.
SEVERE DRIVING CONDITIONS
Repeated short trips of less than 5 miles (8 km).
Repeated short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km) with outside temperatures remaining below freezing.
Operating in hot weather in stopand-go "rush hour" traffic.
Maintenance operation: Inspect = Inspect and correct or replace as necessary.
Extensive idling and/or low speed driving for long distance, such as police, taxi or door-to-door delivery use.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Driving on rough, muddy or salt spread roads.
Using a car-top carrier.
Maintenance item Brake fluid Brake pads, rotors, drums and linings Steering gear & linkage, axle & suspension parts Drive shaft boots Exhaust system
Maintenance operation Replace Inspect Inspect Inspect Inspect
Maintenance interval Every 10,000 miles (16,000 km) or 12 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months Every 5,000 miles (8,000 km) or 6 months
9-12 Maintenance and schedules
MAINTENANCE LOG
5,000 Miles (8,000 km) or 6 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
20,000 Miles (32,000 km) or 24 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
35,000 Miles (56,000 km) or 42 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
10,000 Miles (16,000 km) or 12 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
25,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 30 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
40,000 Miles (64,000 km) or 48 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
15,000 Miles (24,000 km) or 18 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
30,000 Miles (48,000 km) or 36 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
45,000 Miles (72,000 km) or 54 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
Maintenance and schedules 9-13
50,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 60 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
65,000 Miles (104,000 km) or 78 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
80,000 Miles (128,000 km) or 96 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
55,000 Miles (88,000 km) or 66 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
70,000 Miles (112,000 km) or 84 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
85,000 Miles (136,000 km) or 102 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
60,000 Miles (96,000 km) or 72 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
75,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 90 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
90,000 Miles (144,000 km) or 108 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
9-14 Maintenance and schedules
95,000 Miles (152,000 km) or 114 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
110,000 Miles (176,000 km) or 132 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
100,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 120 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
115,000 Miles (184,000 km) or 138 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
105,000 Miles (168,000 km) or 126 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
120,000 Miles (192,000 km) or 144 Months Dealer Name: Date: Mileage: Dealer Stamp:
Maintenance and schedules 9-15
MEMO
9-16 Maintenance and schedules
10 Technical and consumer information
Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-2
Fuel recommendation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 Engine oil and oil filter recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-6 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-7 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-8 Wheels and tires. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 Dimensions and weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-9 When traveling or registering in another country. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-10 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-11 F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. certification label . . . . . . . . .10-11
Emission control information label . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Tire and Loading Information label . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Air conditioner specification label. . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Installing front license plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-12 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-13 Vehicle load capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-14 Securing the load. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-15 Loading tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-16 Measurement of weights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-17 Uniform tire quality grading. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-18 Emission control system warranty. . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Reporting safety defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-19 Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-20 Event Data Recorders (EDR). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21 Owner's Manual/Service Manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-21
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS/ LUBRICANTS AND CAPACITIES
The following are approximate capacities. The actual refill capacities may be a little different. When refilling, follow the procedure described in the "Do-it-yourself" section to determine the proper refill capacity.
Fluid type
Fuel
Engine oil*1 Drain and refill 1*: For additional information, refer to "Engine oil" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
Engine coolant with reservoir
With oil filter change
Without oil filter change
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid
Brake fluid Multi-purpose grease Air conditioning system refrigerant
Capacity (approximate)
Metric Measure
US Measure
Imperial Measure
41 L
10-7/8 gal
9 gal
4.1 L
4-3/8 qt
3-5/8 qt
3.8 L 6.95 L
4 qt
3-3/8 qt
1-7/8 gal
1-1/2 gal
For additional information, refer to the "Do-it-yourself" section of this manual.
Refill to the proper level according to the
instructions in the "Do-it-yourself" section
of this manual.
--
--
--
--
--
--
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
· For additional information, refer to "Fuel recommendation" in this section. · Genuine "Nissan Motor Oil 0W-20 SN" (or equivalent) is recommended. · If the above motor oil (or engine oil) is not available, a synthetic 0W-20 GF-5 SN motor oil (or engine oil) may be used. Damage caused by the use of motor oil (or engine oil) other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's/INFINITI's New Vehicle Limited Warranty. For additional information, refer to "Engine oil and oil filter recommendations" in this section. · Pre-diluted Genuine NISSAN Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant (blue) or equivalent · Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 · NISSAN recommends using Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 (or equivalent) ONLY in NISSAN CVTs. Do not mix with other fluids. Using fluids that are not equivalent to Genuine NISSAN CVT Fluid NS-3 may damage the CVT. Damage caused by the use of fluids other than as recommended is not covered under NISSAN's New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
· Genuine NISSAN Super Heavy Duty Brake Fluid, available in mainland U.S.A. through a NISSAN dealer, or equivalent DOT 3.
· NLGI No. 2 (Lithium soap base) · HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) · For additional information, refer to "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" in this section.
10-2 Technical and consumer information
Fluid type
Air conditioning system oil Windshield-washer fluid
Capacity (approximate)
Metric Measure
US Measure
Imperial Measure
--
--
--
--
--
--
Recommended Fluids/Lubricants
· Genuine NISSAN A/C System Oil Type PAG or equivalent · For additional information, refer to "Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations" in this section. · Genuine NISSAN Windshield Washer Concentrate Cleaner & Antifreeze or equivalent
FUEL RECOMMENDATION
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Technical and consumer information 10-3
Gasoline specifications
NISSAN recommends using gasoline that meets the World-Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) specifications where it is available. Many of the automobile manufacturers developed this specification to improve emission control system and vehicle performance. Ask your service station manager if the gasoline meets the WWFC specifications.
Reformulated gasoline
Some fuel suppliers are now producing reformulated gasolines. These gasolines are specially designed to reduce vehicle emissions. NISSAN supports efforts towards cleaner air and suggests that you use reformulated gasoline when available.
Gasoline containing oxygenates
Some fuel suppliers sell gasoline containing oxygenates such as ethanol, Methyl Tert-butyl Ether (MTBE) and methanol with or without advertising their presence. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuels of which the oxygenate content and the fuel compatibility for your NISSAN cannot be readily determined. If in doubt, ask your service station manager.
If you use oxygenate-blend gasoline, please take the following precautions as the usage of such fuels may cause vehicle performance problems and/or fuel system damage.
The fuel should be unleaded and have an octane rating no lower than that recommended for unleaded gasoline.
If an oxygenate-blend other than methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 15% oxygenate.
If a methanol blend is used, it should contain no more than 5% methanol (methyl alcohol, wood alcohol). It should also contain a suitable amount of appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors. If not properly formulated with appropriate cosolvents and corrosion inhibitors, such methanol blends may cause fuel system damage and/or vehicle performance problems. At this time, sufficient data is not available to ensure that all methanol blends are suitable for use in NISSAN vehicles.
10-4 Technical and consumer information
If any driveability problems such as engine stalling and difficult hot-starting are experienced after using oxygenate-blend fuels, immediately change to a non-oxygenate fuel or a fuel with a low blend of MTBE.
Take care not to spill gasoline during refueling. Gasoline containing oxygenates can cause paint damage.
E15 fuel
E-15 fuel is a mixture of approximately 15% fuel ethanol and 85% unleaded gasoline. E-15 can only be used in vehicles designed to run on E-15 fuel. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified with small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
E85 fuel
E-85 fuel is a mixture of approximately 85% fuel ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. E-85 can only be used in a Flexible Fuel Vehicle (FFV). Do not use E-85 in your vehicle. U.S. government regulations require fuel ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
Fuel containing MMT
MMT, or methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl, is an octane boosting additive. NISSAN does not recommend the use of fuel containing MMT. Such fuel may adversely affect vehicle performance, including the emissions control system. Note that while some fuel pumps label MMT content, not all do, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details.
Aftermarket fuel additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of any aftermarket fuel additives (for example, fuel injector cleaner, octane booster, intake valve deposit removers, etc.) which are sold commercially. Many of these additives intended for gum, varnish or deposit removal may contain active solvents or similar ingredients that can be harmful to the fuel system and engine.
Octane rating tips
Using unleaded gasoline with an octane rating lower than recommended can cause persistent, heavy "spark knock." ("Spark knock" is a metallic rapping noise.) If severe, this can lead to engine damage. If you detect a persistent heavy spark knock even when using gasoline of the stated octane rating, or if you hear steady spark knock while holding a steady speed on level roads, it is recommended that you have a NISSAN dealer correct the condition. Failure to correct the condition is misuse of the vehicle, for which NISSAN is not responsible.
Incorrect ignition timing may result in spark knock, after-run and/or overheating, which may cause excessive fuel consumption or engine damage. If any of the above symptoms are encountered, have your vehicle checked. It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer for servicing.
However, now and then you may notice light spark knock for a short time while accelerating or driving up hills. This is not a cause for concern, because you get the greatest fuel benefit when there is light spark knock for a short time under heavy engine load.
Technical and consumer information 10-5
ENGINE OIL AND OIL FILTER RECOMMENDATIONS
Selecting the correct oil
It is essential to choose the correct grade, quality and viscosity engine oil to ensure satisfactory engine life and performance. For additional information, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in this section. NISSAN recommends the use of an energy conserving oil in order to improve fuel economy.
LTI2051
Select only engine oils that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) certification or International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee (ILSAC) certification and SAE viscosity standard. These oils have the API certification mark on the front of the container. Oils which do not have the specified quality label should not be used as they could cause engine damage.
Oil additives
NISSAN does not recommend the use of oil additives. The use of an oil additive is not necessary when the proper oil type is used and maintenance intervals are followed.
Oil which may contain foreign matter or has been previously used should not be used.
Oil viscosity
The engine oil viscosity or thickness changes with temperature. Because of this, it is important to select the engine oil viscosity based on the temperatures at which the vehicle will be operated before the next oil change. Choosing an oil viscosity other than that recommended could cause serious engine damage.
Selecting the correct oil filter
Your new NISSAN vehicle is equipped with a high-quality Genuine NISSAN oil filter. When replacing, use a Genuine NISSAN oil filter or its equivalent for the reason described in "Change intervals."
10-6 Technical and consumer information
Change intervals
The oil and oil filter change intervals for your engine are based on the use of the specified quality oils and filters. Using engine oil and filters that are not of the specified quality, or exceeding recommended oil and filter change intervals could reduce engine life. Damage to the engine caused by improper maintenance or use of incorrect oil and filter quality and/or viscosity is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Your engine was filled with a high-quality engine oil when it was built. You do not have to change the oil before the first recommended change interval. Oil and filter change intervals depend upon how you use your vehicle.
Operation under the following conditions may require more frequent oil and filter changes:
repeated short distance driving at cold outside temperatures
driving in dusty conditions
extensive idling
stop and go commuting
For additional information, refer to the "Maintenance and schedules" section of this manual.
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM REFRIGERANT AND OIL RECOMMENDATIONS
The air conditioner system in your NISSAN vehicle must be charged with the refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) and NISSAN A/C system oil Type PAG or the exact equivalents.
CAUTION
The use of any other refrigerant or oil will cause severe damage to the air conditioning system and will require the replacement of all air conditioner system components.
The refrigerant HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf) in your NISSAN vehicle does not harm the earth's ozone layer. Although this refrigerant does not affect the earth's atmosphere, certain government regulations require the recovery and recycling of any refrigerant during automotive air conditioner system service. A NISSAN dealer has the trained technicians and equipment needed to recover and recycle your air conditioner system refrigerant.
It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer when servicing your air conditioner system.
Technical and consumer information 10-7
SPECIFICATIONS
ENGINE
Model
Type Cylinder arrangement Bore x Stroke Displacement Firing order
Idle speed
CVT in N (Neutral) position Ignition timing (degree B.T.D.C. at idle speed) CO % at idle
Spark plug
Spark plug gap (Nominal)
Camshaft operation
in (mm) cu in (cm3)
in (mm)
This spark ignition system complies with the Canadian standard ICES-002.
HR16DE Gasoline, 4-cycle, DOHC
4-cylinder, inline 3.071 x 3.291 (78.0 x 83.6)
97.51 (1,598) 1342
No adjustment is necessary.
DILKAR6K-11 0.043 (1.1)
Timing chain
10-8 Technical and consumer information
WHEELS AND TIRES
Wheel type Aluminum Steel Tire size
Spare tire
Size 17 x 6.5J 16 x 6J P205/60R16 P205/55R17 T125/90D15
Offset in (mm) 1.77 (45) 1.77 (45)
DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS
Overall length Overall width Overall height
Without Roof rack R16 R17
With Roof rack R16 R17
Track width Front Rear
Wheelbase
Gross vehicle weight rating
Gross axle weight rating
Front
Rear
in (mm) in (mm)
169.1 (4,295) 69.3 (1,760)
in (mm) in (mm)
62.2 (1,580) 62.4 (1,586)
in (mm) in (mm)
62.4 (1,584) 62.4 (1,586)
in (mm) in (mm) in (mm)
59.8 (1,520) 60.4 (1,535) 103.1 (2,620)
lbs. (kg)
lbs. (kg) lbs. (kg)
For additional information, refer to the "F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V. S.S. certification label" on the center pillar between the driver's side front and rear doors.
Technical and consumer information 10-9
WHEN TRAVELING OR REGISTERING VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION IN ANOTHER COUNTRY
When planning to drive your NISSAN vehicle in another country, you should first find out if the fuel available is suitable for your vehicle's engine.
Using fuel with an octane rating that is too low may cause engine damage. All gasoline vehicles must be operated with unleaded gasoline. Therefore, avoid taking your vehicle to areas where appropriate fuel is not available.
When transferring the registration of your vehicle to another country, state, province or district, it may be necessary to modify the vehicle to meet local laws and regulations.
The laws and regulations for motor vehicle emission control and safety standards vary according to the country, state, province or district; therefore, vehicle specifications may differ.
When any vehicle is to be taken into another country, state, province or district and registered, its modifications, transportation and registration are the responsibility of the user. NISSAN is not responsible for any inconvenience that may result.
LTI2050
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (VIN) PLATE
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) plate is attached as shown. This number is the identification for your vehicle and is used in the vehicle registration.
LTI2258
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER (chassis number)
The vehicle identification number is located as shown.
10-10 Technical and consumer information
HR16DE engine
ENGINE SERIAL NUMBER
LTI2260
The number is stamped on the engine as shown.
WTI0172
F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S. CERTIFICATION LABEL
The Federal/Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard (F.M.V.S.S./C.M.V.S.S.) certification label is affixed as shown. This label contains valuable vehicle information, such as: Gross Vehicle Weight Ratings (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR), month and year of manufacture, Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), etc. Review it carefully.
EMISSION CONTROL INFORMATION LABEL
LTI2268
The emission control information label is attached to the underside of the hood as shown.
Technical and consumer information 10-11
INSTALLING FRONT LICENSE PLATE
LTI2251
TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION LABEL
The cold tire pressure is shown on the Tire and Loading Information label. The label is located as shown.
LTI2233
AIR CONDITIONER SPECIFICATION LABEL
The air conditioner specification label is affixed as shown.
LTI2235
For alignment purposes, there are two marks on the bumper fascia to indicate the correct position for each screw.
To install the front license plate:
Use two 6 mm self-tapping screws to attach front license plate to bumper fascia.
NOTE:
Self-tapping screws are not supplied with vehicle.
10-12 Technical and consumer information
VEHICLE LOADING INFORMATION
WARNING
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a seat belt properly.
TERMS
It is important to familiarize yourself with the following terms before loading your vehicle:
Curb Weight (actual weight of your vehicle) - vehicle weight including: standard parts, fluids, emergency tools, and spare tire assembly. This weight does not include passengers and cargo.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) - curb weight plus the combined weight of passengers and cargo.
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) - maximum total combined weight of the unloaded vehicle, passengers, luggage, hitch, trailer tongue load and any other optional equipment. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) maximum weight (load) limit specified for the front or rear axle. This information is located on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.
GCWR (Gross Combined Weight rating) - The maximum total weight rating of the vehicle, passengers, cargo, and trailer.
Vehicle Capacity Weight, Load limit, Total load capacity - maximum total weight limit specified of the load (passengers and cargo) for the vehicle. This is the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo that can be loaded into the vehicle. If the vehicle is used to tow a trailer, the trailer tongue weight must be included as part of the cargo load. This information is located on the Tire and Loading Information label.
Cargo capacity - permissible weight of cargo, the subtracted weight of occupants from the load limit.
Technical and consumer information 10-13
VEHICLE LOAD CAPACITY Do not exceed the load limit of your vehicle shown as "The combined weight of occupants and cargo" on the Tire and Loading Information label. Do not exceed the number of occupants shown as "Seating Capacity" on the Tire and Loading Information label. To get "the combined weight of occupants and cargo", add the weight of all occupants, then add the total luggage weight. Examples are shown in the following illustration.
10-14 Technical and consumer information
Example
LTI2335
Steps for determining correct load limit
1. Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs. or XXX kg" on your vehicle's Tire and Loading Information label.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs. or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the XXX amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lbs. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400-750 (5 X 150) = 650 lbs.) or (640-340 (5 X 70) = 300 kg.)
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
Before driving a loaded vehicle, confirm that you do not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for your vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Measurement of weights" in this section.
Also check tires for proper inflation pressures. For additional information, refer to "Tire and Loading Information label" in this section.
LIC3577
Cargo area luggage hooks
SECURING THE LOAD
There are luggage hooks (if so equipped) located in the cargo area as shown. The hooks can be used to secure cargo with ropes or other types of straps.
When securing items using luggage hooks, do not apply a load over more than 110 lbs. (490 N) to a single hook.
Technical and consumer information 10-15
WARNING
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
The child restraint top tether strap may be damaged by contact with items in the cargo area. Secure any items in the cargo area. Your child could be seriously injured or killed in a collision if the top tether strap is damaged.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
LOADING TIPS
The GVW must not exceed GVWR or GAWR as specified on the F.M.V.S.S. certification label.
Do not load the front and rear axle to the GAWR. Doing so will exceed the GVWR.
WARNING
Properly secure all cargo with ropes or straps to help prevent it from sliding or shifting. Do not place cargo higher than the seatbacks. In a sudden stop or collision, unsecured cargo could cause personal injury.
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR or the maximum front and rear GAWRs. If you do, parts of your vehicle can break, tire damage could occur, or it can change the way your vehicle handles. This could result in loss of control and cause personal injury.
Overloading and improper loading not only can shorten the life of your vehicle and the tire, but can also cause unsafe vehicle handling and longer braking distances. This may cause a premature tire failure which could result in a serious accident and personal injury. Failures caused by overloading are not covered by the vehicle's warranty.
10-16 Technical and consumer information
TOWING A TRAILER
MEASUREMENT OF WEIGHTS
Secure loose items to prevent weight shifts that could affect the balance of your vehicle. When the vehicle is loaded, drive to a scale and weigh the front and the rear wheels separately to determine axle loads. Individual axle loads should not exceed either of the Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR). The total of the axle loads should not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). These ratings are given on the vehicle certification label. If weight ratings are exceeded, move or remove items to bring all weights below the ratings.
Do not tow a trailer with your vehicle.
FLAT TOWING
Towing your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground is sometimes called flat towing. This method is sometimes used when towing a vehicle behind a recreational vehicle, such as a motor home.
CAUTION
Failure to follow these guidelines can result in severe transmission damage.
Whenever flat towing your vehicle, always tow forward, never backward.
Never tow your front wheel drive vehicle with the front tires on the ground. Doing so may cause serious and expensive damage to the powertrain.
DO NOT tow any continuously variable transmission vehicle with all four wheels on the ground (flat towing). Doing so WILL DAMAGE internal transmission parts due to lack of transmission lubrication.
For emergency towing procedures refer to "Towing recommended by NISSAN" in the "In case of emergency" section of this manual.
Continuously Variable Transmission
To tow a vehicle equipped with a continuously variable transmission, an appropriate vehicle dolly MUST be placed under the towed vehicle's drive wheels. Always follow the dolly manufacturer's recommendations when using their product.
Technical and consumer information 10-17
UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING
DOT (Department of Transportation) Quality Grades: All passenger car tires must conform to federal safety requirements in addition to these grades.
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width. For example:
Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
Treadwear
ment as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction AA, A, B and C
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pave-
Temperature A, B and C
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat, and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.
10-18 Technical and consumer information
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat build-up and possible tire failure.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WARRANTY
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
Your NISSAN vehicle is covered by the following emission warranties:
For USA
1. Emission Defects Warranty
2. Emissions Performance Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
Nissan North America, Inc. Consumer Affairs Department P.O. Box 685003 Franklin, TN 37068-5003
For Canada
For USA
Emission Control System Warranty
Details of this warranty may be found with other vehicle warranties in your Warranty Information Booklet which comes with your NISSAN vehicle. If you did not receive a Warranty Information Booklet, or it is lost, you may obtain a replacement by writing to:
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying NISSAN.
Nissan Canada Inc. 5290 Orbitor Drive Mississauga, Ontario, L4W 4Z5
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C. 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
Technical and consumer information 10-19
READINESS FOR INSPECTION/ MAINTENANCE (I/M) TEST
You may notify NISSAN by contacting our Consumer Affairs Department, toll-free, at 1-800-NISSAN-1.
For Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Transport Canada in addition to notifying NISSAN.
If Transport Canada receives complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may request that NISSAN conduct a recall campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or NISSAN.
cp.aspx?lang=eng (English speakers) or https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/SafSec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fccp.aspx?lang=fra (French speakers)
Additional information concerning motor vehicle safety may be obtained from Transport Canada's Road Safety Information Centre at 1-800-333-0371 or online at www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety (English speakers) or www.tc.gc.ca/securiteroutiere (French speakers).
To notify NISSAN of any safety concerns please contact our Consumer Information Centre toll free at 1-800387-0122.
You may contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division toll free at 1-800-333-0510. You may also report safety defects online at: https://wwwapps.tc.gc.ca/SafSec-Sur/7/PCDB-BDPP/fc-
10-20 Technical and consumer information
Due to legal requirements in some states
and Canadian Provinces, your vehicle may
be required to be in what is called the
"ready
condition"
for
an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
emission control system.
The vehicle is set to the "ready condition" when it is driven through certain driving patterns. Usually, the ready condition can be obtained by ordinary usage of the vehicle.
If a powertrain system component is repaired or the battery is disconnected, the vehicle may be reset to a "not ready" condition. Before taking the I/M test, check the vehicle's inspection/maintenance test readiness condition. Place the ignition switch in the ON position without starting the engine. If the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) comes on steady for 20 seconds and then blinks for 10 seconds , the I/M test condition is "not ready". If the MIL does not blink after 20 seconds, the I/M test condition is "ready". It is recommended that you visit a NISSAN dealer to set the "ready condition" or to prepare the vehicle for testing.
EVENT DATA RECORDERS (EDR)
OWNER'S MANUAL/SERVICE MANUAL ORDER INFORMATION
This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as:
How various systems in your vehicle were operating;
Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were buckled/fastened;
How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,
How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Sounds are not recorded.
These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g. name, gender, age and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer and NISSAN dealer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR. EDR data will only be accessed with the consent of the vehicle owner or lessee or as otherwise required or permitted by law.
Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals for this model year and prior can be purchased. A Genuine NISSAN Service Manual is the best source of service and repair information for your vehicle. This manual is the same one used by the factory-trained technicians working at NISSAN dealerships. Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals can also be purchased.
For USA
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Service Manuals, contact:
www.nissan-techinfo.com
For current pricing and availability of Genuine NISSAN Owner's Manuals, contact:
1-800-247-5321
For Canada
To purchase a copy of a Genuine NISSAN Service Manual or Owner's Manual, for this model year and prior, please contact your nearest NISSAN dealer. For the phone number and location of a NISSAN dealer in your area, call the NISSAN Information Center at 1-800-387-0122 and a bilingual NISSAN representative will assist you.
Technical and consumer information 10-21
MEMO
10-22 Technical and consumer information
11 Index
A
Active Ride Control (ARC) . . . . . . . . . .5-60 Active Trace Control . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-73 Air bag (See supplemental restraint system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Air bag system
Front (See supplemental front impact air bag system) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53 Air bag warning labels . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63 Air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . .1-63, 2-17 Air bag warning light, supplemental . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63, 2-17 Air cleaner housing filter . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Air conditioner Air conditioner operation . . . .4-34, 4-40 Air conditioner specification label . .10-12 Air conditioner system refrigerant and oil recommendations . . . . . . .10-7 Air conditioner system refrigerant recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . .10-7 Heater and air conditioner . . . . . . .4-39 Heater and air conditioner (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . .4-42 Air flow charts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35 Alarm system (See vehicle security system) . . . . . . .2-35 Anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-63 Antifreeze. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . . . .2-12
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . . . .5-54 Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-21 Audio system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42
AM/FM radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47, 4-49 AM radio operation . . . . . . . . . . .4-49 AM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 Auxiliary (AUX) devices operation . . .4-51 Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58 FM radio operation. . . . . . . . . . . .4-50 FM radio reception . . . . . . . . . . . .4-43 iPod® Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55 iPod® player operation . . . . . . . . .4-55 Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Steering wheel audio control switch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62 USB Connections. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-53 USB interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-52 Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Automatic Automatic power window switch . . .2-61 Automatic door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Automatic Emergency Braking (AEB). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12, 5-41
B
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61, 8-11 Charge warning light. . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Battery replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 Key fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-21 NISSAN Intelligent Key® . . . . . . . . .8-21
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . . .5-14 Belt (See drive belt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Blind Spot Warning (BSW) . . . . . . . . . .5-22 Bluetooth® audio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-58 Bluetooth® hands-free phone system . .4-67
Bluetooth® connections. . . . . . . . .4-81 Connecting procedure . . . . . . . . .4-72 Phone indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-71 Text messaging. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-78 Booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-39 Brake Anti-lock Braking System (ABS) . . . .5-54 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . .8-25 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54 Brake warning light. . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Brake wear indicators . . . . . . .2-21, 8-17 Parking brake operation. . . . . . . . .5-21 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Brake Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-55 Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Brake system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-54 Break-in schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-49 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . . . .4-7 Brightness control Instrument panel. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-45 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . . .2-12 Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
C
Capacities and recommended fuel/ lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Cargo cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55 Cargo (See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-13 Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . . . .4-67 Check tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-32 Child restraints . . . . . . . .1-18, 1-19, 1-21, 1-23
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39 Top tether strap anchor point locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-25 Child restraint with top tether strap . . . .1-25 Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . . . .3-6 Chimes, audible reminders . . . . . . . . .2-21 Cleaning exterior and interior . . . . . .7-2, 7-4 Clock set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-61 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Transmission shift selector lock release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-18 Control panel buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Brightness/contrast button . . . . . . .4-7 Controls Audio controls (steering wheel) . . . .4-62
11-2
Heater and air conditioner controls (automatic) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-39 Heater and air conditioner controls (manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31 Coolant Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 Corrosion protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-7 Cruise control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-39 Cup holders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Curtain side-impact and rollover air bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59
D
Daytime Running Light System . . . . . .2-45 Defroster switch
Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-41, 4-41 Rear window defroster switch . .2-41, 4-33 Dimensions and weights. . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Dimmer switch for instrument panel . . .2-45 Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Display controls (see control panel buttons) . . . . . . . . . .4-3 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Drive belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13 Driving Cold weather driving . . . . . . . . . . .5-61 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Driving the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
E
Economy - fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51 Emergency engine shutoff. . . . . . . . . .5-12 Emission control information label . . . .10-11 Emission control system warranty . . . .10-19 Engine
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-14 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine coolant . . . . . . . . .8-5 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8 Checking engine coolant level . . . . . .8-5 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine compartment check locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-3 Engine cooling system . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-13 Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11 Engine specifications . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Event Data recorders . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21 Exhaust gas (Carbon monoxide). . . . . . .5-2 Explanation of maintenance items . . . . .9-2 Explanation of scheduled maintenance items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-5
Extended storage switch . . . . . . . . . .2-50
F
Flashers (See hazard warning flasher switch) . . . .6-2 Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Floor mat positioning aid . . . . . . . . . . .7-5 Fluid
Brake fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Engine coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-4 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . . . .10-11 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Front air bag system (See supplemental restraint system) . . .1-53 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Fuel Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-51 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-24 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Fuel octane rating . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5 Fuel recommendation . . . . . . . . . .10-3 Fuel efficient driving tips . . . . . . . . . . .5-50 Fuel-filler door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24 Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18 Fusible links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-19
G
Gauge Fuel gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-8 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6
General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Glove box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-53 Grocery hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-55
H
Hands-free phone system, Bluetooth® . .4-67 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . . . .2-42 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-42 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Head restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-5 Heated seat switches. . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47 Heater
Heater and air conditioner . . . . . . .4-39 Heater and air conditioner (manual) . .4-31 Heater operation . . . . . . . . . .4-33, 4-41 Hill start assist system . . . . . . . . . . . .5-60 Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Hook Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Horn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-47
I
Ignition switch Push-button ignition switch . . . . . . .5-9
Immobilizer system . . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 5-13 Important vehicle information label. . . .10-11 In-cabin microfilter . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15 Increasing fuel economy . . . . . . . . . . .5-51 Indicator
NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 Indicator lights and audible reminders (See warning/indicator lights and audible reminders). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Information display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-22 Instrument brightness control . . . . . . .2-45 Instrument panel . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-6, 2-2 Instrument panel dimmer switch . . . . .2-45 Integrated Dynamics-control Module. . .5-59 Intelligent Around View Monitor . . . . . .4-15 Intelligent Engine Brake (I-EB). . . . . . . .5-59 Intelligent Key system Key operating range . . . . . . . . . . . .3-8 Mechanical key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3 Remote keyless entry operation . . . .3-12 Troubleshooting guide . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Warning signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16 Intelligent Trace Control (I-TC). . . . . . . .5-59 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 iPod® Player. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-55 ISOFIX child restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23
J
Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-12
11-3
K
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2 Key fob battery replacement . . . . . . . .8-21 Keyless entry
With Intelligent Key system (See Intelligent Key system) . . . . . . .3-12 Keys NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . . . . .3-7 NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-3
L
Labels Air conditioner specification label . . .10-12 Emission control information label . .10-11 Engine serial number. . . . . . . . . . .10-11 F.M.V.S.S. certification label. . . . . . . .10-11 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-63
LATCH (Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren) System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-23 Launch bar menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-7 License plate
Installing the license plate . . . . . . .10-12 Liftgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21 Light
Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-63, 2-17 Brake light (See stop light) . . . . . . . .8-25 Bulb check/instrument panel . . . . . .2-12
11-4
Bulb replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Charge warning light . . . . . . . . . . .2-13 Exterior and Interior lights . . . . . . . .8-25 Fog lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-42 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-42 Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Interior light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-63 Light bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53 Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Trunk light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-23 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Lock Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6 Door locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-4, 3-5 Fuel-filler door lock opener lever . . . .3-24 Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6 Low fuel warning light . . . . . .2-14, 2-16, 2-32 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . . . .2-14 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Luggage hook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-54 Luggage rack (see roof rack) . . . . .2-56, 2-57 Luggage (See vehicle loading information) . . . . .10-13
M
Maintenance General maintenance . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Inside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-3 Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2 Outside the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-2 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Under the hood and vehicle . . . . . . .9-4
Maintenance log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13 Maintenance requirements. . . . . . . . . .9-2 Maintenance schedules . . . . . . . . . . . .9-7 Maintenance under severe operation conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-12 Malfunction indicator light . . . . . . . . . .2-19 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . . . .1-3 Map lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Menu button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Meters and gauges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-4
Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-45 Mirror
Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Moving Object Detection (MOD) . . . . . .4-26
N
NISSAN Anti-Theft System . . . . . . .2-37, 5-13 NissanConnect® Owner's Manual . . . . . .4-2 NISSAN Intelligent Key®. . . . . . . . . . . . .3-7 NISSAN Intelligent Key® battery discharge indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-12 NISSAN Intelligent KeyTM . . . . . . . . . . . .3-2
NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 5-13
O
Octane rating (See fuel octane rating). . .10-5 Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-6 Oil
Capacities and recommended fuel/lubricants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Changing engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . .8-6 Changing engine oil filter . . . . . . . . .8-8 Checking engine oil level . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-5 Engine oil and oil filter recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Engine oil viscosity. . . . . . . . . . . . .10-6 Outside mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 Overheat If your vehicle overheats . . . . . . . . .6-11 Owner's manual order form . . . . . . . .10-21 Owner's manual/service manual order information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21
P
Parking Parking brake operation . . . . . . . . .5-21 Parking/parking on hills . . . . . . . . .5-52
Personal lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-64 Phone, Bluetooth® hands-free system . .4-67 Power
Power door locks . . . . . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49
Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-53 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Power outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-49 Power steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-53 Precautions Maintenance precautions. . . . . . . . .8-2 On-pavement and off-road driving precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-7 Precautions on booster seats . . . . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39 Precautions on child restraints . . . . . . . . .1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Programmable features. . . . . . . . . . . .4-5 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
R
Radio Car phone or CB radio . . . . . . . . . .4-67 FM/AM radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-47 Steering wheel audio control switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-62
Radio frequency remote control Key operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-9
Readiness for inspection maintenance (I/M) test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-20 Rear Cross Traffic Alert (RCTA) . . . . . . . .5-31 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-61
Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Rearview mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-28 RearView Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-8 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-41, 4-41 Rear window defroster switch . . . .2-41, 4-33 Rear window wiper and washer switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Recommended Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2 Recorders
Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-21 Refrigerant recommendation . . . . . . . .10-7 Registering a vehicle in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Remote Engine Start . . . . . . . . . .3-18, 5-15 Reporting safety defects (US only) . . . .10-19 Roof rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-56, 2-57
S
Safety Child safety rear door lock . . . . . . . .3-6 Child seat belts. . . . . .1-21, 1-28, 1-34, 1-39 Reporting safety defects (US only) . .10-19
Seat adjustment Front manual seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Rear seat adjustment . . . . . . . . . . .1-4
Seatback pockets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Seat belt
Child safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-18 Infants and small children . . . . . . . .1-19 Injured Person. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13 Larger children . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-19 Precautions on seat belt usage . . . . .1-10 Pregnant women. . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-13
11-5
Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Seat belt maintenance . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Seat belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-10, 7-6 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . .1-16 Three-point type with retractor . . . . .1-13 Seat belt extenders . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-17 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . . . .1-13, 2-17 Seats Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Front seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-2 Manual front seat adjustment . . . . . .1-3 Rear seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-4 Security indicator light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-20 Security system (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 5-13 Security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 5-13 Security systems Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-35 Self-adjusting brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17 Service manual order form . . . . . . . . .10-21 Servicing air conditioner . . . . . . . . . . .4-42 Shifting Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17 Shoulder belt height adjustment . . . . . .1-16 Side air bag system (See supplemental side air bag, curtain and rollover air bag systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-59 Siri® Eyes-Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-64 Spark plug replacement . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Spark plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-14 Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-8 Speedometer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 SRS warning label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63 Stability control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-56
11-6
Standard maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . .9-8 Starting
Before starting the engine . . . . . . . .5-14 Jump starting . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-9, 8-12 Precautions when starting and driving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-2 Push starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Starting the engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14 Steering Power steering system. . . . . . . . . .5-53 Steering wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-26 Steering wheel audio control switch . . .4-62 Stop light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-51 Storage tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-52 Sun visors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Supplemental air bag warning labels . . .1-63 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63, 2-17 Supplemental front impact air bag system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-53 Supplemental restraint system Information and warning labels . . . .1-63 Precautions on supplemental restraint system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-42 Supplemental restraint system (Supplemental air bag system) . . . . . . .1-42 Switch Autolight switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-43 Automatic power window switch . . .2-61 Fog light switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Headlight and turn signal switch. . . .2-42 Headlight control switch . . . . . . . . .2-42 Instrument brightness control . . . . .2-45
Power door lock switch. . . . . . . .3-5, 3-6 Rear window and outside mirror defroster switch . . . . . . . . . . .2-41, 4-41 Rear window defroster switch . .2-41, 4-33 Rear window wiper and washer switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
T
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-7 Theft (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 5-13 Theft (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 5-13 Three-way catalyst . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-3 Tire
Flat tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-3, 6-4 Spare tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-5, 8-38 Tire and Loading Information label . .10-12 Tire chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-34 Tire pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27 Tire rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-35 Types of tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33 Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . .10-18 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . .8-27, 10-9 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 Tire pressure Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . .5-3 Top tether strap child restraint . . . . . . .1-25 Towing 4-wheel drive models . . . . . . . . . . .6-13 Flat towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Trailer towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17
Towing a trailer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-17 Towing your vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12 Transmission
Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-9 Driving with Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15 Travel (See registering a vehicle in another country). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Trip odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-5, 2-6 Trunk light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-65 Turn signal switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-46
U
Uniform tire quality grading . . . . . . . .10-18 USB/iPod® Charging Ports . . . . . . . . .4-63 USB (Universal Serial Bus) Connection Port (models without Navigation System) . . .4-52
V
Vanity mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Variable voltage control system . . . . . .8-13 Vehicle dimensions and weights . . . . . .10-9 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) OFF switch
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Vehicle Dynamic Control (VDC) system . .5-56 Vehicle identification . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) . . . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) (Chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Vehicle identification number (VIN) plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10
Vehicle immobilizer system . . . . . .2-37, 5-13 Vehicle Information Display . . . . . . . . .2-22 Vehicle loading information . . . . . . . .10-13 Vehicle recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . . . .2-35 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Anti-Theft System), engine start . . . . . . . . . .2-37, 5-13 Vehicle security system (NISSAN Vehicle Immobilizer System), engine start . .2-37, 5-13 Vents. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-30 Visors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-27 Voice Prompt Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . .4-70
W
Warning Air bag warning light . . . . . . . .1-63, 2-17 Anti-lock brake warning light . . . . . .2-12 Battery charge warning light . . . . . .2-13 Brake warning light . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12 Door open warning light . . . . . . . . .2-13 Engine oil pressure warning light . . . .2-13 Hazard warning flasher switch. . . . . .6-2 Low fuel warning light . . . .2-14, 2-16, 2-32 Low tire pressure warning light . . . . .2-14 Low windshield-washer fluid warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16 Passenger air bag and status light. . .1-53 Seat belt warning light . . . . . . .1-13, 2-17 Supplemental air bag warning light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .1-63, 2-17 Vehicle security system . . . . . . . . .2-35 Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Warning labels (for SRS). . . . . . . . . .1-63
Warning/indicator lights and audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
Audible reminders . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Indicator lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Warning lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18 Warning lights, indicator lights and audible reminders. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .0-9, 2-11 Warning systems switch. . . . . . . . . . .2-48 Washer switch Rear window wiper and washer switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Weights (See dimensions and weights) . .10-9 Wheels and tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-27, 10-9 Wheel/tire size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-9 When traveling or registering in another country . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-10 Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Locking passengers' windows . . . . .2-61 Power rear windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Power windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-60 Rear power windows . . . . . . . . . . .2-61 Windshield-washer fluid . . . . . . . . . . .8-10 Windshield wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Wiper Rear window wiper and washer switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-40 Wiper blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-16 Wiper and washer switch . . . . . . . . . .2-39
11-7
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
GAS STATION INFORMATION
FUEL RECOMMENDATION:
Use unleaded regular gasoline with an octane rating of at least 87 AKI (Anti-Knock Index) number (Research octane number 91).
CAUTION
Only vehicles with the E-85 filler door label can operate on E-85. Fuel system or other damage can occur if E-85 is used in vehicles that are not designed to run on E-85.
Using a fuel other than that specified could adversely affect the emission control system, and may also affect the warranty coverage.
Under no circumstances should a leaded gasoline be used, because this will damage the three-way catalyst.
Do not use a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in your vehicle. Your vehicle is not designed to run on a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol. Using a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol in a vehicle not specifically designed for a fuel containing more than 15% ethanol can adversely affect the emission control devices and systems of the vehicle. Damage caused by such fuel is not covered by the NISSAN New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
Do not use fuel that contains the octane booster methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl (MMT). Using fuel containing MMT may adversely affect vehicle performance and vehicle emissions. Not all fuel dispensers are labeled to indicate MMT content, so you may have to consult your gasoline retailer for more details. Note that Federal and California laws prohibit the use of MMT in reformulated gasoline.
U.S. government regulations require ethanol dispensing pumps to be identified by a small, square, orange and black label with the common abbreviation or the appropriate percentage for that region.
For additional information, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
ENGINE OIL RECOMMENDATION:
For additional information, refer to "Recommended fluids/lubricants and capacities" in the "Technical and consumer information" section of this manual.
COLD TIRE PRESSURE:
Refer to the Tire and Loading Information label.
The label is typically located on the driver side center pillar or on the driver's door. For additional information, refer to "Wheels and tires" in the "Do-it-yourself " section of this manual.
RECOMMENDED NEW VEHICLE BREAK-IN PROCEDURE:
During the first 1,200 miles (2,000 km) of vehicle use, follow the break-in procedure recommendations for the future reliability and economy of your new vehicle. For additional information, refer to "Break-in schedule" in the "Starting and driving" section of this manual. Failure to follow these recommendations may result in vehicle damage or shortened engine life.
Printing : November 2018 Publication No.: OM19EM 0P15U1
Printed in the U.S.A.
`19 P15-D
Acrobat Distiller 10.1.16 (Windows)